Arihant, Ncert Exemplar

Sanjeev Kumar
ARIHANT PRAKASHAN
(School Division Series)
ARIHANT PRAKASHAN
(School Division Series)
All Rights Reserved
© PUBLISHERS
No part of this publication may be re-produced, stored in a retrieval system or distributed in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, web or
otherwise without the written permission of the publisher. Arihant has obtained all the
information in this book from the sources believed to be reliable and true. However, Arihant or
its editors or authors or illustrators don’t take any responsibility for the absolute accuracy of
any information published and the damages or loss suffered there upon.
All disputes subject to Meerut (UP) jurisdiction only.
ADMINISTRATIVE & PRODUCTION OFFICES

Regd. Office
‘Ramchhaya’ 4577/15, Agarwal Road, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -110002
Tele: 011- 47630600, 43518550; Fax: 011- 23280316
Head Office
Kalindi, TP Nagar, Meerut (UP) - 250002
Tele: 0121-2401479, 2512970, 4004199; Fax: 0121-2401648
SALES & SUPPORT OFFICES

Agra, Ahmedabad, Bengaluru, Bareilly, Chennai, Delhi, Guwahati,
Hyderabad, Jaipur, Jhansi, Kolkata, Lucknow, Meerut, Nagpur & Pune
ISBN : 978-93-5176-470-0
Published by Arihant Publications (India) Ltd.

For further information about the books published by Arihant
log on to www.arihantbooks.com or email to [email protected]
/arihantpub /@arihantpub Arihant Publications /arihantpub

PREFACE
The Department of Education in Science & Mathematics (DESM) &
National Council of Educational Research & Training (NCERT)
developed Exemplar Problems in Science and Mathematics for
Secondary and Senior Secondary Classes with the objective to provide the
students a large number of quality problems in various forms and format
viz. Multiple Choice Questions, Short Answer Questions, Long Answer
Questions etc., with varying levels of difficulty.
NCERT Exemplar Problems are very important for both; School & Board
Examinations as well as competitive examinations like Engineering &
Medical Entrances. The questions given in exemplar book are mainly of
higher difficulty order by practicing these problems, you will able to
manage with the margin between a good score and a very good or an
excellent score.
Approx 20% problems asked in any Board Examination or Entrance
Examinations are of higher difficulty order, exemplar problems will make
you ready to solve these difficult problems.
This book NCERT Exemplar Problems-Solutions Physics XII contains
Explanatory & Accurate Solutions to all the questions given in NCERT
Exemplar Physics book.
For the overall benefit of the students’ we have made unique this book in
such a way that it presents not only hints and solutions but also detailed
and authentic explanations. Through these detailed explanations,
students can learn the concepts which will enhance their thinking and
learning abilities.
We have introduced some additional features with the solutions which
are as follows
— Thinking Process Along with the solutions to questions we have given
thinking process that tell how to approach to solve a problem. Here,
we have tried to cover all the loopholes which may lead to confusion.
All formulae and hints are discussed in detail.
— Note We have provided notes also to solutions in which special points
are mentioned which are of great value for the students.
For the completion of this book, I would like to thank Priyanshi Garg
who helped me at project management level.
With the hope that this book will be of great help to the students,
I wish great success to my readers.
Author
CONTENTS
1. Electric Charges and Fields 1-22
2. Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 23-39
3. Current Electricity 40-56
4. Moving Charges and Magnetism 57-72
5. Magnetism and Matter 73-88
6. Electromagnetic Induction 89-109
7. Alternating Current 110-127
8. Electromagnetic Waves 128-145
9. Ray Optics and Optical Instruments 146-163
10. Wave Optics 164-179
11. Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 180-197
12. Atoms 198-213
13. Nuclei 214-227
14. Semiconductor Electronics: Materials,
Devices and Simple Circuits 228-248
15. Communication Systems 249-263
1
Electric Charges
and Field
Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)
Q. 1 In figure two positive charges q2 and q 3 fixed along the y-axis, exert a net
electric force in the + x-direction on a charge q 1 fixed along the x-axis. If
a positive charge Q is added at (x, 0), the force on q 1
y y
(i) (ii)
q2 q2
Q
x x
q1 q1 O (x, 0)
q3 q3
(a) shall increase along the positive x-axis
(b) shall decrease along the positive x-axis
(c) shall point along the negative x-axis
(d) shall increase but the direction changes because of the intersection of Q with q 2
and q3
K Thinking Process
Find the nature of force between q1 − q2 and q1 − q3. Nature of force will give the type of
charge q1 . Find the nature of force between newly introduced charge and charge q1..
Ans. (a) The net force on q1 by q 2 and q 3 is along the + x-direction, so nature of force between
q1, q 2 and q1, q 3 is attractive. This can be represent by the figure given below
+q2
+q3
q1 x
+ q1
+q3
The attractive force between these charges states that q1 is a negative charge (since, q 2
and q 3 are positive).
2 NCERT Exemplar (Class XII) Solutions
Thus, nature of force between q1 and newly introduced charge Q (positive) is attractive
and net force on q1 by q 2 , q 3 and Q are along the same direction as given in the
diagram below
+q2
+Q
x
– q1 (x, 0)
+q3
The figure given above clearly shows that the force on q1 shall increase along the
positive x-axis due to the positive charge Q.
Note Unlike charges repel each other and like charges attract each other.
Q. 2 A point positive charge is brought near an isolated conducting sphere

(figure). The electric field is best given by
+q +q
+q +q
(a) (b) (c) (d)

K Thinking Process
Bringing the point positive charge towards the conducting sphere, charges the sphere by
induction process. Electric field lines passes through a charged body following some rules.
Ans. (a) When a positive point charge is brought near an isolated conducting sphere without
touching the sphere, then the free electrons in the sphere are attracted towards the
positive charge. This leaves an excess of positive charge on the rear (right) surface of
sphere.
Both kinds of charges are bound in the metal sphere and cannot escape. They,
therefore, reside on the surface.
Thus, the left surface of sphere has an excess of negative charge and the right surface
of sphere has an excess of positive charge as given in the figure below
attracted negative
charge
– +
– +
– +
– +
+q – +
An electric field lines start from positive charge and ends at negative charge (in this
case from point positive charge to negative charge created inside the sphere).
Also, electric field line emerges from a positive charge, in case of single charge and
ends at infinity.
Here, all these conditions are fulfilled in Fig. (a).
Electric Charges and Field 3
Q. 3 The electric flux through the surface

s
s
s s
+q
+q +q +q
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(a) in Fig. (iv) is the largest

(b) in Fig. (iii) is the least
(c) in Fig. (ii) is same as Fig. (iii) but is smaller than Fig. (iv)
(d) is the same for all the figures
Ans. (d) Gauss’ law of electrostatics state that the total of the electric flux out of a closed
Q
surface is equal to the charge enclosed decided by the permittivity i.e., Q electric = .
ε0
Thus, electric flux through a surface doesn’t depend on the shape, size or area of a
surface but it depends on the number of charges enclosed by the surface.
So, here in this question, all the figures same electric flux as all of them has single
positive charge.
Q. 4 Five charges q 1 , q2 , q 3 , q 4 , and q 5 are fixed at their positions as shown in

q
Figure, S is a Gaussian surface. The Gauss’ law is given by ∫s E.dS = ε 0 .
Which of the following statements is correct?
(a) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
from q1, q5 and q1, q5 and q3 while q on the RHS will have a q1
contribution from q 2 and q 4 only
q2
(b) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution q3
from all charges while q on the RHS will have a contribution q5 q4
from q 2 and q 4 only
(c) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
from all charges while q on the RHS will have a contribution from q1, q3 and q5
only
(d) Both E on the LHS and q on the RHS will have contributions from q 2 and q 4 only
q
Ans. (b) According to Gauss’ law, the term q on the right side of the equation ∫ s E.dS = ε0
includes the sum of all charges enclosed by the surface.
The charges may be located anywhere inside the surface, if the surface is so chosen
that there are some charges inside and some outside, the electric field on the left side
of equation is due to all the charges, both inside and outside S.
So, E on LHS of the above equation will have a contribution from all charges while q on
the RHS will have a contribution from q 2 and q 4 only.
Q. 5 Figure shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole P is placed as

shown. Which of the following statements is correct?
p
–p +p
(a) The dipole will not experience any force

(b) The dipole will experience a force towards right
(c) The dipole will experience a force towards left
(d) The dipole will experience a force upwards
K Thinking Process
Find the electric field strength on the charges of dipole.
Force varies directly with electric field strength i.e., higher the electric field strength greater
the force and vice-versa.
Ans. (c) The space between the electric field lines is increasing, here from left to right and its
characteristics states that, strength of electric field decreases with the increase in the
space between electric field lines. As a result force on charges also decreases from
left to right.
Thus, the force on charge − q is greater than force on charge + q in turn dipole will
experience a force towards left.
Q. 6 A point charge + q is placed at a distance d from an isolated conducting

plane. The field at a point P on the other side of the plane is
(a) directed perpendicular to the plane and away from the plane
(b) directed perpendicular to the plane but towards the plane
(c) directed radially away from the point charge
(d) directed radially towards the point charge
Ans. (a) When a point positive charge brought near an isolated conducting plane, some
negative charge developes on the surface of the plane towards the charge and an
equal positive charge developes on opposite side of the plane. This process is called
charging by induction.
Q. 7 A hemisphere is uniformely charged positively. The electric field at a point

on a diameter away from the centre is directed
(a) perpendicular to the diameter
(b) parallel to the diameter
(c) at an angle tilted towards the diameter
(d) at an angle tilted away from the diameter
Ans. (a) When the point is situated at a point on diameter away from the centre of hemisphere
charged uniformly positively, the electric field is perpendicular to the diameter. The
component of electric intensity parallel to the diameter cancel out.
Multiple Choice Questions (More Than One Options)

Q. 8 If ∫s E.dS = 0 over a surface, then
(a) the electric field inside the surface and on it is zero
(b) the electric field inside the surface is necessarily uniform
(c) the number of flux lines entering the surface must be equal to the number of
flux lines leaving it
(d) all charges must necessarily be outside the surface
K Thinking Process
Go through Gauss’ law in detail.
Ans. (c, d)
∫ s E.dS = 0 represents electric flux over the closed surface.
In general, ∫ E.dS means the algebraic sum of number of flux lines entering the surface and
s
number of flux lines leaving the surface.
When ∫ E.dS = 0, it means that the number of flux lines entering the surface must be equal
s
to the number of flux lines leaving it.
q
Now, from Gauss' law, we know that ∫ s E.dS = ε0 where q is charge enclosed by the
surface. When ∫ s E.dS = 0, q = 0 i.e., net charge enclosed by the surface must be zero.
Therefore, all other charges must necessarily be outside the surface. This is because
charges outside because of the fact that charges outside the surface do not contribute to
the electric flux.
Q. 9 The electric field at a point is

(a) always continuous
(b) continuous if there is no charge at that point
(c) discontinuous only if there is a negative charge at that point
(d) discontinuous if there is a charge at that point
Ans. (b, d)
The electric field due to a charge Q at a point in space may be defined as the force that a
unit positive charge would experience if placed at that point. Thus, electric field due to the
charge Q will be continuous, if there is no charge at that point. It will be discontinuous if there
is a charge at that point.
Q. 10 If there were only one type of charge in the universe, then

(a) ∫ E. dS ≠ 0 on any surface
s
(b) ∫ E. dS = 0 if the charge is outside the surface

s
(c) ∫ E. dS could not be defined

s
q
(d) ∫ E. dS = if charges of magnitude q were inside the surface
s ε0
Ans. (c, d)
q
Gauss' law states that ∫ sE.dS = ε0 , where q is the charge enclosed by the surface. If the
charge is outside the surface, then charge enclosed by the surface is q = 0 and thus,
∫ E.dS = 0. Here, electric flux doesn't depend on the type or nature of charge.
s
Q. 11 Consider a region inside which there are various types of charges but the
total charge is zero. At points outside the region,
(a) the electric field is necessarily zero
(b) the electric field is due to the dipole moment of the charge distribution only
1
(c) the dominant electric field is ∝ , for large r, where r is the distance from a
r3
origin in this regions
(d) the work done to move a charged particle along a closed path, away from the
region, will be zero
Ans. (c, d)
When there are various types of charges in a region, but the total charge is zero, the region
can be supposed to contain a number of electric dipoles.
Therefore, at points outside the region (may be anywhere w.r.t. electric dipoles), the
1
dominant electric field ∝ for large r.
r3
Further, as electric field is conservative, work done to move a charged particle along a
closed path, away from the region will be zero.
Q. 12 Refer to the arrangement of charges in figure and a Gaussian surface of

radius R with Q at the centre. Then,
−Q Gaussian surface
(a) total flux through the surface of the sphere is
ε0
−Q
(b) field on the surface of the sphere is
4πε 0R 2
R Q R
(c) flux through the surface of sphere due to 5 Q is 5Q R/2
zero –2Q
(d) field on the surface of sphere due to − 2Q is same
everywhere
Ans. (a, c)
q
Gauss' law states that total electric flux of an enclosed surface is given by where q is the
ε0
charge enclosed by the surface. Thus, from figure,
Total charge inside the surface is = Q − 2Q = − Q
−Q
∴ Total flux through the surface of the sphere =
ε0
Now, considering charge 5Q. Charge 5Q lies outside the surface, thus it makes no
contribution to electric flux through the given surface.
Q. 13 A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed along a circular ring of radius

R.A small test charge q is placed at the centre of the ring figure. Then,
Q
q
R
(a) if q > 0 and is displaced away from the centre in the plane of the ring,
it will be pushed back towards the centre
(b) if q < 0 and is displaced away from the centre in the plane of the ring,
it will never return to the centre and will continue moving till it hits
the ring
(c) if q < 0, it will perform SHM for small displacement along the axis
(d) q at the centre of the ring is in an unstable equilibrium within the
plane of the ring for q > 0
Ans. (a, b, c)
The positive charge Q is uniformly distributed at the outer surface of the enclosed sphere.
Thus, electric field inside the sphere is zero.
So, the effect of electric field on charge q due to the positive charge Q is zero.
Now, the only governing factor is the attractive and repulsive forces between charges
(Q and q) there are two cases arise.
Case I When charge q > 0 i.e., q is a positive charge, there creates a repulsive force between
charge q and Q.
The repulsive forces of charge Q from all around the charge q will push it towards the centre
if it is displaced from the centre of the ring.
Case II When charge q < 0 i.e., q is a negative charge then there is an attractive force
between charge Q and q.
If q is shifted from the centre, then the positive charges nearer to this charge will attract it
towards itself and charge q will never return to the centre.
Very Short Answer Type Questions

Q. 14 An arbitrary surface encloses a dipole. What is the electric flux through
this surface?
q
Ans. From Gauss' law, the electric flux through an enclosed surface is given by ∫ s E.dS = .
Here, q is the net charge inside that enclosed surface. ε0
Now, the net charge on a dipole is given by − q + q = 0
−q + q 0
∴ Electric flux through a surface enclosing a dipole = = =0
ε0 ε0
Q. 15 A metallic spherical shell has an inner radius R 1 and outer radius R2 . A

charge Q is placed at the centre of the spherical cavity. What will be
surface charge density on
(i) the inner surface (ii) the outer surface?
K Thinking Process
Let us draw the diagram as per the given situation. Using the induction process of
charging distribute the charge on whole spherical shell.
Now, find the required surface charge density.
Ans. Here, the charge placed at the centre of the spherical cavity is positively charged. So, the
charge created at the inner surface of the sphere, due to induction will be − Q and due to
this charge created at outer surface of the sphere is + Q.
+Q
R2
–Q
R1
+Q
−Q
Now, surface charge density on the inner surface = and
4 πR12
+Q
Surface charge density on the inner surface =
4 πR 22
Q. 16 The dimensions of an atom are of the order of an Angstrom. Thus, there

must be large electric fields between the protons and electrons. Why,
then is the electrostatic field inside a conductor zero?
Ans. The protons and electrons are bound into a atom with distinct and independent existence
and neutral in charge.
Electrostatic fields are caused by the presence of excess charges.
But there can be no excess charge on the inter surface of an isolated conductor. So, the
electrostatic fields inside a conductor is zero despite the fact that the dimensions of an atom
are of the order of an Angstrom.
Q. 17 If the total charge enclosed by a surface is zero, does it imply that the
elecric field everywhere on the surface is zero? Conversely, if the electric
field everywhere on a surface is zero, does it imply that net charge
inside is zero.
Ans. Gauss’ law also implices that when the surface is so chosen that there are some chargas
inside and some outside.
q
The flux in such situation is given by ∫ E.dS = .
ε0
In such situations, the electric field in the LHS is due to all the charges both inside and
outside the surface. The term q on the right side of the equation given by Gauss' law
represent only the total charge inside the surface.
Thus, despite being total charge enclosed by a surface zero, it doesn't imply that the electric
field everywhere on the surface is zero, the field may be normal to the surface.
Also, conversely if the electric field everywhere on a surface is zero, it doesn't imply that net
charge inside it is zero.
q
i.e., Putting E = 0 in ∫ E.dS =
ε0
we get q = 0.
Q. 18 Sketch the electric field lines for a uniformly charged hollow cylinder
shown in figure.
+ ++++ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ ++++ +
K Thinking Process
According to general properties, electric field lines start from positive charges and end at
negative charges. If there is a single charge, they may start or end at infinity.
Ans. Thus, the electric field lines will start from positive charges and move towards infinity as
given in the figure below
Side view Top view

Q. 19 What will be the total flux through the faces of the cube as given in the
figure with side of length a if a charge q is placed at?
(a) A a corner of the cube
(b) B mid-point of an edge of the cube
(c) C centre of a face of the cube C
(d) D mid-point of B and C D

K Thinking Process B
Imagine logically about a symmetric figure in such a way that
A
placed charge arrives at the centre of imaginated figure. Thus,
applying Gauss’ theorem to find flux linked with imaginary figure. Thereafter find flux
linked with the given figure.
q
Ans. (a) There are eight corners in a cube so, total charge for the cube is .
q 8
Thus, electric flux at A = .
8 ε0
(b) When the charge q is place at B, middle point of an edge of the cube, it is being shared
equally by 4 cubes. Therefore, total flux through the faces of the given cube = q / 4 ε0 .
(c) When the charge q is placed at C, the centre of a face of the cube, it is being shared
(d) Similarly, when charge q is placed at Q, the mid-point of B and C, it is being shared
Short Answer Type Questions

Q. 20 A paisa coin is made up of Al-Mg alloy and weight 0.75g. It has a square
shape and its diagonal measures 17 mm. It is electrically neutral and
contains equal amounts of positive and negative charges.
K Thinking Process
Treating the paisa coins made up of only Al, find the magnitude of equal number of
positive and negative charges. What conclusion do you draw from this magnitude?
Ans. Here, given quantities are
Mass of a paisa coin = 075
. g
Atomic mass of aluminium = 26.9815 g
Avogadro's number = 6.023 × 1023
∴ Number of aluminium atoms in one paisa coin,
6.023 × 1023
N= × 075
. = 16742
. × 1022
26.9815
As charge number of Al is 13, each atom of Al contains 13 protons and 13 electrons.
∴ Magnitude of positive and negative charges in one paisa coin = N z e
= 16742
. . × 10−19 C
× 1022 × 13 × 160
= 3.48 × 104 C = 34.8 k C
This is a very large amount of charge. Thus, we can conclude that ordinary neutral matter
contains enormous amount of ± charges.
Q. 21 Consider a coin of Question 20. It is electrically neutral and contains

equal amounts of positive and negative charge of magnitude 34.8 kC.
Suppose that these equal charges were concentrated in two point
charges separated by
 1 
(i) 1 cm  ~ × diagonal of the one paisa coin
 2 
(ii) 100 m (~ length of a long building)
(iii) 106 m (radius of the earth). Find the force on each such point charge
in each of the three cases. What do you conclude from these results?
K Thinking Process
| q |2
Force on a point charge = . Here, q = magnitude of one charge, r = distance
4πε 0 r2
between two charges.
Ans. Here, q = ± 34.8 RC = ± 3.48 × 104 C
1
r1 = 1 cm = 10−2 m, r2 = 100 m, r3 = 106 m and = 9 × 109
4 π ε0
|q|2 9 × 109 (3.48 × 104 )2
F1 = = = 1.09 × 1023 N
4 π ε0 r12 (10− 2 )2
|q|2 9 × 109 (3.48 × 104 )2
F2 = = = 1.09 × 1015 N
4 π ε0 r22 (100)2
|q| 2
9 × 109 (3.48 × 104 )2
F3 = = = 1.09 × 107 N
4 π ε0 r32 (106 )2
Conclusion from this result We observe that when ± charges in ordinary neutral matter are
separated as point charges, they exert an enormous force. Hence, it is very difficult to
disturb electrical neutrality of matter.
Q. 22 Figure represents a crystal unit of cesium chloride, CsCl. The cesium

atoms, represented by open circles are situated at the corners of a cube
of side 0.40nm, whereas a Cl atom is situated at the centre of the cube.
The Cs atoms are deficient in one electron while the Cl atom carries an
excess electron.
(i) What is the net electric field on the Cl atom due to eight Cs atoms?
(ii) Suppose that the Cs atom at the corner A is missing. What is the net
force now on the Cl atom due to seven remaining Cs atoms?
Cs+
Cs+
Cs+ Cs+
Cl –
A
Cs+
Cs+ Cs+
0.40 nm
OCs+ CI–
K Thinking Process
(i) Net force on a charge due to two equal and opposite charges will be zero. Also
F
electric field on a charge is given by E = where E = electric field, F = force on charge
q
q due to electric field, q = magnitude of charge q
(ii) If a Cs atom is removed from the corner A then a singly charged negative Cs ion at A
will appear.
Ans. (i) From the given figure, we can analyse that the chlorine atom is at the centre of the cube
i.e., at equal distance from all the eight corners of cube where cesium atoms are
placed. Thus, due to symmetry the forces due to all Cs tons, on Cl atom will cancel out.
F
Hence, E= where F = 0
q
∴ E=0
(ii) Thus, net force on Cl atom at A would be,
e2
F= ,
4πε0 r 2
where, r = distance between Cl ion and Cs ion.
Applying Pythagorous theorem, we get
r = (0.20)2 + (0.20)2 + (0.20)2 × 10− 9 m
= 0.346 × 10−9 m
q2 e2
Now, F= =
4 πε0 r 2
4 πε0 r2
9 × 109 (1.6 × 10− 19 )2
= = 1.92 × 10− 9 N
(0.346 × 10− 9 )2
Q. 23 Two charges q and − 3q are placed fixed on x-axis separated by distance

d. Where should a third charge 2q be placed such that it will not
experience any force?
K Thinking Process
The force on any charge will be zero only if all forces are balanced i.e., force of attraction
is balanced by force of repulsion.
Ans. Here, let us keep the charge 2q at a distance r from A.
2q ρ q –3q
Fby q Fby – 3q
x d
A B
Thus, charge 2q will not experience any force.
When, force of repulsion on it due to q is balanced by force of attraction on it due to
− 3q, at B, where AB = d .
Thus, force of attraction by − 3q = Force of repulsion by q
2q × q 2q × 3q
⇒ =
4 πε0 x 2 4 πε0 (x + d )2
⇒ (x + d )2 = 3x 2
⇒ x 2 + d 2 + 2 xd = 3x 2
⇒ = 2x 2 − d 2
∴ 2 x 2 − 2dx − d 2 = 0
d 3d
x= ±
2 2
(Negative sign be between q and − 3q and hence is unadaptable.)
d 3d
x=− +
2 2
d
= (1 + 3 )to the left of q.
2
Q. 24 Figure shows the electric field lines around three point charges A, B
and C
B
(i) Which charges are positive?

(ii) Which charge has the largest magnitude? Why?
(iii) In which region or regions of the picture could the electric field be
zero? Justify your answer.
(a) Near A (b) Near B
(c) Near C (d) Nowhere
K Thinking Process
(i) Electric lines of forces always starts from a positive charge and ends at a negative
charge. In case of a single charge, electric lines of force start from positive charge ends
at infinity.
(ii) The magnitude of a charge depends on the number of lines of force enamating from
a charge i.e., higher the number of lines of forces, higher the magnitude of charge and
vice-versa.
Ans. (i) Here, in the figure, the electric lines of force emanate from A and C. Therefore, charges
A and C must be positive.
(ii) The number of electric lines of forces enamating is maximum for charge C here, so C
must have the largest magnitude.
(iii) Point between two like charges where electrostatic force is zero is called netural point.
So, the neutral point lies between A and C only.
Now the position of neutral point depends on the strength of the forces of charges. Here,
more number of electric lines of forces shows higher strength of charge C than A. So,
neutral point lies near A.
Q. 25 Five charges, q each are placed at the corners of a regular pentagon of side.
Aq
Eq Bq
O
r
Dq Cq
a
(a) (i) What will be the electric field at O, the centre of the pentagon?
(ii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge from one of the
corners (say A) is removed?
(iii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge q at A is replaced
by − q?
(b) How would your answer to (a) be affected if pentagon is replaced by
n-sided regular polygon with charge q at each of its corners?
K Thinking Process
Due to symmetry forces by all the charges are cancelled out.
Ans. (a) (i) The point O is equidistant from all the charges at the end point of pentagon. Thus,
due to symmetry, the forces due to all the charges are cancelled out. As a result
electric field at O is zero.
(ii) When charge q is removed a negative charge will develop at A giving electric field
q ×1
E= along OA.
4 πε0 r 2
(iii) If charge q at A is replaced by − q, then two negative charges − 2q will develop

2q
there. Thus, the value of electric field E = along OA.
4 πε0 r 2
(b) When pentagon is replaced by n sided regular polygon with charge q at each of its
corners, the electric field at O would continue to be zero as symmetricity of the charges
is due to the regularity of the polygon. It doesn't depend on the number of sides or the
number of charges.
Long Answer Type Questions

Q. 26 In 1959 Lyttleton and Bondi suggested that the expansion of the
universe could be explained if matter carried a net charge. Suppose that
the universe is made up of hydrogen atoms with a number density N,
which is maintained a constant. Let the charge on the proton be
e p = − (1 + y ) e where e is the electronic charge.
(a) Find the critical value of y such that expansion may start.
(b) Show that the velocity of expansion is proportional to the distance
from the centre.
K Thinking Process
Expansion of the universe will start if the coulomb repulsion on a hydrogen atom, at R, is
larger than the gravitational attraction.
Ans. (a) Let us suppose that universe is a perfect sphere of radius R and its constituent
hydrogen atoms are distributed uniformly in the sphere.
As hydrogen atom contains one proton and one electron, charge on each hydrogen
atom.
e H = e P + e = − (1 + Y ) e + e = − Ye = (Ye )
If E is electric field intensity at distance R, on the surface of the sphere, then according to
Gauss' theorem,
q 4 πR 3 N|Ye|
∫ E.ds = ε0 i.e., E (4 πR ) = 3 ε0
2
1 N|Ye|R
E= ...(i)
3 ε0
Now, suppose, mass of each hydrogen atom ~ − mP = Mass of a proton, GR = gravitational
field at distance R on the sphere.
− 4 πR 2 GR = 4 πG mP  πR 3  N
4
Then
3 
−4
⇒ GR = π GmP NR ...(ii)
3
− 4π
∴ Gravitational force on this atom is FG = mP × GR = GmP2 NR ...(iii)
3
1 NY 2e 2 R
Coulomb force on hydrogen atom at R is FC = (Ye ) E = [from Eq. (i)]
3 ε0
Now, to start expansion FC > FG and critical value of Y to start expansion would be when
FC = FG
1 NY 2e 2 R 4 π
⇒ = GmP2 NR
3 ε0 3
2
Y 2 = (4 πε0 ) G  P 
m
⇒
 e 
− 11  (1.66 × 10
− 27 2 
1 )
= × (6.67 × 10 ) 
 − 19 2 
 = 79. 8 × 10− 38
9 × 109  (1.6 × 10 ) 
⇒ Y = 79.8 × 10− 38 = 8.9 × 10− 19 ~
− 10
− 18
Thus, 10− 18 is the required critical value of Y corresponding to which expansion of

universe would start.
(b) Net force experience by the hydrogen atom is given by

1 NY 2e 2 R 4 π
F = FC − FG = − GmP2 NR
3 ε0 3
If acceleration of hydrogen atom is represent by d 2 R / dt 2 , then
d 2R 1 NY 2e 2 R 4 π
mp =F= − GmP2 NR
dt 2 3 ε0 3
 1 NY 2e 2 4 π 
=  − Gmp2 N R
 3 ε 0 3 
d 2R 1  1 NY 2e 2 4 π 
∴ = − GmP2 N R = α 2 R ...(iv)
dt 2
m p  3 ε 0 3 

1 1 NY e 2 2
4π 
where, α2 =  − GmP2 N
mp  3 ε0 3 
The general solution of Eq. (iv) is given by R = Ae αt + Be − αt . We are looking for
expansion, here, so B = 0 and R = Ae αt .
dR
⇒ Velocity of expansion, v = = Ae αt (α ) = αAe αt = αR
dt
Hence, v ∝ R i.e., velocity of expansion is proportional to the distance from the centre.
Q. 27 Consider a sphere of radius R with charge density distributed as p(r ) = kr

for r ≤ R = 0 for r > R.
(a) Find the electric field as all points r.
(b) Suppose the total charge on the sphere is 2e where e is the electron
charge. Where can two protons be embedded such that the force on
each of them is zero. Assume that the introduction of the proton does
not alter the negative charge distribution.
K Thinking Process
According to the given charge density distribution of the sphere of radius R i.e., p(r) = Kr
for r ≤ R = 0 for r > R it is obvious that the electric field is radial.
Ans. (a) Let us consider a sphere S of radius R and two hypothetic sphere of S
radius r < R and r > R.
Now, for point r < R, electric field intensity will be given by, R
1
∫ E.dS = ε0 ∫ ρdV
4 4 r
[For dV, V = πr 3 ⇒ dV = 3 × πr 3 dr = 4 πr 2dr]
3 3
r
1
⇒ ∫ E.dS =
ε0
4 πK ∫ r 3dr (Q p (r ) = Kr)
0
4 πK r 4
⇒ ( E ) 4 πr 2 =
ε0 4
1
⇒ E= Kr 2
4ε0
Here, charge density is positive.
So, direction of E is radially outwards.
For points r > R, electric field intensity will be given by

1
∫ E.dS = ε0 ∫ ρ.dV
R
4 πK 3 4 πK R 4
⇒ E(4 πr 2 ) = ∫
ε0 0
r dr =
ε0 4
K R4
⇒ E=
4ε0 r 2
Charge density is again positive. So, the direction of E is radially outward.
(b) The two protons must be on the opposite sides of the centre along a diameter following
the rule of symmetry. This can be shown by the figure given below. Charge on the
sphere,
R R
q = ∫ ρdV = ∫ (Kr ) 4 π r 2dr
0 0 1
r
R4
q = 4 πK = 2e r O
4
2e 2
∴ K=
πR 4
If protons 1 and 2 are embedded at distance r from the centre of the sphere as
shown,then attractive force on proton 1 due to charge distribution is
− eKr 2
F1 = eE =
4 ε0
Repulsive force on proton 1 due to proton 2 is
e2
F2 =
4 πε0 (2 r )2
Net force on proton 1, F = F1 + F2
− eKr 2 e2
F= +
4ε0 16 πε0 r 2
 −er 2 Ze e2 
So, F= + 
 4ε0 πR 16 πε0 r 4 
4
Thus, net force on proton 1 will be zero, when

er 2 2e e2
=
4ε0 πR 4
16 πε0 r
R4
⇒ r4 =
8
R
⇒ r=
(8)1/ 4
This is the distance of each of the two protons from the centre of the sphere.
Q. 28 Two fixed, identical conducting plates (α and β), each of surface area S
are charged to − Q and q, respectively, where Q > q > 0. A third identical
plate (γ ), free to move is located on the other side of the plate with
charge q at a distance d (figure). The third plate is released and collides
with the plate β. Assume the collision is elastic and the time of collision
is sufficient to redistribute charge amongst β and γ.
Y
x
α β γ
d
–Q q Q
(a) Find the electric field acting on the plate γ before collision.
(b) Find the charges on β and γ after the collision.
(c) Find the velocity of the plate γ after the collision and at a distance d
from the plate β.
Ans. (a) Net electric field at plate γ before collision is equal to the sum of electric field at plate γ
due to plate α and β.
−Q
The electric field at plate γ due to plate α is E1 = , to the left.
S(2 ε0 )
q
The electric field at plate γ due to plate β is E2 = , to the right.
S(2 ε0 )
Hence, the net electric field at plate γ before collision.
q −Q
E = E1 + E2 = , to the left, if Q > q .
S (2 ε0 )
(b) During collision, plates β and γ are together. Their potentials become same.
Suppose charge on plate β is q1 and charge on plate γ is q 2 . At any point O, in between
the two plates, the electric field must be zero.
−Q
Electric field at O due to plate α = , to the left
S(2 ε0 )
q1
Electric field at O due to plate β = , to the right
S(2 ε0 )
q2
Electric field at O due to plate γ = , to the left
S(2 ε0 )
As the electric field at O is zero, therefore
Q + q2 q1
=
S(2 ε0 ) S(2 ε0 )
∴ Q + q 2 = q1
Q = q1 − q 2 ...(i)
As there is no loss of charge on collision,
Q + q = q1 + q 2 ...(ii)
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

q1 = (Q + q / 2 ) = charge on plate β
q 2 = (q / 2 ) = charge on plate γ
(c) After collision, at a distance d from plate β,
Let the velocity of plate γ be v. After the collision, electric field at plate γ is
−Q (Q + q / 2 ) q / 2
E2 = + = to the right.
2 ε0S 2 ε0S 2 ε0S
Q−q
Just before collision, electric field at plate γ is E1 = .
2 ε0S
(Q − q ) Q
If F1 is force on plate γ before collision, then F1 = E1 Q =
2 ε0S
Total work done by the electric field is round trip movement of plate γ
W = (F1 + F2 ) d
[(Q − q ) Q + (q / 2 )2 ] d (Q − q / 2 )2 d
= =
2 ε0S 2 ε0S
1
If m is mass of plate γ, the KE gained by plate γ = mv 2
2
1 (Q − q / 2 )2 d
According to work-energy principle, mv 2 = W =
2 2 ε0S
1/ 2
 d 
γ = (Q − q / 2 )  
 mε0S 
Q. 29 There is another useful system of units, besides the SI/MKS. A system,

called the CGS (Centimeter-Gram-Second) system. In this system,
Qq
Coulomb's law is given by F = 2 r$.
r
where the distance r is measured in cm ( = 10 − 2 µ ), F in dynes ( = 10 −5 N)
and the charges in electrostatic units (es units), where 1 es unit of
1
charge = × 10 − 9 C. The number [3] actually arises from the speed of
[3]
light in vacuum which is now taken to be exactly given by
c = 2.99792458 × 10 8 m/s. An approximate value of c, then is
c = 3 × 10 8 m/s.
(i) Show that the Coulomb’s law in CGS units yields 1 esu of charge
= 1 (dyne) 1/2 cm. Obtain the dimensions of units of charge in terms of
mass M, length L and time T. Show that it is given in terms of
fractional powers of M and L.
(ii) Write 1 esu of charge = xC, where x is a dimensionless number. Show
1 10 −9 Nm2 1
that this gives = 2 . With x = × 10 −9 , we have
4πε 0 x C 2 [3 ]
2
1 Nm 1 Nm2
= [3]2 × 10 9 2 , = (2.99792458)2 × 10 9 2 (exactly).
4πε 0 C 4πε 0 C
Qq [1 esu of charge]2
Ans. (i) From the relation, F = 2
= 1 dyne =
r [1 cm]2
So, 1 esu of charge = (1 dyne) 1/ 2
× 1 cm = F1/ 2 . L = [MLT−2 ]1/ 2 L
⇒ 1 esu of charge = M1/ 2L3/ 2 T− 1.
1 3
Thus, esu of charge is represented in terms of fractional powers of M and of L.
2 2
(ii) Let 1 esu of charge = x C, where x is a dimensionless number. Coulomb force on two
charges, each of magnitude 1 esu separated by 1 cm is dyne = 10−5 N. This situation is
equivalent to two charges of magnitude x C separated by 10− 2 m.
1 x2
∴ F= = 1 dyne = 10−5 N
4 πε0 (10− 2 )2
1 10−9 Nm2
∴ = 2
4 πε0 x C2
1
Taking, x= ,
|3| × 109
1 Nm2 9 Nm
2
we get, = 10−9 × |3|2 × 1018 = 9 × 10
4 πε0 C2 C2
1
If |3| → 2.99792458, we get = 8.98755 × 109 Nm2C −2 .
4 πε0
Q. 30 Two charges − q each are fixed separated by distance 2d. A third charge
q of mass m placed at the mid-point is displaced slightly by x(x << d )
perpendicular to the line joining the two fixed charged as shown in
figure. Show that q will perform simple harmonic oscillation of time
period. q
1/ 2
 8 π 3ε 0 md 3  θ x
T =  –q d d –q
 q2 
K Thinking Process
For motion of charge q to be simple harmonic, force on charge q must be proportional to
its distance from the centre O and is directed towards O.
Ans. Let us elaborate the figure first.
Given, two charge − q at A and B
AB = AO + OB = 2d
P
F
(q)
F r
x r
A B
–q d d –q
x = small distance perpendicular to O.
i.e., x < d mass of charge q is. So, force of attraction at P towards A and B are each
q (q )
F= , where AP = BP = r
4 πε0 r 2
Horizontal components of these forces Fn are cancel out. Vertical components along PO
add.
If ∠APO = O, the net force on q along PO is F ′ = 2 F cos Q

2q 2  x 
=  
4 πε0 r 2  r 
2q 2 x
=
4 πε0 (d 2 + x 2 )3 / /2
2q 2 x
When, x < < d, F ′ = = Kx
4 πε0d 3
2q 2
where, K=
4 πε0 d 3
⇒ F ∝x
i.e., force on charge q is proportional to its displacement from the centre O and it is directed
towards O.
Hence, motion of charge q would be simple harmonic, where
K
ω=
m
2π m
and T= = 2π
ω K
1/ 2
m.4 πε0 d 3  8 π 3 ε0 m d 3 
= 2π = 
2q 2  q2 
Q. 31 Total charge − Q is uniformly spread along length of a ring of radius R.A

small test charge + q of mass m is kept at the centre of the ring and is
given a gentle push along the axis of the ring.
(a) Show that the particle executes a simple harmonic oscillation.
(b) Obtain its time period.
K Thinking Process
For simple harmonic oscillation, force on q is proportional to negative of its
displacement.
Ans. Let us draw the figure according to question,
Z
Axis of ring
O R
Q
A gentle push on q along the axis of the ring gives rise to the situation shown in the figure
below.
z q
Q z
A R B
Plane of the ring
Taking line elements of charge at A and B, having unit length, then charge on each
elements.
dF = 2  −
Q  1 1
q × cos θ
 2 πR  4 πε0 r 2
Total force on the charge q, due to entire ring
Qq 1 1 2
F=− ( πR ) . .
πR 4 πε0 r 2 r
Qqz
F=−
4 πε0 (Z 2 + R 2 )3 / 2
Qqz
Here, Z < < R, F=− = − Kz
4 πε0 R 3
Qq
where = constant
4 πε0 R 3
⇒ F ∝−Z
Clearly, force on q is proportional to negative of its displacement. Therefore, motion of q is
simple harmonic.
K 2π m
ω= and T = = 2π
m ω K
m 4 πε0 R 3
T = 2π
Qq
4 πε0 m R 3
⇒ T = 2π
Qq
2
Electrostatic Potential
and Capacitance
Q. 1 A capacitor of 4 µF is connected as shown in the circuit. The internal
resistance of the battery is 0.5Ω. The amount of charge on the capacitor
plates will be
4 µF 10 Ω
2.5 V
2Ω
(a) 0 (b) 4 µ C (c) 16µC (d) 8 µC
K Thinking Process
In this problem, the three parallel branches of circuit can be considered in parallel ,
combination with one-another. Therefore, potential difference across each branch is same.
The capacitor offers infinite resistance in DC circuit, therefore no current flows through
capacitor and 10Ω resistance, leaving zero potential difference across 10Ω resistance.
Thus, potential difference across lower and middle branch of circuit is equal to the
potential difference across capacitor of upper branch of circuit.
Ans. (d) Current flows through 2Ω resistance from left to right, is given by
V 2.5V
I= = = 1A
R + r 2 + 0.5
The potential difference across 2Ω resistance V = I R = 1 × 2 = 2 V
Since, capacitor is in parallel with 2Ω resistance, so it also has 2V potential difference
across it.
The charge on capacitor
q = CV = (2 µ F ) × 2 V = 8µC
Note The potential difference across 2Ω resistance solely occurs across capacitor as no
potential drop occurs across 10Ω resistance.
Q. 2 A positively charged particle is released from rest in an uniform electric

field. The electric potential energy of the charge
(a) remains a constant because the electric field is uniform
(b) increases because the charge moves along the electric field
(c) decreases because the charge moves along the electric field
(d) decreases because the charge moves opposite to the electric field
K Thinking Process
In this problem, the relationship between E and V is actualised .
Ans. (c) The direction of electric field is always perpendicular to one equipotential surface
maintained at high electrostatic potential to other equipotential surface maintained at
low electrostatic potential.
The positively charged particle experiences electrostatic force along the direction of
electric field i.e., from high electrostatic potential to low electrostatic potential. Thus, the
work is done by the electric field on the positive charge, hence electrostatic potential
energy of the positive charge decreases.
Q. 3 Figure shows some equipotential lines distributed in space. A charged

object is moved from point A to point B.
(a) The work done in Fig. (i) is the greatest
(b) The work done in Fig. (ii) is least
(c) The work done is the same in Fig. (i), Fig.(ii) and Fig. (iii)
(d) The work done in Fig. (iii) is greater than Fig. (ii) but equal to that in
20V 40V 30V
A B A B A B
10V 20V 30V 40V 50V 10V 30V 50V 10V 20V 40V 50V
Fig. (i) Fig. (ii) Fig. (iii)
Ans. (c) The work done by a electrostatic force is given by W12 = q (V2 − V1 ). Here initial and final
potentials are same in all three cases and same charge is moved, so work done is
same in all three cases.
Q. 4 The electrostatic potential on the surface of a charged conducting sphere

is 100V. Two statements are made in this regard
S 1 at any point inside the sphere, electric intensity is zero.
S2 at any point inside the sphere, the electrostatic potential is 100V.
Which of the following is a correct statement?
(a) S 1 is true but S 2 is false
(b) Both S 1 and S 2 are false
(c) S 1 is true, S 2 is also true and S 1 is the cause of S 2
(d) S 1 is true, S 2 is also true but the statements are independant
Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 25
Ans. (c) In this problem, the electric field intensity E and electric potential V are related as
dV
E=−
dr
dV
Electric field intensity E = 0 suggest that =0
dr
This imply that V = constant.
Thus, E = 0 inside the charged conducting sphere causes , the same electrostatic
potential 100V at any point inside the sphere.
Note V equals zero does not necessary imply that E = 0 e.g., the electric potential at any
point on the perpendicular bisector due to electric dipole is zero but E not.
E = 0 does not necessary imply that V = 0 e.g., the electric field intensity at any point
inside the charged spherical shell is zero but there may exist non-zero electric
potential.
Q. 5 Equipotentials at a great distance from a collection of charges whose total

sum is not zero are approximately
(a) spheres (b) planes
(c) paraboloids (d) ellipsoids
Ans. (a) In this problem, the collection of charges, whose total sum is not zero, with regard to
great distance can be considered as a point charge. The equipotentials due to point
charge are spherical in shape as electric potential due to point charge q is given by
q
V = ke
r
This suggest that electric potentials due to point charge is same for all equidistant
points. The locus of these equidistant points, which are at same potential, form
spherical surface.
Q. 6 A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks in series. One of

the blocks has thickness d 1 and dielectric constant K 1 and the other has
thickness d 2 and dielectric constant K 2 as shown in figure. This
arrangement can be thought as a dielectric slab of thickness
d (= d 1 + d 2 ) and effective dielectric constant K. The K is`
d1 K1
d2 K2
K 1 d1 + K 2 d2 K 1 d1 + K 2 d2
(a) (b)
d1 + d2 K1 + K2
K K (d + d2 ) 2K 1 K 2
(c) 1 2 1 (d)
(K 1 d1 + K 2 d2 ) K1 + K2
K Thinking Process
In this problem, the system can be considered as the series combination of two
capacitors which are of thicknesses d1 and filled with dielectric medium of dielectric
constant K 1 and thicknesses d2 and filled with dielectric medium of dielectric constant K 2.
Ans. (c) The capacitance of parallel plate capacitor filled with dielectric block has thickness d1
and dielectric constant K 2 is given by
K ε A
C1 = 1 0
d1
Similarly, capacitance of parallel plate capacitor filled with dielectric block has
thickness d 2 and dielectric constant K 2 is given by
K ε A
C2 = 2 0
d2
Since, the two capacitors are in series combination, the equivalent capacitance is
given by
1 1 1
= +
C C1 C 2
or
K1ε0 A K 2 ε0 A
C1C 2 d1 d2 K1K 2 ε0 A
C= = = ...(i)
C1 + C 2 K1ε0 A K 2 ε0 A K1d 2 + K 2d1
+
d1 d2
But the equivalent capacitances is given by
Kε0 A
C=
d1 + d 2
On comparing, we have
K K (d + d 2 )
K= 1 2 1
K1d 2 + K 2d1
Note For the equivalent capacitance of the combination, thickness is equal to the
separation between two plates i . e. , d1 + d2 and dielectric constant K.

Q. 7 Consider a uniform electric field in the z$ -direction. The potential is a
constant
(a) in all space (b) for any x for a given z
(c) for any y for a given z (d) on the x-y plane for a given z
Ans. (b, c, d)
E
V – δV
P
B
V
δl
Equipotentials
Here, the figure electric field is always remain in the direction in which the potential
decreases steepest. Its magnitude is given by the change in the magnitude of potential per
unit displacement normal to the equipotential surface at the point.
The electric field in z-direction suggest that equipotential surfaces are in x - y plane.
Therefore the potential is a constant for any x for a given z, for any y for a given z and on the
x - y plane for a given z.
Note The shape of equipotential surfaces depends on the nature and type of distribution
of charge e.g., point charge leads to produce spherical surfaces whereas line charge
distribution produces cylindrical equipotential surfaces.
Q. 8 Equipotential surfaces
(a) are closer in regions of large electric fields compared to regions of lower electric
fields
(b) will be more crowded near sharp edges of a conductor
(c) will be more crowded near regions of large charge densities
(d) will always be equally spaced
K Thinking Process
In this problem, we need a relation between the electric field intensity E and electric
potential V given by
dV
E=−
dr
Ans.(a,b,c)
The electric field intensity E is inversely proportional to the separation between equipotential
surfaces. So, equipotential surfaces are closer in regions of large electric fields.
Since, the electric field intensities is large near sharp edges of charged conductor and near
regions of large charge densities. Therefore, equipotential surfaces are closer at such places.
Q. 9 The work done to move a charge along an equipotential from A to B

B
(a) cannot be defined as − ∫ E.dl
A
B
(b) must be defined as − ∫ E.dl
A
(c) is zero
(d) can have a non-zero value
Ans. (c) Work done in displacing a charge particle is given by W12 = q (V2 − V1 ) and the line
2
integral of electrical field from point 1 to 2 gives potential difference V2 − V1 = − ∫ E.dI
1
For equipotential surface, V2 − V1 = 0 and W = 0.
Note If displaced charged particle is + 1 C, then and only then option (b) is correct. But the
NCERT exemplar book has given (b) as correct options which probably not so under
given conditions.
Q. 10 In a region of constant potential

(a) the electric field is uniform
(b) the electric field is zero
(c) there can be no charge inside the region
(d) the electric field shall necessarily change if a charge is placed outside the region
Ans. (b, c)
The electric field intensity E and electric potential V are related as E = 0 and for V = constant,
dV
=0
dr
This imply that electric field intensity E = 0.
Q. 11 In the circuit shown in figure initially key K 1 is closed and key K 2 is

open. Then K 1 is opened and K 2 is closed (order is important).
[Take Q 1′ and Q2′ as charges on C 1 and C 2 and V1 and V2 as voltage
respectively.]
K1 K2
C1 C2
Then,
(a) charge on C 1 gets redistributed such that V1 = V2
(b) charge on C 1 gets redistributed such that Q1′ = Q2′
(c) charge on C 1 gets redistributed such that C 1V1 + C 2V2 = C 1E
(d) charge on C 1 gets redistributed such that Q1′ + Q2′ = Q
K Thinking Process
When key K 1 is closed and key K 2 is open, the capacitor C 1 is charged by cell and when
K is opened and K 2 is closed, the charge stored by capacitor C 1 gets redistributed
between C 1 and C2.
Ans. (a, d)
The charge stored by capacitor C1 gets redistributed between C1 and C 2 till their potentials
become same i.e., V2 = V1. By law of conservation of charge, the charge stored in capacitor
C1 when key K1 is closed and key K 2 is open is equal to sum of charges on capacitors C1
and C 2 when K1 is opened and K 2 is closed i.e.,
Q' 1 + Q' 2 = Q
Q. 12 If a conductor has a potential V ≠ 0 and there are no charges anywhere

else outside, then
(a) there must be charges on the surface or inside itself
(b) there cannot be any charge in the body of the conductor
(c) there must be charges only on the surface
(d) there must be charges inside the surface
Ans. (a, b)
The charge resides on the outer surface of a closed charged conductor.
Q. 13 A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery as shown in figure.

Consider two situations.
K
A. Key K is kept closed and plates of capacitors are moved apart using
insulating handle.
B. Key K is opened and plates of capacitors are moved apart using
insulating handle.
Choose the correct option(s).
(a) In A Q remains same but C changes
(b) In B V remains same but C changes
(c) In A V remains same and hence Q changes
(d) In B Q remains same and hence V changes
K Thinking Process
The cell is responsible for maintaining potential difference equal to its emf across
connected capacitor in every circumstance. However, charge stored by disconnected
charged capacitor remains conserved.
Ans. (c , d)
Case A When key K is kept closed and plates of capacitors are moved apart using insulating
handle, the separation between two plates increases which in turn decreases its
Kε A
capacitance  C = 0  and hence, the charge stored decreases as Q = CV ( potential
 d 
continue to be the same as capacitor is still connected with cell).
Case B When key K is opened and plates of capacitors are moved apart using insulating
handle, charge stored by disconnected charged capacitor remains conserved and with the
decreases of capacitance, potential difference V increases as V = Q / C.

Q. 14 Consider two conducting spheres of radii R 1 and R2 with R 1 > R2 . If the
two are at the same potential, the larger sphere has more charge than
the smaller sphere. State whether the charge density of the smaller
sphere is more or less than that of the larger one.
K Thinking Process
The electric potentials on spheres due to their charge need to be written in terms of their
charge densities.
Ans. Since, the two spheres are at the same potential, therefore
kq1 kq 2 kq1R1 kq 2 R 2
= ⇒ =
R1 R2 4 πR12 4 πR 22
σ1 R 2
or σ1R1 = σ 2 R 2 ⇒ =
σ2 R1
R 2 > R1
This imply that σ1 > σ 2 .
The charge density of the smaller sphere is more than that of the larger one.
Q. 15 Do free electrons travel to region of higher potential or lower potential?

Ans. The free electrons experiences electrostatic force in a direction opposite to the direction of
electric field being is of negative charge. The electric field always directed from higher
potential to lower travel.
Therefore, electrostatic force and hence direction of travel of electrons is from lower
potential to region of higher potential .
Q. 16 Can there be a potential difference between two adjacent conductors

carrying the same charge?
K Thinking Process
The capacity of conductor depend on its geometry i.e., length and breadth . For given
charge potential V ∝1/ C, so two adjacent conductors carrying the same charge of
different dimensions may have different potentials.
Ans. Yes, if the sizes are different.
Q.17 Can the potential function have a maximum or minimum in free space?
Ans. No, The absence of atmosphere around conductor prevents the phenomenon of electric
discharge or potential leakage and hence, potential function do not have a maximum or
minimum in free space.
Q. 18 A test charge q is made to move in the electric field of a point charge Q

along two different closed paths [figure first path has sections along
and perpendicular to lines of electric field. Second path is a rectangular
loop of the same area as the first loop. How does the work done compare
in the two cases?
O θ
a
b
Ans. As electric field is conservative, work done will be zero in both the cases.
Note Conservative forces (like electrostatic force or gravitational force) are those forces,
work done by which depends only on initial position and final position of object viz
charge, but not on the path through which it goes from initial position to final
position.

Q. 19Prove that a closed equipotential surface with no charge within itself
must enclose an equipotential volume.
K Thinking Process
In this problem, we need to know that the electric field intensity E and electric potential V
dV
are related as E = − and the field lines are always perpendicular to one equipotential
dr
surface maintained at high electrostatic potential to other equipotential surface
maintained at low electrostatic potential.
Ans. Let’s assume contradicting statement that the potential is not same inside the closed
equipotential surface. Let the potential just inside the surface is different to that of the
surface causing in a potential gradient   . Consequently electric field comes into
dV
 dr 
dV
existence, which is given by as E = − .
dr
Consequently field lines pointing inwards or outwards from the surface. These lines cannot
be again on the surface, as the surface is equipotential. It is possible only when the other
end of the field lines are originated from the charges inside.
This contradict the original assumption. Hence, the entire volume inside must be
equipotential.
Q. 20 A capacitor has some dielectric between its plates and the capacitor is
connected to a DC source. The battery is now disconnected and then the
dielectric is removed . State whether the capacitance, the energy stored
in it, electric field, charge stored and the voltage will increase, decrease
or remain constant.
K Thinking Process
Here, the charge stored by the capacitor remains conserved after its disconnection from
battery.
Ans. The capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor, filled with dielectric medium of dielectric
constant K is given by
Kε0 A
C= , where signs are as usual.
d
The capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor decreases with the removal of dielectric
medium as for air or vacuum K = 1.
After disconnection from battery charge stored will remain the same due to conservation of
charge.
q2
The energy stored in an isolated charge capacitor = ; as q is constant, energy stored ∝
2C
1/C and C decreases with the removal of dielectric medium, therefore energy stored
increases. Since q is constant and V = q / C and C decreases which in turn increases V and
therefore E increases as E = V / d .
Note One of the very important questions with the competitive point of view.
Q. 21 Prove that, if an insulated, uncharged conductor is placed near a

charged conductor and no other conductors are present, the uncharged
body must intermediate in potential between that of the charged body
and that of infinity.
K Thinking Process
dV
The electric field E = – suggest that electric potential decreases along the direction of
dr
electric field.
Ans. Let us take any path from the charged conductor to the uncharged conductor along the
direction of electric field. Therefore, the electric potential decrease along this path.
Now, another path from the uncharged conductor to infinity will again continually lower the
potential further. This ensures that the uncharged body must be intermediate in potential
between that of the charged body and that of infinity.
Q. 22 Calculate potential energy of a point charge − q placed along the axis

due to a charge + Q uniformly distributed along a ring of radius R. Sketch
PE, as a function of axial distance z from the centre of the ring. Looking
at graph, can you see what would happen if −q is displaced slightly from
the centre of the ring (along the axis)?
K Thinking Process
The work done or PE stored in a system of charges can be obtained
U = W = q × potential difference
Ans. Let us take point P to be at a distance x from the centre of the ring, as shown in figure. The
charge element dq is at a distance x from point P. Therefore, V can be written as
dq dq
V = ke ∫ = ke ∫
r z + a2
2
1
where, k = , since each element dq is at the same distance from point P, so we have
4 πε0
net potential
ke ke Q
2 ∫
V= dq =
z + a
2
z + a2
2
dq
a √z2 + n2
z
–q
P
Considering – q charge at P, the potential energy is given by

U = W = q × potential difference
k Q (− q )
U= e
z2 + a2
1 − Qq
or U=
4 πε0 z2 + a2
1 − Qq
=
4 πε0 a 2
1 +  
z
 a
U
This is the required expression.

The variation of potential energy with z is shown in the figure. The charge − q displaced
would perform oscillations.
Nothing can be concluded just by looking at the graph.
Q. 23 Calculate potential on the axis of a ring due to charge Q uniformly

distributed along the ring of radius R.
Ans. Let us take point P to be at a distance x from the centre of the ring,as shown in figure. The
charge element dq is at a distance x from point P. Therefore, V can be written as
dq dq
V = ke ∫ = ke ∫
r x + a2
2
1
where, ke = , since each element dq is at the same distance from point P, so we have
4 πε0
net potential
ke ke Q
V=
x + a
2 2 ∫ dq = x 2 + a2
dq
a √x2 + a2
x
P
1 Q
The net electric potential V=
4 πε0 x + a2
2

Q. 24 Find the equation of the equipotentials for an infinite cylinder of radius
r 0 carrying charge of linear density λ.
K Thinking Process
The electric field due to line charge need to be obtained in order to find the potential at
distance r from the line charge. As line integral of electric field gives potential difference
between two points.
r
V(r) − V(r0) = − ∫ E.dI
0 r
Ans. Let the field lines must be radically outward. Draw a cylindrical Gaussian surface of radius r
and length l. Then, applying Gauss’ theorem
t
r
1
∫ E.dS = ε0 λ l
1 λ
or Er 2 π rl = λ l ⇒ Er =
ε0 2 πε0 r
r
λ r
Hence, if r0 is the radius, V(r ) − V(r0 ) = − ∫ E.dl = ln 0
r0
2 πε0 r
r λ λ r 1 λ r
Since, ∫r0 2 πε0 r dr = 2 πε0 ∫r 0 r
dr = ln
2 πε0 r0
For a given V,
r 2 πε0
ln =− [V(r ) − V(r0 )]
r0 λ
⇒ r = r0e − 2 πε 0 Vr 0 / λ e + 2 πε0 V(r ) / λ
−2 πε 0 [ V( r ) − V( r ) ]/ λ
r = r0e 0
The equipotential surfaces are cylinders of radius.
Q. 25 Two point charges of magnitude + q and − q are placed at (− d / 2, 0, 0)

and (d / 2, 2, 0), respectively. Find the equation of the equipotential
surface where the potential is zero.
K Thinking Process
The net electric potential at any point due to system of point charges is equal to the
algebraic sum of electric potential due to each individual charges.
Ans. Let the required plane lies at a distance x from the origin as shown in figure.
P
h
2q –q
–d/2 O x d/2
The potential at the point P due to charges is given by

1 q 1 q
−
4 πε0 [(x + d / 2 )2 + h2 ]1/ 2 4 πε0 [(x − d / 2 )2 + h2 ]1/ 2
If net electric potential is zero, then
1 1
=
[(x + d / 2 )2 + h2 ]1/ 2 [(x − d / 2 ) + h2 ]1/ 2
Or (x − d / 2 )2 + h2 = (x + d / 2 )2 + h2
⇒ x 2 − dx + d 2 / 4 = x 2 + dx + d 2 / 4
Or 2dx = 0 ⇒ x = 0
The equation of the required plane is x = 0 i.e., y - z plane.
Q. 26A parallel plate capacitor is filled by a dielectric whose relative

permittivity varies with the applied voltage (U ) as ε = αU where
a = 2V −1 . A similar capacitor with no dielectric is charged to U 0 = 78 V.
It is then connected to the uncharged capacitor with the dielectric. Find
the final voltage on the capacitors.
K Thinking Process
In this problem, the dielectric of variable permittivity is used which gives new insight in
the ordinary problem.
Ans. Assuming the required final voltage be U. If C is the capacitance of the capacitor without
the dielectric, then the charge on the capacitor is given by Q1 = CU
Since, the capacitor with the dielectric has a capacitance εC. Hence, the charge on the
capacitor is given by
Q2 = εCU = (α U ) CU = α CU
The initial charge on the capacitor is given by
Q0 = CU 0
From the conservation of charges, Q0 = Q1 + Q2
Or CU 0 = CU + α CU 2
⇒ α U 2 + U − U0 = 0
− 1± 1 + 4αU 0
∴ U=
2α
On solving for U 0 = 78 V and a = 2 / V, we get
U = 6V
Q. 27 A capacitor is made of two circular plates of radius R each, separated by

a distance d << R. The capacitor is connected to a constant voltage. A
thin conducting disc of radius r << R and thickness t << r is placed at a
centre of the bottom plate. Find the minimum voltage required to lift
the disc if the mass of the disc is m.
K Thinking Process
The disc will be lifted when weight is balanced by electrostatic force.
Ans. Assuming initially the disc is in touch with the bottom plate, so the entire plate is a
equipotential.
The electric field on the disc, when potential difference V is applied across it, given by
V
E=
d
Let charge q' is transferred to the disc during the process,
Therefore by Gauss’ theorem,
V
∴ q ' = −ε0 πr 2
d
q ε
Since, Gauss theorem states that φ= or q = 0
ε0 φ
ε0 V
= εEA = A
d
The force acting on the disc is
V V2
− × q ′ = ε0 2 π r 2
d d
If the disc is to be lifted, then
V2 mgd 2
ε0 πr 2 = mg ⇒ V =
d 2
πε0 r 2
Q. 28 (a) In a quark model of elementary particles, a neutron is made of one up

quarks [charge (2/3) e] and two down quarks [charges − (1 / 3) e].
Assume that they have a triangle configuration with side length of the
order of 10 −15 m. Calculate electrostatic potential energy of neutron
and compare it with its mass 939 MeV.
(b) Repeat above exercise for a proton which is made of two up and one
down quark.
Ans. This system is made up of three charges. The potential energy of the system is equal to the
algebraic sum of PE of each pair. So,
1  qd qd
− u d − u d 
q q q q
U= 
4 πε0  r r r 
9 × 109
= . × 10−19 )2 [{(1 / 3)2 − (2 / 3) (1 / 3) − (2 / 3) (1 / 3)}]
(16
10−15
= 2 . 304 × 0−13  −  = − 7.68 × 10−14 J
1 4
 9 9
. × 10−4 (mnc 2 )
= 4. 8 × 105 eV = 0.48 meV = 511
Q. 29 Two metal spheres, one of radius R and the other of radius 2R, both have
same surface charge density σ. They are brought in contact and
separated. What will be new surface charge densities on them?
Ans. The charges on two metal spheres, before coming in contact, are given by
Q = σ.4 πR 2
Q2 = σ.4 π(2 R 2 )
= 4 (σ.4 πR 2 ) = 4Q1
Let the charges on two metal spheres , after coming in contact becomes Q1′ and Q2′ .
Now applying law of conservation of charges is given by

Q1′ + Q2′ = Q1 + Q2 = 5 Q1
= 5 (σ.4 πR 2 )
After coming in contact, they acquire equal potentials. Therefore, we have
1 Q1′ 1 Q2′
=
4 πε0 R 4 πε0 R
On solving, we get
5 10
∴ Q1′ = (σ.4 πR 2 ) and Q2′ = (σ.4 πR 2 )
3 3
∴ σ1 = 5 / 3σ and
5
∴ σ2 = σ
6
Q. 30 In the circuit shown in figure, initially K 1 is closed and K 2 is open. What

are the charges on each capacitors?
Then K 1 was opened and K 2 was closed (order is important), what will be
the charge on each capacitor now? [C = 1µF ]
C1 = 6C K1 K2
E = 9V C2 = 3C
C3 = 3C
Ans. In the circuit, when initially K1 is closed and K 2 is open, the capacitors C1 and C 2 acquires
potential difference V1 and V2 respectively. So, we have
V1 + V2 = E
and V1 + V2 = 9V
Also, in series combination , V ∝ 1/ C
V1 : V2 = 1 / 6: 1 / 3
On solving
⇒ V1 = 3V and V2 = 6V
∴ Q1 = C1V1 = 6C × 3 = 18 µC
Q2 = 9 µC and Q3 = 0
Then, K1 was opened and K 2 was closed, the parallel combination of C 2 and C 3 is in series
with C1.
Q2 = Q2′ + Q3
and considering common potential of parallel combination as V, then we have
C 2 V + C 3 V = Q2
Q2
⇒ V= = (3 / 2 )V
C2 + C3
On solving, Q2′ = (9 / 2 ) µC
and Q3 = (9 / 2 ) µC
Q. 31 Calculate potential on the axis of a disc of radius R due to a charge Q

uniformly distributed on its surface.
Ans. Let the point P lies at a distance x from the centre of the disk and take the plane of the disk
to be perpendicular to the x-axis. Let the disc is divided into a number of charged rings as
shown in figure.
a √r2 + x2
r
x P
dA = 2πn/r
dr
The electric potential of each ring, of radius r and width dr, have charge dq is given by
σ dA = σ2 πrdr
and potential is given by
(Refer the solution of Q. 23)
ke dq k σ2 πr dr
dV = = e
r + x
2 2
r 2 + x2
1
where ke = the total electric potential at P, is given by
4 πε0
a 2 r dr a
V = πke σ ∫ = πke σ ∫ (r 2 + x 2 )−1/ 2 2 r dr
0 0
r + x
2 2
V = 2 πke σ [(x2 + a2 )1/ 2 − x]

1
So, we have by substring ke =
4 πε0
1 2Q
V= [ x 2 + a2 − x]
4 πε0 a2
Note You may take a = R in this problem.
Q. 32 Two charges q 1 and q2 are placed at (0, 0, d ) and (0, 0, − d ) respectively.

Find locus of points where the potential is zero.
K Thinking Process
Here, 3-dimensional imagination is required to actualise the problem. Also, the net
electric potential at any point due to system of point charges is equal to the algebraic
sum of electric potential due to each individual charges.
Ans. Let any arbitrary point on the required plane is (x, y, z) .The two charges lies on z-axis at a
separation of 2d.
The potential at the point P due to two charges is given by
q1 q2
+ =0
x 2 + y2 + ( z − d )2 x 2 + y2 + ( z + d )2
q1 − q2
∴ =
x 2 + y2 + ( z − d )2 x 2 + y2 + ( z + d )2
On squaring and simplifying, we get

 (q / q )2 + 1
x 2 + y 2 + z2 +  1 2 2  (2 zd ) + d − 0
2
(q
 1 2/ q ) − 1 
This is the equation of a sphere with centre at
  2 2 
 0, 0, − 2d  q1 + q 2  
 
 q1 − q 2  
2 2

Note The centre and radius of sphere (x − a)2 + (y − b)2 + (z − c)2 = r2 is (a , b, c) and r
respectively.
Q. 33 Two charges −q each are separated by distance 2d. A third charge + q is

kept at mid-point O. Find potential energy of + q as a function of small
distance x from O due to −q charges. Sketch PE Vs/x and convince
yourself that the charge at O is in an unstable equilibrium.
Ans. Let third charge + q is slightly displaced from mean position towards first charge. So, the
total potential energy of the system is given by
1  −q 2 −q 2 
U=  + 
4 πε0 (d − x ) (d + x )
− q2 2d
U=
4 πε0 (d 2 − x 2 )
dU − q 2 .2d 2x
= .
dx 4 πε0 (d 2 − x 2 )2
The system will be in equilibrium, if
dU
F=− =0
dx
On solving, x = 0. So for, +q charge to be in stable/unstable equilibrium, finding second
derivative of PE.
d 2U  −2dq 2   2 8x 2 
=    2 − 2 2 3
 4 πε0   (d − x ) (d − x ) 
2 2 2
dx
 −2dq 
2
1
=   2 [2 (d 2 − x 2 )2 − 8x 2 ]
 4 πε0  (d − x )
2 3
At x=0
d 2U  −2dq 2   1 
=    (2d 2 ), which is < 0
dx 2  4 πε0   d 6 
This shows that system will be unstable equilibrium.
dy
Note For function y = f(x), on solving = 0 gives critical points i.e., points of local
dx
maxima or local minima. If for any critical point, this imply that y acquires
maximum value at x = x1 , x = x1,
d2y d2y
2
> 0 this imply that y acquires minimum value at x = x1 and for 2 < 0
dx dx
3
Current Electricity
Q. 1 Consider a current carrying wire (current I) in the shape of a circle.
(a) source of emf
(b) electric field produced by charges accumulated on the surface of wire
(c) the charges just behind a given segment of wire which push them just the right
way by repulsion
(d) the charges ahead
Ans. (b) Current per unit area (taken normal to the current), I/A, is called current density and is
denoted by j. The SI units of the current density are A / m2 . The current density is also
directed along E and is also a vector and the relationship is given by
j = sE
The j changes due to electric field produced by charges accumulated on the surface of
wire.
Note That as the currrent progresses along the wire, the direction of j (current density)
changes in an exact manner, while the current I remain unaffected. The agent that is
essentially responsible for this.
Q. 2 Two batteries of emf ε 1 and ε 2 (ε 2 > ε 1 ) and internal resistances r 1 and r2
respectively are connected in parallel as shown in figure.
(a) Two equivalent emf εeq of the two cells is between ε1 and ε 2, i.e., ε1 < εeq < ε 2
(b) The equivalent emf εeq is smaller than ε1
(c) The εeq is given by εeq = ε1 + ε 2 always
(d) εeq is independent of internal resistances r1 and r2
ε1
r1
A B
ε2 r2
Ans. (a) The equivalent emf of this combination is given by

ε r + ε1r2
εeq = 2 1
r1 + r2
This suggest that the equivalent emf εeq of the two cells is given by
ε1 < εeq < ε2
Current Electricity 41
Q. 3 A resistance R is to be measured using a meter bridge, student chooses

the standard resistance S to be 100Ω. He finds the null point at
I 1 = 2.9 cm. He is told to attempt to improve the accuracy.
Which of the following is a useful way?
(a) He should measure I1 more accurately
(b) He should change S to 1000 Ω and repeat the experiment
(c) He should change S to 3Ω and repeat the experiment
(d) He should given up hope of a more accurate measurement with a meter bridge
K Thinking Process
Here, the concept of accurate balanced Wheatstone bridge is to be used.
Ans. (c) The percentage error in R can be minimised by adjusting the balance point near the
middle of the bridge, i.e., when I 1 is close to 50 cm. This requires a suitable choice
of S.
R R l1 l1
Since, = =
S R (100 − l1 ) 100 − l1
Since here, R : S :: 2 . 9 : 97.1 imply that the S is nearly 33 times to that of R. In orded to
1
make this ratio 1:1, it is necessary to reduce the value of S nearly times i.e., nearly 3Ω.
33
Q. 4 Two cells of emfs approximately 5 V and 10 V are to be accurately compared

using a potentiometer of length 400 cm.
(a) The battery that runs the potentiometer should have voltage of 8V
(b) The battery of potentiometer can have a voltage of 15 V and R adjusted so that
the potential drop across the wire slightly exceeds 10 V
(c) The first portion of 50 cm of wire itself should have a potential drop of 10 V
(d) Potentiometer is usually used for comparing resistances and not voltages
K Thinking Process
The potential drop across wires of potentiometer should be greater than emfs of primary
cells.
Ans. (b) In a potentiometer experiment, the emf of a cell can be measured, if the potential drop
along the potentiometer wire is more than the emf of the cell to be determined. Here,
values of emfs of two cells are given as 5V and 10V, therefore, the potential drop along
the potentiometer wire must be more than 10V.
1
Q. 5 A metal rod of length 10 cm and a rectangular cross-section of 1cm x cm
2
is connected to a battery across opposite faces. The resistance will be
1
(a) maximum when the battery is connected across 1 cm x cm faces
2
(b) maximum when the battery is connected across 10 cm x 1 cm faces
1
(c) maximum when the battery is connected across 10 cm x cm faces
2
(d) same irrespective of the three faces
K Thinking Process
The resistance of wire depends on its geometry l (length of the rod). Here, the metallic rod
behaves as a wire.
Ans. (a) The resistance of wire is given by

l
R =ρ
A
For greater value of R, l must be higher and A should be lower and it is possible only
when the battery is connected across 1 cm x   cm (area of cross-section A).
1
2
Q. 6 Which of the following characteristics of electrons determines the current

in a conductor?
(a) Drift velocity alone
(b) Thermal velocity alone
(c) Both drift velocity and thermal velocity
(d) Neither drift nor thermal velocity
Ans. (a) The relationship between current and drift speed is given by
I = ne Avd
Here, I is the current and vd is the drift velocity.
So, I ∝vd
Thus, only drift velocity determines the current in a conductor.
Multiply Choice Questions (More Than One Options)

Q. 7 Kirchhoff’s junction rule is a reflection of
(a) conservation of current density vector
(b) conservation of charge
(c) the fact that the momentum with which a charged particle approaches a
junction is unchanged (as a vector) as the charged particle leaves the junction
(d) the fact that there is no accumulation of charges at a junction
Ans. (b, d)
Kirchhoff’s junction rule is also known as Kirchhoff’s current law which states that the
algebraic sum of the currents flowing towards any point in an electric network is zero. i.e.,
charges are conserved in an electric network.
So, Kirchhoff’s junction rule is the reflection of conservation of charge
Q. 8 Consider a simple circuit shown in figure stands for a variable resistance

R'.R' can vary from R 0 to infinity. r is internal resistance of the battery
(r<<R<<R,).
R′
A B
V r
(a) Potential drop across AB is nearly constant as R' is varied

(b) Current through R'is nearly a constant as R' is varied
(c) Current I depends sensitively on R'
V
(d) I ≥ always
r+R
Ans. (a, d)
Here, the potential drop is taking place across AB and r. Since the equivalent resistance of
V
parallel combination of R and R' is always less than R, therefore I ≥ always.
r+ R
Note In parallel combination of resistances, the equivalent resistance is smaller than
smallest resistance present in combination.
Q. 9 Temperature dependence of resistivity ρ(T ) of semiconductors, insulators

and metals is significantly based on the following factors
(a) number of charge carriers can change with temperature T
(b) time interval between two successive collisions can depend on T
(c) length of material can be a function of T
(d) mass of carriers is a function of T
Ans. (a, b)
The resistivity of a metallic conductor is given by,
m
e= 2
ne τ
where n is number of charge carriers per unit volume which can change with temperature T
and τ is time interval between two successive collisions which decreases with the increase
of temperature.
Q. 10 The measurement of an unknown resistance R is to be carried out using

Wheatstones bridge as given in the figure below. Two students perform
an experiment in two ways. The first students takes R2 = 10 Ω and
R 1 = 5Ω. The other student takes R2 = 1000 Ω and R 1 = 500 Ω. In the
standard arm, both take R 3 = 5Ω.
R
Both find R = 2 , R 3 = 10 Ω within errors.
R1
(a) The errors of measurement of the two students are the same
(b) Errors of measurement do depend on the accuracy with which R2 and R1 can be
measured
(c) If the student uses large values of R2 and R1 the currents through the arms will be
feeble. This will make determination of null point accurately more difficult
(d) Wheatstone bridge is a very accurate instrument and has no errors of
measurement
Ans. (b, c)
Given, for first student, R 2 = 10 Ω, R1 = 5 Ω, R 3 = 5 Ω
For second student, R1 = 500 Ω, R 3 = 5 Ω
Now, according to Wheatstone bridge rule,

R2 R R
= 1 ⇒ R = R3 × 2 ...(i)
R R3 R1
B
I4
Un
kn
ow
I2 R2 R3
n
C
A G
I1 R1 R4
m rd
ar da
an
St
I3
D
ε
Now putting all the values in Eq. (i), we get R = 10 Ω for both students. Thus, we can
analyse that the Wheatstone bridge is most sensitive and accurate if resistances are of
same value.
Thus, the errors of measurement of the two students depend on the accuracy and sensitivity
of the bridge, which inturn depends on the accuracy with which R 2 and R1 can be measured.
When R 2 and R1 are larger, the currents through the arms of bridge is very weak. This can
make the determination of null point accurately more difficult.
Q. 11 In a meter bridge, the point D is a neutral point (figure).

(a) The meter bridge can have no other neutral. A point for this set of resistances
(b) When the jockey contacts a point on meter wire left of D, current flows to B
from the wire
(c) When the jockey contacts a point on the meter wire to the right of D, current
flows from B to the wire through galvanometer
(d) When R is increased, the neutral point shifts to left
R S
B
A G C
l1 100 – l1
D
Ans. (a, c)
At neutral point, potential at B and neutral point are same. When jockey is placed at to the
right of D, the potential drop across AD is more than potential drop across AB, which brings
the potential of point D less than that of B, hence current flows from B to D.

Q. 12 Is the motion of a charge across junction momentum conserving? Why or
why not?
Ans. When an electron approaches a junction, in addition to the uniform electric field E facing it
normally. It keep the drift velocity fixed as drift velocity depend on E by the relation drift
velocity
eEτ
vd =
m
This result into accumulation of charges on the surface of wires at the junction. These
produce additional electric field. These fields change the direction of momentum.
Thus, the motion of a charge across junction is not momentum conserving.
Q. 13 The relaxation time τ is nearly independent of applied E field whereas it

changes significantly with temperature T. First fact is (in part)
responsible for Ohm's law whereas the second fact leads to variation of p
with temperature. Elaborate why?
K Thinking Process
The higher drift velocities of electrons make collisions more frequent which in turn
decreases the time interval between two successive collision.
Ans. Relaxation time is inversely proportional to the velocities of electrons and ions. The applied
electric field produces the insignificant change in velocities of electrons at the order of
1mm/s, whereas the change in temperature (T) , affects velocities at the order of 102 m/s.
This decreases the relaxation time considerably in metals and consequently resistivity of
metal or conductor increases as .
1 m
ρ= = 2
σ ne τ
Q. 14 What are the advantages of the null-point method in a Wheatstone

bridge? What additional measurements would be required to calculate
Runknown by any other method?
Ans. The advantage of null point method in a Wheatstone bridge is that the resistance of
galvanometer does not affect the balance point, there is no need to determine current in
resistances and the internal resistance of a galvanometer.
It is easy and convenient method for observer.
The Runknown can be calculated applying Kirchhoff’s rules to the circuit. We would need
additional accurate measurement of all the currents in resistances and galvanometer and
internal resistance of the galvanometer.
Note The necessary and sufficient condition for balanced Wheatstone bridge is
P R
=
Q S
where P and Q are ratio arms and R is known resistance and S is unknown
resistance.
Q. 15 What is the advantage of using thick metallic strips to join wires in a

potentiometer?
Ans. In potentiometer, the thick metallic strips are used as they have negligible resistance and
need not to be counted in the length l1 of the null point of potentiometer. It is for the
convenience of experimenter as he measures only their lengths along the straight wires
each of lengths 1 m.
This measurements is done with the help of centimetre scale or metre scale with accuracy.
Q. 16 For wiring in the home, one uses Cu wires or Al wires. What
considerations are involved in this?
K Thinking Process
The availability, conductivity and the cost of the metal are main criterion for the
selection of metal for wiring in home.
Ans. The Cu wires or Al wires are used for wiring in the home.
The main considerations are involved in this process are cost of metal, and good
conductivity of metal.
Q. 17 Why are alloys used for making standard resistance coils?

Ans. Alloys have small value of temperature coefficient of resistance with less temperature
sensitivity.
This keeps the resistance of the wire almost constant even in small temperature change.
The alloy also has high resistivity and hence high resistance, because for given length and
cross-section area of conductor. (L and A are constant)
R ∝ρ
Q. 18 Power P is to be delivered to a device via transmission cables having

resistance R c . If V is the voltage across R and I the current through it,
find the power wasted and how can it be reduced.
Ans. The power consumption in transmission lines is given by P = i 2 Rc , where Rc is the
resistance of transmission lines. The power is given by
P = VI
The given power can be transmitted in two ways namely (i) at low voltage and high current
or (ii) high voltage and low current. In power transmission at low voltage and high current
more power is wasted as P ∝ i 2 whereas power transmission at high voltage and low current
facilitates the power transmission with minimal power wastage.
The power wastage can be reduced by transmitting power at high voltage.
Q. 19 AB is a potentiometer wire (figure). If the value of R is increased, in

which direction will the balance point J shift?
E R
J
A B
Ans. With the increase of R, the current in main circuit decreases which in turn , decreases the
potential difference across AB and hence potential gradient(k) across AB decreases.
Since, at neutral point, for given emf of cell, I increases as potential gradient (k) across AB
has decreased because
E = kI
Thus, with the increase of I, the balance point neutral point will shift towards B.
Q. 20 While doing an experiment with potentiometer (figure) it was found that

the deflection is one sided and (i) the deflection decreased while
moving from one and A of the wire, to the end R; (ii) the deflection
increased, while the jockey was moved towards the end D.
E
A B
E1
G
X Y
(i) Which terminal positive or negative of the cell E 1 is connected at X in
case (i) and how is E 1 , related to E?
(ii) Which terminal of the cell E 1 is connected at X in case (1 in 1)?
Ans. (i) The deflection in galvanometer is one sided and the deflection decreased, while moving
from one end ‘A’ of the wire to the end ‘B’, thus imply that current in auxiliary circuit
(lower circuit containing primary cell) decreases, while potential difference across A and
jockey increases.
This is possible only when positive terminal of the cell E1, is connected at X and E1 > E.
(ii) The deflection in galvanometer is one sided and the deflection increased, while moving
from one end A of the wire to the end B, this imply that current in auxiliary circuit (lower
circuit containing primary cell) increases, while potential difference across A and jockey
increases.
This is possible only when negative terminal of the cell E1, is connected at X.
Q. 21 A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external

resistance R. Plot a graph showing the variation of potential differential
across R, versus R.
K Thinking Process
When the cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external
resistance R, the relationship between the voltage across R is given by
E
V=
r
1+
R
With the increase of R , V approaches closer to E and when E is infinite , V reduces to 0.
Ans. The graphical relationship between voltage across R and the resistance R is given below
V
E

Q. 22 First a set of n equal resistors of R each are connected in series to a
battery of emf E and internal resistance R, A current I is observed to
flow. Then, the n resistors are connected in parallel to the same battery.
It is observed that the current is increased 10 times. What is 'n' ?
K Thinking Process
Here, in series combination of resistors, the equivalent resistance of series combination is
in series with the internal resistance R of battery resistors whereas in parallel
combination of resistors , the equivalent resistance of parallel combination is in series
with the internal resistance of battery.
E
Ans. In series combination of resistors, current I is given by I =
R + nR ′
whereas in parallel combination current 10 I is given by
E
=10 I
R
R+
n
Now, according to problem,
1+ n  1 + n
⇒ 10 =   n ⇒ n = 10
1+
1  n + 1
n
Q. 23 Let there be n resistors R 1 ....... R n with Rmax = max (R 1 ......... R n ) and

Rmin = min { R 1........ R n }. Show that when they are connected in parallel,
the resultant resistance R p = Rmin and when they are connected in
series, the resultant resistance R s > Rmax . Interpret the result physically.
Ans. When all resistances are connected in parallel, the resultant resistance R p is given by
1 1 1
= + ........ +
Rp R1 Rn
On multiplying both sides by Rmin we have
Rmin Rmin Rmin R
= + + .....+ min
Rp R1 R2 Rn
Rmin
Here, in RHS, there exist one term =1and other terms are positive, so we have
Rmin
Rmin Rmin Rmin R
= + + .....+ min > 1
Rp R1 R2 Rn
This shows that the resultant resistance R p < Rmin .
Thus, in parallel combination, the equivalent resistance of resistors is less than the
minimum resistance available in combination of resistors . Now, in series combination, the
equivalent resistant is given by
R s = R1 + ...... + R n
Here, in RHS, there exist one term having resistance Rmax .
So, we have
or R s = R1 + ... + Rmax + .. + ..+ R n
R s = R1 + ... + Rmax ... + R n = Rmax + … (R1 + …+ )R n
or R s ≥ Rmax
R s = Rmax (R1 + K + R n )
Thus, in series combination, the equivalent resistance of resistors is greater than the
maximum resistance available in combination of resistors. Physical interpretation
Rmin
Rmin
V V
(a) (b)
In Fig. (b), Rmin provides an equivalent route as in Fig. (a) for current. But in addition there
are (n–1) routes by the remaining (n –1) resistors. Current in Fig. (b) is greater than current in
Fig. (a). Effective resistance in Fig. (b) < Rmin . Second circuit evidently affords a greater
resistance.
Rmin Rmin
V V
(c) (d)
In Fig. (d), Rmax provides an equivalent route as in Fig. (c) for current. Current in Fig. (d) <
current in Fig. (c). Effective resistance in Fig. (d) > Rmax . Second circuit evidently affords a
greater resistance.
Q. 24 The circuit in figure shows two cells connected in opposition to each

other. Cell E 1 is of emf 6V and internal resistance 2Ω the cell E2 is of emf
4V and internal resistance 8Ω. Find the potential difference between the
points A and B.
A B
E1 E2
K Thinking Process
Here, after finding the electric current flow in the circuit by using Kirchhoff's law or Ohm's
law, the potential difference across AB can be obtained.
Ans. Applying Ohm’s law.
A B
E1 E2
Effective resistance = 2 Ω + 8Ω = 10Ω and effective emf of two cells = 6 − 4 = 2V, so the
electric current is given by
6−4
I= = 0.2A
2+ 8
along anti-clockwise direction, since E1 > E2 .
The direction of flow of current is always from high potential to low potential. Therefore
VB > VA .
⇒ VB − 4V − (0.2 ) × 8 = VA
Therefore, VB − VA = 3.6V
Q. 25 Two cells of same emf E but internal resistance r 1 and r2 are connected
in series to an external resistor R (figure). What should be the value of R
so that the potential difference across the terminals of the first cell
becomes zero?
A B
E E
K Thinking Process
Here, after finding the electric current flow in the circuit by using Kirchhoff 's law or
Ohm 's law, the potential difference across first cell can be obtained.
Ans. Applying Ohm’s law,
Effective resistance = R + r1 + r2 and effective emf of two cells = E + E = 2 E, so the electric
current is given by
E+ E
I=
R + r1 + r2
The potential difference across the terminals of the first cell and putting it equal to zero.
2E
V1 = E − Ir1 = E − r1 = 0
r1 + r2 + R
2 Er1 2 r1
or E= ⇒ 1=
r1 + r2 + R r1 + r2 + R
r1 + r2 + R = 2 r1 ⇒ R = r1 − r2
This is the required relation.
Q. 26 Two conductors are made of the same material and have the same
length. Conductor A is a solid wire of diameter 1mm. Conductor B is a
hollow tube of outer diameter 2mm and inner diameter 1mm.
Find the ratio of resistance R A to RB .
K Thinking Process
l
The resistance of wire is given by R =ρ
A
where A is cross-sectional area of conductor.
Ans. The resistance of first conductor
ρl
RA =
π(10−3 × 0.5)2
The resistance of second conductor,
ρl
RB =
π [(10−3 )2 − (0.5 × 10−3 )2 ]
Now, the ratio of two resistors is given by
2
R A (10−3 ) − (0.5 × 10−3 )2
= =3:1
RB (0.5 × 10−3 )2
Q. 27 Suppose there is a circuit consisting of only resistances and batteries.

Suppose one is to double (or increase it to n-times) all voltages and all
resistances. Show that currents are unaltered. Do this for circuit of
Examples 3,7 in the NCERT Text Book for Class XII.
K Thinking Process
The electric current in two cases is obtained and then shown equal to each other
Ans. Let the effective internal resistance of the battery is Reff , the effective external resistance R
and the effective voltage of the battery is Veff .
Applying Ohm’s law,
Then current through R is given by
Veff
I=
Reff + R
R
I Veff
Reff
If all the resistances and the effective voltage are increased n-times, then we have
Veff new = nVeff , Reff new = nReff
and Rnew = nR
Then, the new current is given by
nVeff n(Veff ) (Veff )
I′ = = = =I
nReff + nR n(Reff + R ) (Reff + R )
Thus, current remains the same.

Q. 28 Two cells of voltage 10V and 2V and 10Ω internal resistances 10Ω and
5Ω respectively, are connected in parallel with the positive end of 10V
battery connected to negative pole of 2V battery (figure). Find the
effective voltage and effective resistance of the combination.
R
I
2V
I2 5Ω
10V
I1 10Ω
K Thinking Process
The question can be solved by using Kirchhoff's voltage rule/ loop rule.
Ans. Applying Kirchhoff's junction rule, I1 = I + I 2

Applying Kirchhoff's II law / loop rule applied in outer loop containing 10V cell and
resistance R, we have
10 = IR + 10 I1 …(i)
Applying Kirchhoff II law / loop rule applied in outer loop containing 2V cell and resistance R,
we have
2 = 5I 2 − RI = 5(I1 − I ) − RI
or 4 = 10 I1 − 10I − 2 RI …(ii)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), gives
⇒ 6 = 3RI + 10I
2 = I  R + 
10
 3
Also, the external resistance is R . The Ohm's law states that
V = I(R + Reff )
On comparing, we have V = 2 V and effective internal resistance
(Reff ) =   Ω
10
 3
Since, the effective internal resistance (Reff ) of two cells is   Ω, being the parallel
10
 3
combination of 5Ω and 10Ω. The equivalent circuit is given below
R R
I1
2V
I
5Ω I2
10V
I2 10Ω Reff
Veff
Q. 29 A room has AC run for 5 a day at a voltage of 220V. The wiring of the
room consists of Cu of 1 mm radius and a length of 10m. Power
consumption per day is 10 commercial units. What fraction of it goes in
the joule heating in wires? What would happen if the wiring is made of
aluminium of the same dimensions?
[ ρ Cu = 11.7 × 10 −8 Ωm, ρ Al = 2.7 × 10 −8 Ωm]
K Thinking Process
The power consumption in a current carrying resistor is given by P = I2R
Ans. Power consumption in a day i.e., in 5 = 10 units
Or power consumption per hour = 2units
Or power consumption = 2units = 2kW = 2000J/s
Also, we know that power consumption in resistor,
P=V×l
⇒ 2000 W = 220 V × l or l ≈ 9 A
l
Now, the resistance of wire is given by R = ρ
A
where, A is cross-sectional area of conductor.
Power consumption in first current carrying wire is given by

P = l2 R
10
ρ l2 = 1.7 × 10−8 ×
l
× 81 J/s ≈ 4 J/s
A π × 10−6
4
The fractional loss due to the joule heating in first wire = × 100 = 02. %
2000
ρ
Power loss in Al wire = 4 Al = 1.6 × 4 = 6.4 J / s
ρCu
6.4
The fractional loss due to the joule heating in second wire = × 100 = 0.32%
2000
Q. 30 In an experiment with a potentiometer, VB = 10V. R is adjusted to be

50Ω (figure). A student wanting to measure voltage E 1 of a battery
(approx. 8V) finds no null point possible. He then diminishes R to
10Ω and is able to locate the null point on the last (4th) segment of the
potentiometer. Find the resistance of the potentiometer wire and
potential drop per unit length across the wire in the second case.
E1 1
E2 3
G
2
B
N1
R
C
K Thinking Process
The null point is obtained only when emf of primary cell is less than the potential
difference across the wires of potentiometer.
Ans. Let R' be the resistance of the potentiometer wire.
Effective resistance of potentiometer and variable resistor (R = 50Ω ) is given by = 50Ω + R ′
Effective voltage applied across potentiometer = 10V.
The current through the main circuit,
V 10
I= =
50Ω + R 50Ω + R
Potential difference across wire of potentiometer,
10R ′
IR ′ =
50Ω + R
Since with 50Ω resistor, null point is not obtained it's possible only when
10 × R ′
<8
50 + R
⇒ 10R ′< 400 + 8R ′
2 R ′ < 400 or R ′< 200Ω.
Similarly with 10Ω resistor , null point is obtained its possible only when
10 × R ′
>8
10 + R ′
⇒ 2 R′ > 80
⇒ R′> 40
3
10 × R′
4 < 8
10 + R ′
⇒ 7.5R ′ < 80 + 8R ′
R′ > 160
⇒ 160 < R ′< 200.
Any R′ between 160Ω and 200 Ω wlll achieve.
Since, the null point on the last (4th) segment of the potentiometer, therefore potential drop
across 400 cm of wire > 8V.
This imply that potential gradient
k × 400 cm > 8 V
or k × 4 m > 8V
k > 2V /m
Similarly, potential drop across 300 cm wire < 8V.
k × 300cm < 8 V
2
or k × 3m < 8 V, k < 2 V /m
3
2
Thus, 2 V /m > k > 2 V /m
3
Q. 31 (a) Consider circuit in figure. How much energy is absorbed by electrons

from the initial state of no current (Ignore thermal motion) to the
state of drift velocity ?
R = 6Ω
I
V = 6V
(b) Electrons give up energy at the rate of RI 2 per second to the thermal
energy. What time scale would number associate with energy in
problem (a)? n = number of electron/volume = 1029 / m3 . Length of
circuit = 10 cm, cross-section= A = (1 mm)2 .
K Thinking Process
The current in a conductor and drift velocity of electrons are related as i = neAv d ,
where v d is drift speed of electrons and n is number density of electrons.
Ans. (a) By Ohm’s law, current I is given by
I = 6 V / 6 Ω = 1A
i
But, I = net A vd or vd =
neA
On substituting the values
For, n = number of electron/volume = 1029 /m3
length of circuit = 10cm, cross-section = A = (1mm)2

1
vd = 29
10 × 16 . × 10−19 × 10−6
1
= × 10−4 m/s
1.6
Therefore, the energy absorbed in the form of KE is given by
1
KE = me vd 2 × nAI
2
1 1
= × 91 . × 1031 × × 1020 × 108 × 106 × 101
2 2.56
= 2 × 10−17 J
(b) Power loss is given by P = I 2 R = 6 × 12 = 6 W = 6 J/s
E
Since, P=
t
Therefore, E= P×t
E 2 × 10−17
or t = = ≈ 10−17 s
P 6
4
Moving Charges
and Magnetism
Q. 1 Two charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a completely
opposite sense in a uniform magnetic field B = B 0 k.
$
(a) They have equal z-components of momenta
(b) They must have equal charges
(c) They necessarily represent a particle, anti-particle pair
(d) The charge to mass ratio satisfy
e + e = 0
   
 m 1  m 2
K Thinking Process
The uniqueness of helical path is determined by its pitch which is given by
2 πmv cos θ
Pitch =
qB
Ans. (d) For given pitch d correspond to charge particle, we have
q 2 πv cos θ
= = constant
m qB
Since, charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a completely opposite sense
in a uniform magnetic field B, LHS for two particles should be same and of opposite
sign. Therefore,
e + e = 0
   
 m 1  m 2
Note Consider e in place of q in solution.
Q. 2 Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving electrons (velocity v) produce

a magnetic field B such that
(a) B is perpendicular of
(b) B is parallel to v
(c) it obeys inverse cube law
(d) it is along the line joining the electron and point of observation
K Thinking Process
Here use of Biot-Savart law play vital role.
Ans. (a) In Biot-Savart’s law, magnetic field B|| i dl × r and idl due to flow of electron is in
opposite direction of v and by direction of cross product of two vectors
B⊥v
Q. 3 A current carrying circular loop of radius R is placed in the x-y plane

with centre at the origin. Half of the loop with x > 0 is now bent so that
it now lies in the y-z plane.
(a) The magnitude of magnetic moment now diminishes
(b) The magnetic moment does not change
(c) The magnitude of B at (0 ,0 , z), z > R increases
(d) The magnitude of B at (0 ,0 , z), z >> R is unchanged
K Thinking Process
The magnetic moment of circular loop and the net magnitudes of magnetic moment of
each semicircular loop of radius R lie in the x-y plane and the y-z plane are compared.
Ans. (a) The direction of magnetic moment of circular loop of radius R is placed in the x-y plane
is along z-direction and given by M = I ( πr 2 ), when half of the loop with x > 0 is now
bent so that it now lies in the y-z plane, the magnitudes of magnetic moment of each
semicircular loop of radius R lie in the x-y plane and the y-z plane is M ′ = I ( πr 2 ) /4 and
the direction of magnetic moments are along z-direction and x-direction respectively.
Their resultant
Mnet = M ′ 2 + M ′ 2 = 2 M ′ = 2 I ( πr 2 ) / 4
So, Mnet < M or M diminishes.
Q. 4 An electron is projected with uniform velocity along the axis of a current

carrying long solenoid. Which of the following is true?
(a) The electron will be accelerated along the axis
(b) The electron path will be circular about the axis
(c) The electron will experience a force at 45° to the axis and hence execute a
helical path
(d) The electron will continue to move with uniform velocity along the axis of the
solenoid
K Thinking Process
Here, magnetic lorentz force comes into existence when a charge moves in uniform
magnetic field produces by current carrying long solenoid.
Ans. (d) Magnetic Lorentz force electron is projected with uniform velocity along the axis of a
current carrying long solenoid F = − evB sin180° = 0 (θ = 0°) as magnetic field and
velocity are parallel. The electron will continue to move with uniform velocity along the
axis of the solenoid.
Q. 5 In a cyclotron, a charged particle

(a) undergoes acceleration all the time
(b) speeds up between the dees because of the magnetic field
(c) speeds up in a dee
(d) slows down within a dee and speeds up between dees
Moving Charges and Magnetism 59
K Thinking Process
Here, understanding of working of cyclotron is needed.
Ans. (a) The charged particle undergoes acceleration as
(i) speeds up between the dees because of the oscillating electric field and
(ii) speed remain the same inside the dees because of the magnetic field but
direction undergoes change continuously.
Q.6 A circular current loop of magnetic moment M is in an arbitrary

orientation in an external magnetic field B. The work done to rotate the
loop by 30° about an axis perpendicular to its plane is
MB
(a) MB (b) 3
2
MB
(c) (d) zero
2
K Thinking Process
The rotation of the loop by 30° about an axis perpendicular to its plane imply that the
axis of the loop still continues to inclined with the same angle with the direction of
magnetic field .
Ans. (a) The rotation of the loop by 30° about an axis perpendicular to its plane make no
change in the angle made by axis of the loop with the direction of magnetic field,
therefore, the work done to rotate the loop is zero.
Note The work done to rotate the loop in magnetic field W = MB (cos θ 1 − cos θ2). where
signs are as usual.
Q.7 The gyro-magnetic ratio of an electron in an H-atom, according to Bohr

model, is
(a) independent of which orbit it is in
(b) negative
(c) positive
(d) increases with the quantum number n.
K Thinking Process
The gyro-magnetic ratio of an electron in an H-atom is equal to the ratio of the magnetic
moment and the angular momentum of the electron.
Ans. (a) If I is the magnitude of the angular momentum of the electron about the central
nucleus (orbital angular momentum). Vectorially,
e
µl = − l.
2 me
The negative sign indicates that the angular momentum of the electron is opposite in
direction to the magnetic moment.

Q. 8 Consider a wire carrying a steady current, I placed in a uniform magnetic
field B perpendicular to its length. Consider the charges inside the wire.
It is known that magnetic forces do no work. This implies that,
(a) motion of charges inside the conductor is unaffected by B, since they do not
absorb energy
(b) some charges inside the wire move to the surface as a result of B
(c) If the wire moves under the influence of B, no work is done by the force
(d) if the wire moves under the influence of B, no work is done by the magnetic
force on the ions, assumed fixed within the wire.
Ans. (b, d)
Magnetic forces on a wire carrying a steady current, I placed in a uniform magnetic field B,
a wire carrying a steady current, I placed in a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to its
length is given by
F = IlB
The direction of force is given by Fleming's left hand rule and F is perpendicular to the
direction of magnetic field B. Therefore, work done by the magnetic force on the ions is zero.
Q. 9 Two identical current carrying coaxial loops, carry current I in an

opposite sense. A simple amperian loop passes through both of them
once. Calling the loop as C,
(a) ∫ B. dl = mµ 0 I
(b) the value of ∫ B. dl = +2µ 0 I is independent of sense of C
(c) there may be a point on C where, B and dl are perpendicular
(d) B vanishes everywhere on C
K Thinking Process
The Ampere’s circuital law is to be applied on given situation.
Ans. (b, c)
Applying the Ampere’s circuital law, we have
∫ B.dl = µ 0 (I − I ) = 0 (because current is in opposite sense.)
c
Also, there may be a point on C where B and dl are perpendicular and hence,
∫ B.dl = 0
c
Q. 10A cubical region of space is filled with some uniform electric and
magnetic fields. An electron enters the cube across one of its faces with
velocity v and a positron enters via opposite face with velocity − v. At
this instant,
(a) the electric forces on both the particles cause identical accelerations
(b) the magnetic forces on both the particles cause equal accelerations
(c) both particles gain or loose energy at the same rate
(d) the motion of the Centre of Mass (CM) is determined by B alone
K Thinking Process
The Lorentz force is experienced by the single moving charge in space is filled with some
uniform electric and magnetic fields is given by F = qE + q(v × B).
Ans. (b, c, d)
The magnetic forces F = q (v × B), on charge particle is either zero or F is perpendicular to v
(or component of v) which in turn revolves particles on circular path with uniform speed. In
both the cases particles have equal accelerations.
Both the particles gain or loss energy at the same rate as both are subjected to the same
electric force (F = q E) in opposite direction.
Since, there is no change of the Centre of Mass (CM) of the particles , therefore the motion
of the Centre of Mass (CM) is determined by B alone.
Q. 11 A charged particle would continue to move with a constant velocity in a

region wherein,
(a) E = 0 , B ≠ 0 (b) E ≠ 0 , B ≠ 0
(c) E ≠ 0 , B = 0 (d) E = 0 , B = 0
K Thinking Process
The Lorentz force is experienced by the single moving charge in space is filled with some
uniform electric and magnetic fields is given by F = qE + q(v × B ).
Ans. (a, b, d)
Here, force on charged particle due to electric field FE = qE.
Force on charged particle due to magnetic field, Fm = q (v × B)
Now, FE = 0 if E = 0 and Fm = 0 if sin θ = 0 or θ° = 0° or 180°
Hence, B ≠ 0 .
Also, E = 0 and B = 0 and the resultant force q E + q (v × B) = 0. In this case E ≠ 0 and B ≠ 0

Q. 12 Verify that the cyclotron frequency ω = eB /m has the correct
dimensions of [T ] −1 .
Ans. For a charge particle moving perpendicular to the magnetic field, the magnetic Lorentz
forces provides necessary centripetal force for revolution.
mv 2
= qvB
R
On simplifying the terms, we have
qB v
∴ = =ω
m R
Finding the dimensional formula of angular frequency
[ω] =   =   = [T]−1
qB v
∴
 m   R 
Q. 13 Show that a force that does no work must be a velocity dependent force.
Ans. Let no work is done by a force , so we have
dW = F.dl = 0
⇒ F. v dt = 0 (Since, dl = v dt and dt ≠ 0)
⇒ F.v = 0
Thus, F must be velocity dependent which implies that angle between F and v is 90°. If v
changes (direction), then (directions) F should also change so that above condition is
satisfied,
Q. 14The magnetic force depends on v which depends on the inertial frame of

reference. Does then the magnetic force differ from inertial frame to
frame? Is it reasonable that the net acceleration has a different value in
different frames of reference?
Ans. Yes, the magnetic force differ from inertial frame to frame. The magnetic force is frame
dependent.
The net acceleration which comes into existing out of this is however, frame independent
(non -relativistic physics) for inertial frames.
Q. 15 Describe the motion of a charged particle in a cyclotron if the frequency

of the radio frequency (rf) field were doubled.
K Thinking Process
The relationship of radio frequency and charge particle frequency must be equal in order
to accelerate the charge particle between the dees in cyclotron.
Ans. Here, the condition of magnetic resonance is violated.
When the frequency of the radio frequency (rf) field were doubled, the time period of the
radio frequency (rf) field were halved. Therefore, the duration in which particle completes
half revolution inside the dees, radio frequency completes the cycle.
Hence, particle will accelerate and decelerate alternatively. So, the radius of path in the dees
will remain same.
Q. 16Two long wires carrying current I 1 and I 2 are arranged as shown in figure.
The one carrying current I 1 is along is the x-axis. The other carrying
current I 2 is along a line parallel to the y-axis given by x = 0 and z = d .
Find the force exerted at o2 because of the wire along the x-axis.
z
O2
I2
y
O1
x I1
K Thinking Process
Here, the understanding of application of the rule of finding directions of magnetic field
and magnetic force on current carrying wire placed in magnetic field is beautifully tested.
Ans. In Biot- Savart law, magnetic field B is parallel to idl × r and idl have its direction along the
direction of flow of current.
Here, for the direction of magnetic field, At O2 , due to wire carrying I1 current is
B||parallel idl × r or $i × k,
$ but $i × k$ = − $j
So, the direction at O2 is along Y- direction.

The direction of magnetic force exerted at O2 because of the wire along the, x-axis.
F = Il × B ≈ $j × (− $j ) = 0
So, the magnetic field due to l1 is along the y-axis. The second wire is along the y-axis
and hence, the force is zero.

Q. 17A current carrying loop consists of 3 identical quarter circles of radius R,
lying in the positive quadrants of the x-y, y-z and z-x planes with their
centres at the origin, joined together. Find the direction and magnitude
of B at the origin.
K Thinking Process
The magnetic field due to arc of current carrying coil which subtends an angle θ at centre
µ I θ
is given by B = 0 .
4π R
Ans. For the current carrying loop quarter circles of radius R, lying in the positive quadrants of
the x-y plane
µ I ( π /2) $ µ 0 I $
B1 = 0 k= k
4π R 4 2R
For the current carrying loop quarter circles of radius R, lying in the positive quadrants of the
y-z plane
µ I $
B2 = 0 i
4 2R
For the current carrying loop quarter circles of radius R, lying in the positive quadrants of the
z-x plane
µ I $
B3 = 0 i
4 2R
Current carrying loop consists of 3 identical quarter circles of radius R, lying in the positive
quadrants of the x-y, y-y and z-z planes with their centres at the origin, joined together is
equal to the vector sum of magnetic field due to each quarter and given by
1 $ $ $ µ 0I
B= (i + j + k) .
4π 2R
Q. 18A charged particle of charge e and mass m is moving in an electric field E

and magnetic field B. Construct dimensionless quantities and quantities
of dimension [T ] −1 .
Ans. No dimensionless quantity can be constructed using given quantities.
For a charge particle moving perpendicular to the magnetic field, the magnetic Lorentz
forces provides necessary centripetal force for revolution.
mv 2
= qvB
R
On simplifying the terms, we have
qB v
∴ = =ω
m R
Finding the dimensional formula of angular frequency
[ω] =   =   = [T]−1
qB v
∴
 m   R 
Q. 19An electron enters with a velocity v = v 0 $i into a cubical region (faces

parallel to coordinate planes) in which there are uniform electric and
magnetic fields. The orbit of the electron is found to spiral down inside
the cube in plane parallel to the x-y plane. Suggest a configuration of
fields E and B that can lead to it.
K Thinking Process
The magnetic field revolves the charge particle in uniform circular motion in x-y plane
and electric field along x-direction increases the speed, which in turn increases the radius
of circular path and hence, particle traversed on spiral path.
Ans. Considering magnetic field B = B0 k,$ and an electron enters with a velocity v = v $i into a
0
cubical region (faces parallel to coordinate planes).
The force on electron, using magnetic Lorentz force, is given by
F = −e (v $i × B k$ ) = e v B $i
0 0 0 0
which revolves the electron in x-y plane.

The electric force F = −e E k$ accelerates e along z-axis which in turn increases the radius of
0
circular path and hence particle traversed on spiral path.
Q. 20Do magnetic forces obey Newton's third law. Verify for two current
elements dl 1 = dl $i located at the origin and dl 2 = dl $j located at
(0, R, 0). Both carry current I.
K Thinking Process
Here, the understanding of application of the rules of finding directions of magnetic field
and magnetic force on current carrying wire placed in magnetic field is needed.
Ans. In Biot-Savart’s law, magnetic field B is parallel (II) to idl × r and idl have its direction along
the direction of flow of current.
Here, for the direction of magnetic field, At dl2 , located at (0, R, 0)due to wire d1 is given by
B|| idl × r or $i ×$j (because point (0, R, 0) lies on y-axis), but $i × $j = k$
So, the direction of magnetic field at d 2 is along z-direction.

The direction of magnetic force exerted at d 2 because of the first wire along the x-axis.
F = i (I × B) i.e., F || (i × k ) or along − $j direction.
Therefore, force due to dl1 on dl2 is non-zero.
Now, for the direction of magnetic field, At d1, located at (0, 0, 0) due to wire d 2 is given by
B|| idl × r or$j × −$j (because origin lies on y-direction w.r.t. point (0, R, 0).), but j × −j =0.
So, the magnetic field at d1 does not exist.
Force due to dl2 on dl1 is zero.
So, magnetic forces do not obey Newton's third law.
Q. 21A multirange voltmeter can be constructed by using a galvanometer

circuit as shown in figure. We want to construct a voltmeter that can
measure 2V, 20V and 200V using a galvanometer of resistance 10Ω and
that produces maximum deflection for current of 1 mA. Find R 1 , R2 and
R 3 that have to be used.
R1 R2 R3
G
2V 20 V 200 V
K Thinking Process
A galvanometer can be converted into voltmeter by connecting a very high resistance
wire connected in series with galvanometer. The relationship is given by I g (G + R) = V
where I g is range of galvanometer, G is resistance of galvanometer and R is resistance of
wire connected in series with galvanometer.
Ans. R1 R2 R3
G
2V 20 V 200 V
Applying expression in different situations
For iG (G + R1 ) = 2 for 2V range
For iG (G + R1 + R 2 ) = 20 for 20V range
and For iG (G + R1 + R 2 + R 3 ) = 200 for 200V range
On solving, we get R1 = 1990 Ω, R 2 = 18k Ω and R 3 = 180 k Ω.
Q. 22A long straight wire carrying current of 25A rests on a table as shown in
figure. Another wire PQ of length 1m, mass 2.5 g carries the same
current but in the opposite direction. The wire PQ is free to slide up and
down. To what height will PQ rise?
P Q
K Thinking Process
The force applied on PQ by long straight wire carrying current of 25A rests on a table
must balance the weight of small current carrying wire.
Ans. The magnetic field produced by long straight wire carrying current of 25A rests on a table
on small wire
µ I
B= 0
2 πh
The magnetic force on small conductor is
F = BIl sinθ = BIl
Force applied on PQ balance the weight of small current carrying wire.
µ I 2l
F = mg = 0
2 πh
µ 0I 2l 4 π × 10−7 × 25 × 25 × 1
h= = = 51 × 10−4
2 π mg 2 π × 2 . 5 × 10−3 × 9.8
h = 0.51cm

Q. 23 A 100 turn rectangular coil ABCD (in X-Yplane) is hung from one arm of a
balance figure. A mass 500g is added to the other arm to balance the
weight of the coil. A current 4.9 A passes through the coil and a
constant magnetic field of 0.2 T acting inward (in x-z plane) is switched
on such that only arm CD of length 1 cm lies in the field. How much
additional mass m must be added to regain the balance?
A B
D C
K Thinking Process
The magnetic force applied on CD by magnetic field must balance the weight.
Ans. For equilibrium/ balance, net torque should also be equal to zero.
When the field is off ∑ t = 0 considering the separation of each hung from mid-point be I.
Mgl = Wcoil l
500 g l = Wcoil l
Wcoil = 500 × 9. 8 N
Taking moment of force about mid-point, we have the weight of coil
When the magnetic field is switched on
Mgl + mgl = Wcoil l + IBL sin 90° I
mgl = BIL l
BIL 0.2 × 4. 9 × 1 × 10−2
m= = = 10−3 kg = 1g
g 9. 8
Thus, 1g of additional mass must be added to regain the balance.
Q. 24A rectangular conducting loop consists of two wires on two opposite

sides of length l joined together by rods of length d. The wires are
eachof the same material but with cross-sections differing by a factor
of 2. The thicker wire has a resistance R and the rods are of low
resistance, which in turn are connected to a constant voltage source V0 .
The loop is placed in uniform a magnetic field B at 45° to its plane. Find
τ, the torque exerted by the magnetic field on the loop about an axis
through the centres of rods.
K Thinking Process
After finding current in both wires, magnetic forces and torques need to be calculated for
finding the net torque.
Ans. ^
n
B
i1 B
F1 d
^
n F1
l 45°
F2
F2
V0
Front view Side view
The thicker wire has a resistance R, then the other wire has a resistance 2R as the wires
are of the same material but with cross-sections differing by a factor 2.
Now, the force and hence, torque on first wire is given by
V d V ldB
F1 = i1 lB = 0 lB, τ1 = F1 = 0
2R 2 2 2 2R
Similarly, the force hence torque on other wire is given by
V d V ldB
F2 = i 2 lB = 0 lB, τ 2 = F2 = 0
2R 2 2 4 2 R
So, net torque, τ = τ1 − τ 2
1 V0 ldB
τ=
4 2 R
Q.25 An electron and a positron are released from (0, 0, 0) and (0, 0, 1.5R)
respectively, in a uniform magnetic field B = B 0 i,
$ each with an equal
momentum of magnitude p = eBR. Under what conditions on the
direction of momentum will the orbits be non-intersecting circles?
K Thinking Process
The circles of the electron and a positron shall not overlap if the distance between the
two centers are greater than 2R.
Ans. Since, B is along the x-axis, for a circular orbit the momenta of the two particles are in the
y-z plane. Let p1 and p2 be the momentum of the electron and positron, respectively. Both
traverse a circle of radius R of opposite sense. Let p1 make an angle θ with the y-axis p2
must make the same angle.
z
1.5 R
R
Co
Cp
B θ
x
The centres of the respective circles must be perpendicular to the momenta and at a
distance R. Let the centre of the electron be at Ce and of the positron at C p . The coordinates
of Ce is
Ce ≡ (0, − R sin θ, R cos θ)
The coordinates of C p is
3
C p ≡ (0, − R sin θ, R − R cos θ)
2
The circles of the two shall not overlap if the distance between the two centers are
greater than 2R.
Let d be the distance between C p and Ce .
Let d be the distance between C p and Ce .
2
d 2 = (2 R sinθ)2 +  R − 2 R cos θ
3
Then,
2 
92
= 4R 2 sin2 θ + R − 6R 2 cos θ + 4R 2 cos 2 θ
4
9 2
= 4R 2 + R − 6R 2 cos θ
4
Since, d has to be greater than 2R
d 2 > 4R 2
9 2
⇒ 4R 2 + R − 6R 2 cos θ > 4R 2
4
9
⇒ > 6 cos θ
4
3
or, cosθ <
8
Q. 26A uniform conducting wire of length 12a and resistance R is wound up as

a current carrying coil in the shape of (i) an equilateral triangle of side
a, (ii) a square of sides a and, (iii) a regular hexagon of sides a. The coil
is connected to a voltage source V0 . Find the magnetic moment of the
coils in each case.
K Thinking Process
The different shapes forms figures of different area and hence, there magnetic moments
varies.
Ans. We know that magnetic moment of the coils m = nIA.
Since, the same wire is used in three cases with same potentials, therefore, same current
flows in three cases.
(i) for an equilateral triangle of side a,
n = 4 as the total wire of length = 12a
n=3
 3 2
Magnetic moment of the coils m = nIA = 4I  a 
 4 
∴ m = I a2 3
(ii) For a square of sides a,
n=4
A = a2
n = 3 as the total wire of length = 12a
Magnetic moment of the coils m = nIA = 3 I (a2 ) = 3 I a2
(iii) For a regular hexagon of sides a,
n=2
n = 2 as the total wire of length = 12 a
 6 3 2
Magnetic moment of the coils m = nIA = 2 1  a 
 4 
m = 3 3a2 I
m is in a geometric series.
Q. 27Consider a circular current-carrying loop of radius R in the x-yplane with

centre at origin. Consider the line integral
L
ℑ(L) = ∫−L B. dl
taken along z-axis.
(a) Show that ℑ(L) monotonically increases with L
(b) Use an appropriate amperian loop to show that ℑ(∞) = µ 0 I. where I is
the current in the wire
(c) Verify directly the above result
(d) Suppose we replace the circular coil by a square coil of sides R carrying
the same current I.
What can you say about ℑ(L) and ℑ(∞)?
K Thinking Process
This question revolves around the application of Ampere circuital law.
Ans. (a) B ( z) points in the same direction on z-axis and hence, J(L) is a monotonically function of
L.
Since, B and dl along the same direction, therefore B. dl = B. dl as cos 0 = 1
(b) J(L) + contribution from large distance on contour C = µ 0 I
∴ as L → ∞
Contribution from large distance → 0 (as B ∝ 1 / r 3 )
J (∞ ) − µ 0 I
(c) The magnetic field due to circular current-carrying loop of radius R in the x-y plane with
centre at origin at any point lying at a distance of from origin.
–L O –L
µ 0 IR 2
Bz =
2( z + R 2 )3 / 2
2
∞ ∞ µ 0 IR 2
∫−∞ Bzdz = ∫−∞ 2( z2 + R 2 )3 / 2 dz
Put z = R tan θ1
⇒ dz = R sec 2 θd θ
∞ µ 0I π /2
∴ ∫−∞ Bzdz = 2 ∫− π / 2 cosθd θ = µ 0 I
(d) B( z)square < B ( z)circular coil
∴ ℑ(L)square < ℑ (L)circular coil
But by using arguments as in (b)
ℑ(∞ )square = ℑ(∞ )circular
Q. 28 A multirange current meter can be constructed by using a galvanometer

circuit as shown in figure. We want a current meter that can measure
10mA, 100mA and 1mA using a galvanometer of resistance 10Ω and that
produces maximum deflection for current of 1mA. Find S 1 , S2 and S 3 that
have to be used.
S3
G
S1 S2
K Thinking Process
A galvanometer can be converted into ammeter by connecting a very low resistance
wire (shunt S) connected in parallel with galvanometer. The relationship is given by
I g G = (I − I g ) S, where I g is range of galvanometer, G is resistance of galvanometer.
Ans. IG .G = (I1 − IG ) (S1 + S 2 + S 3 ) for I1 = 10 mA
IG (G + S1 ) = (I 2 − IG ) (S 2 + S 3 ) for I 2 = 100 mA
and IG (G + S1 + S 2 ) = (I 3 − IG ) (S 3 ) for I 3 = 1 A
gives S1 = 1 W, S 2 = 01
. W
and S 3 = 0.01 W
Q. 29 Five long wires A, B, C, D and E, each carrying current I are arranged to

form edges of a pentagonal prism as shown in figure. Each carries
current out of the plane of paper.
(a) What will be magnetic induction at a point on the axis O? Axis is at a
distance R from each wire.
(b) What will be the field if current in one of the wires (say A) is switched
off?
(c) What if current in one of the wire (say A) is reversed?
A
R
E B
O
D C
K Thinking Process
The vector sum of magnetic field produced by each wire at O is equal to 0.
Ans. (a) Suppose the five wires A, B, C, D and E be perpendicular to the plane of paper at
locations as shown in figure.
Thus, magnetic field induction due to five wires will be represented by various sides of a
closed pentagon in one order, lying in the plane of paper. So, its value is zero.
(b) Since, the vector sum of magnetic field produced by each wire at O is equal to 0.
Therefore, magnetic induction produced by one current carrying wire is equal in
magnitude of resultant of four wires and opposite in direction.
µ i
Therefore, the field if current in one of the wires (say A) is switched off is 0
2π R
perpendicular to AO towards left.
(c) If current in wire A is reversed, then
total magnetic field induction at O
= Magnetic field induction due to wire A + magnetic field induction due to wires B, C, D
and E
µ 2I
= 0
4 πR R
µ 2I
(acting perpendicular to AO towards left) + 0 (acting perpendicular AO towards left)
π R
µ I
= 0 acting perpendicular AO towards left.
πR
5
Magnetism and Matter
Q. 1 A toroid of n turns, mean radius R and cross-sectional radius a carries
current I. It is placed on a horizontal table taken as xy-plane. Its magnetic
moment m
(a) is non-zero and points in the z-direction by symmetry
(b) points along the axis of the toroid (m = m φ)
1
(c) is zero, otherwise there would be a field falling as 3 at large distances outside
r
the toroid
(d) is pointing radially outwards
K Thinking Process
Toroid is a hollow circular ring on which a large number of turns of a wire are closely
wound. Thus, in such a case magnetic field is only confined inside the body of toroid.
Ans. (c) In case of toroid, the magnetic field is only confined inside the body of toroid in the
form of concentric magnetic lines of force and there is no magnetic field outside the
body of toroid. This is because the loop encloses no current. Thus, the magnetic
moment of toroid is zero.
1
In general, if we take r as a large distance outside the toroid, then m ∝ 3 . But this case
r
is not possible here.
Q. 2 The magnetic field of the earth can be modelled by that of a point

dipole placed at the centre of the earth. The dipole axis makes an angle
of 11.3° with the axis of the earth. At Mumbai, declination is nearly
zero. Then,
(a) the declination varies between 11.3° W to 11.3° E
(b) the least declination is 0°
(c) the plane defined by dipole axis and the earth axis passes through Greenwich
(d) declination averaged over the earth must be always negative
Ans. (a) For the earth's magnetism, the magnetic field lines of the earth resemble that of a
hypothetical magnetic dipole located at the centre of the earth.
The axis of the dipole does not coincide with the axis of rotation of the earth but is
presently tilted by approxmately 11.3° with respect to the later. This results into two
situations as given in the figure ahead.
N N
.3°
11
S S
.3
11
°
W E W E
N
N
S S
Hence, the declination varies between 11.3° W to 11.3° E.
Q. 3 In a permanent magnet at room temperature,

(a) magnetic moment of each molecule is zero
(b) the individual molecules have non-zero magnetic moment which are all
perfectly aligned
(c) domains are partially aligned
(d) domains are all perfectly aligned
K Thinking Process
Permanent magnet at room temperature behave as a ferromagnetic substance for a
long period of time.
Ans. (d) As we know a permanent magnet is a substance which at room temperature retain
ferromagnetic property for a long period of time.
The individual atoms in a ferromagnetic material possess a dipole moment as in a
paramagnetic material.
However, they interact with one another in such a way that they spontaneously align
themselves in a common direction over a macroscopic volume called domain. Thus, we
can say that in a permanent magnet at room temperature, domains are all perfectly
aligned.
Q. 4 Consider the two idealised systems (i) a parallel plate capacitor with
large plates and small separation and (ii) a long solenoid of length
L >> R, radius of cross-section. In (i) E is ideally treated as a constant
between plates and zero outside. In (ii) magnetic field is constant inside
the solenoid and zero outside. These idealised assumptions, however,
contradict fundamental laws as below
(a) case (i) contradicts Gauss’ law for electrostatic fields
(b) case (ii) contradicts Gauss’ law for magnetic fields
(c) case (i) agrees with ∫ E. dl = 0.
(d) case (ii) contradicts ∫ H. dl = I en
K Thinking Process
The electric field lines, do not form a continuous closed path while the magnetic field
lines form the closed paths.
Magnetism and Matter 75
q
Ans. (b) As Gauss’ law states, ∫ E ⋅ ds =
ε0
for electrostatic field. It does not contradict for
S
electrostatic fields as the electric field lines do not form continuous closed path.
According to Gauss’ law in magnetic field,
∫ E ⋅ ds = 0
S
It contradicts for magnetic field, because there is a magnetic field inside the solenoid
and no field outside the solenoid carrying current but the magnetic field lines form the
closed path.
Q. 5 A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of 8 Am −1 when

placed in an external magnetic field of 0.6 T at a temperature of 4 K.
When the same sample is placed in an external magnetic field of 0.2 T at
a temperature of 16 K, the magnetisation will be
32 2
(a) Am–1 (b) Am–1 (c) 6 Am–1 (d) 2.4 Am−1
3 3
K Thinking Process
From Curie law, we know that magnetisation is directly proportional to the magnetic
field induction and inversely proportional to the temperature in kelvin.
Ans. (b) As Curie law explains, we can deduce a formula for the relation between magnetic field
induction, temperature and magnetisation.
B (magnetic field induction)
i.e., I (magnetisation) ∝
t (temperature in kelvin)
I 2 B2 t
⇒ = × 1
I1 B1 t2
Let us suppose, here I1 = 8 Am–1
B1 = 0.6T, t 1 = 4 K
B2 = 0.2 T , t 2 = 16 K
I2 =?
02
. 4 I
⇒ × = 2
0.6 16 8
1 2
⇒ I2 = 8 × = Am–1
12 3

Q. 6 S is the surface of a lump of magnetic material.
(a) Lines of B are necessarily continuous across S
(b) Some lines of B must be discontinuous across S
(c) Lines of H are necessarily continuous across S
(d) Lines of H cannot all be continuous across S
K Thinking Process
According to the properties of magnetic field lines (B), for any magnet, it forms
continuous closed loops. This is unlike the electric dipole where these field lines begin
from a positive charge and end on the negative charge or escape to infinity.
Also, magnetic intensity (H) outside any magnet is H = B / µ 0 and for inside the magnet
H = B / µ 0 µ r , where µ r is the relative permeability of material (magnetic).
Ans. (a, d)
Magnetic field lines for magnetic induction (B) form continuous lines. So, lines of B are
necessarily continuous across S.
Also, magnetic intensity (H) varies for inside and outside the lump. So, lines of H cannot all
be continuous across S.
Q. 7 The primary origin (s) of magnetism lies in

(a) atomic currents (b) Pauli exclusion principle
(c) polar nature of molecules (d) intrinsic spin of electron
Ans (a, d)
The primary origin of magnetism lies in the fact that the electrons are revolving and spinning
about nucleus of an atom, which gives rise to current called atomic current.
This atomic currents gives rise to magnetism. The revolving and spinning about nucleus of
an atom is called intrinsic spin of electron.
Q. 8 A long solenoid has 1000 turns per metre and carries a current of 1 A. It
has a soft iron core of µ r = 1000. The core is heated beyond the Curie
temperature, T c .
(a) The H field in the solenoid is (nearly) unchanged but the B field decreases
drastically
(b) The H and B fields in the solenoid are nearly unchanged
(c) The magnetisation in the core reverses direction
(d) The magnetisation in the core diminishes by a factor of about10 8
K Thinking Process
The magnetic intensity H field = n I, where n = number of turns per metre of a solenoid
and I = current and B = µ 0 µ r nI.
Also, at normal temperature, a solenoid behave as a ferromagnetic substand and at the
temperature beyond the Curie temperature, it behaves as a paramagnetic substance.
Ans. (a, d)
Here, for solenoid H = nI .
⇒ H = 1000 × 1= 1000 Am
Thus, H is a constant ,so it is nearly unchanged.
But B =µ0 µr n I
= µ 0n I µ r
= k (constant) µ r .
Thus, from above equation, we find that B varies with the variation in µ r .
Now, for magnetisation in the core, when temperature of the iron core of solenoid is raised
beyond Curie temperature, then it behave as paramagnetic material, where
and (χ m ) Fero ≈ 103
and (χ m ) Para ≈ 10−5
(χ m ) Fero 103
⇒ = = 108
(χ m ) Para 10−5
Q. 9 Essential difference between electrostatic shielding by a conducting

shell and magnetostatic shielding is due to
(a) electrostatic field lines can end on charges and conductors have free charges
(b) lines of B can also end but conductors cannot end them
(c) lines of B cannot end on any material and perfect shielding is not possible
(d) shells of high permeability materials can be used to divert lines of B from the
interior region
Ans. (a, c, d)
Electrostatic shielding is the phenomenon to block the effects of an electric field. The
conducting shell can block the effects of an external field on its internal content or the effect
of an internal field on the outside environment.
Magnetostatic shielding is done by using an enclosure made of a high permeability
magnetic material to prevent a static magnetic field outside the enclosure from reaching
objects inside it or to confine a magnetic field within the enclosure.
Q. 10Let the magnetic field on the earth be modelled by that of a point

magnetic dipole at the centre of the earth. The angle of dip at a point
on the geographical equator
(a) is always zero (b) can be zero at specific points
(c) can be positive or negative (d) is bounded
K Thinking Process
Angle of inclination or dip is the angle that the total magnetic field of the earth makes
with the surface of the earth.
Ans. (b, c, d)
If the total magnetic field of the earth is modelled by a point magnetic dipole at the centre,
then it is in the same plane of geographical equator, thus the angle of dip at a point on the
geographical equator is bounded in a range from positive to negative value.

Q. 11 A proton has spin and magnetic moment just like an electron. Why then
its effect is neglected in magnetism of materials?
K Thinking Process
Mass of a proton is very larger than the mass of an electron, so its spinning is negligible
as compared to that of electron spin.
Ans. The comparison between the spinning of a proton and an electron can be done by
comparing their magnetic dipole moment which can be given by
eh 1 eh
M= or M ∝ (Q = constant)
4πm m 4π
Mp m
∴ = e
Me mp
Me
= (QM p = 1837 me )
1837 Me
Mp 1
⇒ = << 1
Me 1837
⇒ M p << Me
Thus, effect of magnetic moment of proton is neglected as compared to that of electron.
Q. 12 A permanent magnet in the shape of a thin cylinder of length 10 cm has

M = 10 6 A/m. Calculate the magnetisation current I M .
Ans. Given, M (intensity of magnetisation) = 106 A/m.
l (length) = 10 cm = 10 × 10−2 m = 01
. m
and I M = magnetisation current
I
We know that M= M
l
⇒ IM = M × l
= 106 × 01
. = 105A
Note Here, M = intensity of magnetisation as its unit is given as A/m.
Q. 13 Explain quantitatively the order of magnitude difference between the

diamagnetic susceptibility of N2 (~ 5 × 10 −9 ) (at STP) and Cu(~ 10 −5 ).
K Thinking Process
Magnetic susceptibility is a measure of how a magnetic material responds to an external
field.
Ans. We know that
28 g 28 g
Density of nitrogen ρN 2 = =
22.4 L 22400 cc
8g 8g
Also, density of copper ρCu = =
22.4 L 22400 cc
Now, comparing both densities

ρN 2 28 1
= . × 10−4
× = 16
ρCu 22400 8
χN 2 5 × 10−9
Also given = = 5 × 10−4
χCu 10−5
Magnetisation (M )
We know that, χ=
Magnetic intensity (H)
Magnetic moment (M ) / Volume (V )
=
H
M M Mρ
= = =
HV H (mass / density) Hm
M
∴ χ ∝ρ (Q = constant)
Hm
χN 2 ρN 2
Hence, = = 1.6 × 10−4
χCu ρCu
Thus, we can say that magnitude difference or major difference between the diamagnetic
susceptibility of N2 and Cu.
Q. 14 From molecular view point, discuss the temperature dependence of

susceptibility for diamagnetism, paramagnetism and ferromagnetism.
Ans. Susceptibility of magnetic material χ =
I
, where I is the intensity of magnetisation induced
H
in the material and H is the magnetising force.
Diamagnetism is due to orbital motion of electrons in an atom developing magnetic
moments opposite to applied field. Thus, the resultant magnetic moment of the
diamagnetic material is zero and hence, the susceptibility χ of diamagnetic material is not
much affected by temperature.
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to alignments of atomic magnetic moments in
the direction of the applied field. As temperature is raised, the alignment is disturbed,
resulting decrease in susceptibility of both with increase in temperature.
Q. 15A ball of superconducting material is dipped in liquid nitrogen and placed

near a bar magnet.
(i) In which direction will it move?
(ii) What will be the direction of its magnetic moment?
K Thinking Process
A superconducting material and nitrogen are diamagnetic in nature.
Ans. When a diamagnetic material is dipped in liquid nitrogen, it again behaves as a
diamagnetic material. Thus, superconducting material will again behave as a diamagnetic
material. When this diamagnetic material is placed near a bar magnet, it will be feebly
magnetised opposite to the direction of magnetising field.
(i) Thus, it will be repelled.
(ii) Also its direction of magnetic moment will be opposite to the direction of magnetic field
of magnet.

Q. 16 Verify the Gauss’s law for magnetic field of a point dipole of dipole
moment m at the origin for the surface which is a sphere of radius R.
Ans. Let us draw the figure for given situation,
z
r
r
θ
n dθ
M y
O
We have to prove that ∫ B ⋅ d S = 0. This is called Gauss’s law in magnetisation.

According to question,
Magnetic moment of dipole at origin O is
M = M k$
Let P be a point at distance r from O and OP makes an angle θ with z-axis. Component of M
along OP = M cosθ.
Now, the magnetic field induction at P due to dipole of moment Mcosθ is
µ 2M cos θ $
B= 0 r
4π r3
From the diagram, r is the radius of sphere with centre at O lying in yz-plane. Take an
elementary area d S of the surface at P. Then,
d S = r (r sin θ d θ) r$ = r 2 sin θ d θ r$
µ 0 2 M cos θ $ 2
∫B⋅dS = ∫ 4π r3
r (r sinθ d θ r$ )
µ M 2π
= 0 ∫ 2 sinθ.cos θ d θ
4π r 0
µ 0 M 2π
4 π r ∫0
= sin2 θdθ
2π
µ 0 M  − cos 2 θ 
=  
4π r  2 0
µ M
= − 0 [cos 4 π − cos 0]
4π 2r
µ0 M
= [1 − 1] = 0
4π 2r
Q. 17 Three identical bar magnets are rivetted together at centre in the same
plane as shown in figure. This system is placed at rest in a slowly varying
magnetic field. It is found that the system of magnets does not show
any motion. The north-south poles of one magnet is shown in the figure.
Determine the poles of the remaining two.
N
? ?
60°
60°
? ?
S
Ans. The system will be in stable equilibrium if the net force on the system is zero and net torque
on the system is also zero. This is possible only when the poles of the remaining two
magnets are as given in the figure.
N
S
S
N N
S
Q. 18 Suppose we want to verify the analogy between electrostatic and

magnetostatic by an explicit experiment. Consider the motion of (i)
electric dipole p in an electrostatic field E and (ii) magnetic dipole M in a
magnetic field B. Write down a set of conditions on E, B, p, M so that the
two motions are verified to be identical. (Assume identical initial
conditions).
K Thinking Process
E(r) = cB(r), suppose the angle between p and E is θ. Torque on electric dipole of moment
p in electric field E, τ = pE sinθ.
Ans. Now, suppose that the angle between M and B is θ.
Torque on magnetic dipole moment M in magnetic field B,
τ ′ = MBsinθ
Two motions will be identical, if
pE sinθ = MBsinθ
⇒ pE = MB …(i)
But, E = cB
∴Putting this value in Eq. (i),
pcB = MB
M
⇒ p=
c
Q. 19 A bar magnet of magnetic moment M and moment of inertia I (about

centre, perpendicular to length) is cut into two equal pieces,
perpendicular to length. Let T be the period of oscillations of the
original magnet about an axis through the mid-point, perpendicular to
length, in a magnetic field B. What would be the similar period T ′ for
each piece?
K Thinking Process
I
T = 2π
MB
where, T = time period
I = moment of inertia
m = mass of magnet
B = magnetic field
Ans. Given, I = moment of inertia of the bar magnet
m = mass of bar magnet
l = length of magnet about an any passing through its centre and perpendicular to its
length
M = magnetic moment of the magnet
B= uniform magnetic field in which magnet is oscillating, we get time period of
I
oscillation is, T = 2π
MB
ml2
Here, I= .
12
When magnet is cut into two equal pieces, perpendicular to length, then moment of inertia of
each piece of magnet about an axis perpendicular to length passing through its centre is
m (l / 2 )2 ml2 1 I
I′ = = × =
2 12 12 8 8
Magnetic dipole moment M ′ = M /2
Its time period of oscillation is
I′ I /8 2π I
T′ = 2 π = 2π =
M ′B (M / 2 )B 2 MB
T
T′= .
2
Q. 20Use (i) the Ampere’s law for H and (ii) continuity of lines of B, to
conclude that inside a bar magnet, (a) lines of H run from the N-pole to
S- pole, while (b) lines of B must run from the S-pole to N-pole.
Ans. Consider a magnetic field line of B through the bar magnet as given in the figure below.
C
P Q
S N
The magnetic field line of B through the bar magnet must be a closed loop.
Let C be the amperian loop. Then,

P P B
∫Q H.dl = ∫Q m0 .dl
We know that the angle between B and dI is less than 90° inside the bar magnet. So, it
is positive.
P P B
i.e., ∫Q H.dl = ∫Q µ 0 .dl > 0
Hence, the lines of B must run from south pole(S) to north pole (N) inside the bar magnet.
According to Ampere’s law,
∴ ∫ H.dl = 0
PQP
Q P
∴ ∫ H.dl = ∫ H.dl +
P ∫Q H.dl = 0
PQP
P Q
As ∫Q H.dl > 0, so, ∫ P H.dl < 0 (i.e., negative)
It will be so if angle between H and dl is more than 90°, so that cosθ is negative. It means the
line of H must run from N-pole to S-pole inside the bar magnet.

Q. 21Verify the Ampere’s law for magnetic field of a point dipole of dipole
moment M = M k$ . Take C as the closed curve running clockwise along
(i) the z-axis from z = a > 0 to z = R,
(ii) along the quarter circle of radius R and centre at the origin in the first
quadrant of xz-plane,
(iii) along the x-axis from x = R to x = a, and
(iv) along the quarter circle of radius a and centre at the origin in the first
quadrant of xz-plane
K Thinking Process
Let us consider the figure below
z
Q
R
a
P
M T S x
O R
y
Ans. From P to Q, every point on the z-axis lies at the axial line of magnetic dipole of moment M.
Magnetic field induction at a point distance z from the magnetic dipole of moment is
µ 2|M| µ M
|B| = 0 3 = 0 3
4π z 2 πz
(i) Along z-axis from P to Q.
Q Q R
∫P B.dl = ∫P B.dl cos 0° = ∫a B dz
Rµ µ 0 M  −1  1
M 1
= ∫a 2 π0 z3 dz =  − 
2 π  2   R 2 a2 
µ M 1
= 0  2 − 2 
1
4π  a R 
(ii) Along the quarter circle QS of radius R as given in the figure below
z
Q
R A
dθ dl
M S
m sin θ x
O R
y
The point A lies on the equatorial line of the magnetic dipole of moment Msinθ.
Magnetic field at point A on the circular arc is
µ M sinθ
B= 0 ; dl = Rdθ
4π R3
π
µ 0 M sinθ
∴ ∫ B.dl = ∫ B.dl cosθ = ∫02 4π R3
Rdθ
µ0 M µ0 M
Circular arc = (− cos θ)π0 /2
=
4π R 4π R2
(iii) Along x-axis over the path ST, consider the figure given ahead
z
M
T S
x
a R
O x
y
From figure, every point lies on the equatorial line of magnetic dipole. Magnetic field
induction at a point distance x from the dipole is
µ M
B= 0 3
4π x
T a µ M
∴ ∫SB.dl = ∫R − 4 π0x 3 .dl = 0 [Qangle between (− M) and dl is 90°]
(iv) Along the quarter circle TP of radius a. Consider the figure given below
z
P
a
θ
dλ
dθ
M T
m sin θ x
O a
y
From case (ii), we get line integral of B along the quarter circle TP of radius a is
0 µ M sinθ
circular arc TP ∫ B.dl = ∫π / 2 4 π0 a3 ad θ
µ M 0 µ M
= 0 2 ∫ sin θ dθ = 0 2 [− cos θ]0π / 2
4π a π / 2 4π a
− µ0 M
=
4 π a2
Q S T P
∴ ∫ B.dl = ∫ B.dl + ∫ B.dl + ∫ B.dl + ∫ B.dl
PQST P Q S T
µ 0M  1 1  µ0 M µ M
= − + + 0 +  − 0 2  = 0
4  a2 R 2  4 π R 2  4π a 
Q. 22 What are the dimensions of χ, the magnetic susceptibility? Consider an

H-atom. Gives an expression for χ, upto a constant by constructing a
quantity of dimensions of χ, out of parameters of the atom e, m, v, R and
µ 0 . Here, m is the electronic mass, v is electronic velocity, R is Bohr
radius. Estimate the number so obtained and compare with the value of
| χ | ~ 10 −5 for many solid materials.
K Thinking Process
Magnetic susceptibility is a measure of how a magnetic material responds to an external
field. i.e., magnetic susceptibility
I (Intensity of magnetisation)
χm = =
H (Magnetising force)
Ans. As I and H both have same units and dimensions, hence, χ has no dimensions. Here, in
this question, χ is to be related with e, m, v, R and µ 0 . We know that dimensions of
µ 0 = [MLθ−2 ]
From Biot-Savart’s law,
µ 0 I dl sinθ
dB =
4π r2
4 πr dB
2
4 πr 2 f  F 
⇒ µ0 = = × Q dB = qv sinθ 
I dlsinθ I dlsinθ qv sinθ  
L2 × (MLT− 2 )
∴ Dimensions of µ 0 = = [MLQ −2 ]
(QT ) (L) × 1 × (Q) (LT−1 ) × (1)
−1
where Q is the dimension of charge.

As χ is dimensionless, it should have no involvement of charge Q in its dimensional formula.

It will be so if µ 0 and e together should have the value µ 0e 2 , as e has the dimensions of
charge.
Let χ = µ 0e 2 ma v b Rc …(i)
where a, b, c are the power of m, v and R respectively, such that relation (i) is satisfied.
Dimensional equation of (i) is
[M0L0 T0Q 0 ] = [MLQ −2 ] × [Q 2 ][Ma ] × (LT−1 )b × [L]c
= [M1+ a + L1+ b + c T− bQ 0 ]
Equating the powers of M, L and T, we get
0 = 1 + a ⇒ a = − 1, 0 = 1 + b + c …(ii)
0 = − b ⇒ b = 0, 0 = 1 + 0 + c or c = − 1
Putting values in Eq. (i), we get
µ e2
χ = µ 0e 2 m−1v 2 R −1 = 0 …(iii)
mR
Here, µ 0 = 4 π × 10−7Tm A −1
e = 1.6 × 10−19 C
. × 10−31 kg, R = 10−10 m
m = 91
(4 π × 10−7 ) × (16
. × 10−19 )2
χ= ≈ 10−4
. × 10−31 ) × 10−10
(91
χ 10−4
∴ = = 10
χ(given solid) 10−5
Q. 23 Assume the dipole model for the earth’s magnetic field B which is given
µ 0 2m cos θ
by BV = vertical component of magnetic field =
4π r 3
µ sinθm
BH = horizontal component of magnetic field = 0
4π r 3
θ = 90° − lattitude as measured from magnetic equator.
Find loci of points for which (a) | B | is minimum (b) dip angle is zero and
(c) dip angle is 45°.
µ 0 2 mcos θ
Ans. (a) BV = …(i)
4π r3
µ 0 sinθm
BH = …(ii)
4π r3
Squaring both the equations and adding, we get
µ m2
BV2 + BH2 =  0  6 [4cos 2 θ + sin2 θ]
 4π  r
µ m
B = BV2 + BH2 = 0 3 [3cos 2 θ + 1]1/ 2 …(iii)
4π r
π
From Eq. (iii), the value of B is minimum, if cosθ =
2
π
θ = . Thus, the magnetic equator is the locus.
2
(b) Angle of dip,

µ 0 2 mcos θ
⋅
= 4π
BV r3
tanδ = = 2 cot θ …(iv)
BH µ 0 ⋅ sinθ⋅ m
4π r3
tanδ = 2 cot θ
For dip angle is zero i.e., δ = 0
cotθ = 0
π
θ=
2
It means that locus is again magnetic equator.
B
(c) tanδ = V
BH
Angle of dip i.e., δ = ± 45
BV
= tan(±45° )
BH
BV
=1
BH
2 cotθ = 1 [From Eq. (iv)]
1
cotθ=
2
tanθ= 2
⇒ θ = tan−1(2 )
Thus, θ= tan−1 (2) is the locus.
Q. 24Consider the plane S formed by the dipole axis and the axis of earth. Let
P be point on the magnetic equator and in S. Let Q be the point of
intersection of the geographical and magnetic equators. Obtain the
declination and dip angles at P and Q.
Ans. P is in the plane S, needle is in north, so the declination is zero.
N
S ω
11.3° M
GE P
G
Q
ME
S
P is also on the magnetic equator, so the angle of dip = 0, because the value of angle of
dip at equator is zero. Q is also on the magnetic equator, thus the angle of dip is zero.
As earth tilted on its axis by 11.3°, thus the declination at Q is 11.3°.
Q. 25 There are two current carrying planar coil made each from identical wires
of length L. C 1 is circular (radius R) and C 2 is square (side a). They are so
constructed that they have same frequency of oscillation when they are
placed in the same uniform B and carry the same current. Find a in terms
of R.
Ans. C1 = circular coil of radius R, length L, number of turns per unit length
L
n1 =
2 πR
L
C 2 = square of side a and perimeter L, number of turns per unit length n2 =
a 4a
Magnetic moment of C1
⇒ m1 = n1 I A1
Magnetic moment of C 2
⇒ m2 = n2 I A2
L ⋅ I ⋅ πR 2
m1 =
2 πR
L
m2 = ⋅ I ⋅ a2
4a
LIR
m1 = ...(i)
2
LIa
m2 = ...(ii)
4
MR 2
Moment of inertia of C1 ⇒ I1 = ...(iii)
2
Ma2
Moment of inertia of C 2 ⇒ I 2 = ...(iv)
12
I1
Frequency of C1 ⇒ f1 = 2 π
m1B
I2
Frequency of C 2 ⇒ f2 = 2 π
m2 B
According to question, f1 = f2
I1 I2
2π = 2π
m1B m2 B
I1 I m I
= 2 or 2 = 2
m1 m2 m1 I1
Plugging the values by Eqs. (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv)
LI a⋅ 2 Ma2 ⋅ 2
=
4 × LIR 12 ⋅ MR 2
a a2
=
2 R 6R 2
3R = a
Thus, the value of a is 3R.
6
Electromagnetic Induction
Q. 1 A square of side L metres lies in the xy-plane in a region, where the
magnetic field is given by B = B 0 (2$i + 3$j + 4k$ ) T, where B 0 is constant.
The magnitude of flux passing through the square is
(a) 2B0L2 Wb (b) 3B0L2 Wb (c) 4B0L2 Wb (d) 29B0L2 Wb
K Thinking Process
The magnetic flux linked with uniform surface of area A in uniform magnetic field is
given by
φ = B.A
Ans. (c) Here, A = L2 k$ and B = B0 (2 $i + 3$j + 4k$ ) T
φ = B.A = B0 (2 $i + 3$j + 4k$ ). L2k$ = 4B0 L2 Wb
Q. 2 A loop, made of straight edges has six corners at A (0, 0, 0), B (L, 0, 0),
C (L, L, 0), D (0, L, 0), E (0, L, L) and F (0, 0, L). A magnetic field
B = B 0 ($i + k$ ) T is present in the region. The flux passing through the
loop ABCDEFA (in that order) is
(a) B0L2 Wb (b) 2B0L2 Wb (c) 2B0L2 Wb (d) 4B0L2 Wb
K Thinking Process
Here, loop ABCDA lies in x-y plane whose area vector A 1 = L2 k$ whereas loop ADEFA lies
in y-z plane whose area vector A2 = L2 $i .
Ans. (b) Also, the magnetic flux linked with uniform surface of area A in uniform magnetic field
is given by
φ = B.A Y
2$ 2$
A = A1 + A 2 = (L k + L i ) D C
and B = B ( $i + k$ )T
0 E
Now, φ = B.A = B0 ($i + k$ ).(L2k$ + L2 $i ) X
A B
= 2 B0 L Wb
2
F
Z
Q. 3 A cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its axis. A wire is connected

from the axis and is made to touch the cylindrical surface through a
contact. Then,
(a) a direct current flows in the ammeter A
(b) no current flows through the ammeter A
(c) an alternating sinusoidal current flows through the ammeter A with a time
2π
period T =
ω
(d) a time varying non-sinusoidal current flows through the ammeter A
K Thinking Process
The problem is associated with the phenomenon of electromagnetic induction.
Ans. (b) When cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its axis, no change in flux linked with the
circuit takes place, consequently no emf induces and hence, no current flows through
the ammeter A.
Axis
A
N
Bar
magnet ω
Q. 4 There are two coils A and B as shown in figure. A current starts flowing
in B as shown, when A is moved towards B and stops when A stops
moving. The current in A is counter clockwise. B is kept stationary when
A moves. We can infer that
(a) there is a constant current in the clockwise direction in A
(b) there is a varying current in A
(c) there is no current in A
(d) there is a constant current in the counter clockwise direction in A
A B
K Thinking Process
The induced emf in B is due to the variation of magnetic flux in it.
Ans. (d) When the A stops moving the current in B become zero, it possible only if the current in
A is constant. If the current in A would be variable, there must be an induced emf
(current) in B even if the A stops moving.
Electromagnetic Induction 91
Q. 5 Same as problem 4 except the coil A is made to rotate about a vertical

axis (figure). No current flows in B if A is at rest. The current in coil
A,when the current in B (at t = 0) is counter-clockwise and the coil A is
as shown at this instant, t = 0, is
(a) constant current clockwise
(b) varying current clockwise
(c) varying current counter clockwise
(d) constant current counter clockwise
A
ω B
K Thinking Process
Here, the application of Lenz’s law is tested through this problem.
Ans. (a) When the current in B (at t = 0) is counter-clockwise and the coil A is considered above
to it. The counterclockwise flow of the current in B is equivalent to north pole of magnet
and magnetic field lines are emanating upward to coil A. When coil A start rotating at
t = 0, the current in A is constant along clockwise direction by Lenz’s rule.
Q. 6 The self inductance L of a solenoid of length l and area of cross-section

A, with a fixed number of turns N increases as
(a) l and A increase
(b) l decreases and A increases
(c) l increases and A decreases
(d) both l and A decrease
K Thinking Process
The self inductance Lof a solenoid depends on its geometry (i.e., length, cross-sectional
area, number of turns etc.) and on the permeability of the medium.
Ans. (b) The self-inductance of a long solenoid of cross-sectional area A and length l, having n
turns per unit length, filled the inside of the solenoid with a material of relative
permeability (e. g ., soft iron, which has a high value of relative permeability) is given by
L = µ r µ 0 n2 Al
where, n = N/l
Note The capacitance, resistance, self and mutual inductance depends on the geometry of
the devices as well as permittivity/permeability of the medium.

Q. 7 A metal plate is getting heated. It can be because
(a) a direct current is passing through the plate
(b) it is placed in a time varying magnetic field
(c) it is placed in a space varying magnetic field, but does not vary with time
(d) a current (either direct or alternating) is passing through the plate
K Thinking Process
This problem is associated with the heating effect of current as well as the phenomenon
of electromagnetic induction and eddy currents.
Ans. (a, b, d)
A metal plate is getting heated when a DC or AC current is passed through the plate, known
as heating effect of current. Also, when metal plate is subjected to time varying magnetic
field, the magnetic flux linked with the plate changes and eddy currents comes into
existence which make the plate hot.
Q. 8 An emf is produced in a coil, which is not connected to an external

voltage source. This can be due to
(a) the coil being in a time varying magnetic field
(b) the coil moving in a time varying magnetic field
(c) the coil moving in a constant magnetic field
(d) the coil is stationary in external spatially varying magnetic field, which does not
change with time
K Thinking Process
This problem is associated with the phenomenon of electromagnetic induction.
Ans. (a, b, c)
Here, magnetic flux linked with the isolated coil change when the coil being in a time varying
magnetic field, the coil moving in a constant magnetic field or in time varying magnetic field.
Note When magnetic flux linked with the coil change, an emf is used in the coil. This is
known as electromagnetic induction.
Q. 9 The mutual inductance M12 of coil 1 with respect to coil 2

(a) increases when they are brought nearer
(b) depends on the current passing through the coils
(c) increases when one of them is rotated about an axis
(d) is the same as M21 of coil 2 with respect to coil 1
K Thinking Process
Here, it is important to know that the mutual inductance of a pair of coils, solenoids, etc.,
depends on their separation, their relative orientation as well as the geometry of pair of
coils, solenoids, etc.
Ans. (a, d)
The mutual inductance M12 of coil increases when they are brought nearer and is the same
as M 21 of coil 2 with respect to coil 1.
M12 i.e., mutual inductance of solenoid S1 with respect to solenoid S 2 is given by

M 21 = µ 0 n1n2 πr12 l
l r1
r2
rns S1
N 1 tu
N2 turns S2
where signs are as usual.
Also, M12 i.e., mutual inductance of solenoid S 2 with respect to solenoid S1 is given by
M 21 = µ 0 n1n2 πr12 l
So, we have M12 = M 21 = M
Q. 10 A circular coil expands radially in a region of magnetic field and no

electromotive force is produced in the coil. This can be because
(a) the magnetic field is constant
(b) the magnetic field is in the same plane as the circular coil and it may or may not vary
(c) the magnetic field has a perpendicular (to the plane of the coil) component
whose magnitude is decreasing suitably
(d) there is a constant magnetic field in the perpendicular (to the plane of the coil)
direction
K Thinking Process
The various arrangement are to be thought of in such a way that the magnetic flux
linked with the coil do not change even if coil is placed and expanding in magnetic field.
Ans. (b, c)
When circular coil expands radially in a region of magnetic field such that the magnetic field
is in the same plane as the circular coil or the magnetic field has a perpendicular (to the
plane of the coil) component whose magnitude is decreasing suitably in such a way that the
cross product of magnetic field and surface area of plane of coil remain constant at every
instant.

Q. 11Consider a magnet surrounded by a wire with an on/off switch S (figure).
If the switch is thrown from the off position (open circuit) to the on
position (closed circuit), will a current flow in the circuit? Explain.
N N
Bar Bar
magent magent
Circuit open Circuit closed
K Thinking Process
The magnetic flux linked with uniform surface of area A in uniform magnetic field is
given by
φ = B. A = BAcos θ
So, flux linked will change only when either B, or A or the angle between B and A change.
Ans. When the switch is thrown from the off position (open circuit) to the on position (closed
circuit), then neither B, nor A nor the angle between B and A change. Thus, no change in
magnetic flux linked with coil occur, hence no electromotive force is produced and
consequently no current will flow in the circuit.
Q. 12 A wire in the form of a tightly wound solenoid is connected to a DC

source, and carries a current. If the coil is stretched so that there are
gaps between successive elements of the spiral coil, will the current
increase or decrease? Explain.
K Thinking Process
Ans. When the coil is stretched so that there are gaps between successive elements of the
spiral coil i.e., the wires are pulled apart which lead to the flux leak through the gaps.
According to Lenz’s law, the emf produced must oppose this decrease, which can be done
by an increase in current. So, the current will increase.
Q. 13 A solenoid is connected to a battery so that a steady current flows

through it. If an iron core is inserted into the solenoid, will the current
increase or decrease? Explain.
K Thinking Process
Ans. When the iron core is inserted in the current carrying solenoid, the magnetic field increase
due to the magnetisation of iron core and consequently the flux increases.
According to Lenz’s law, the emf produced must oppose this increase in flux, which can be
done by making decrease in current. So, the current will decrease.
Q. 14Consider a metal ring kept on top of a fixed solenoid (say on a cardboard)

(figure). The centre of the ring coincides with the axis of the solenoid. If
the current is suddenly switched on, the metal ring jumps up. Explain
Ring
K Thinking Process
Ans. When the current is switched on, magnetic flux is linked through the ring. Thus, increase in
flux takes place. According to Lenz’s law, this increase in flux will be opposed and it can
happen if the ring moves away from the solenoid.
This happen because the flux increases will cause a counter clockwise current (as seen
from the top in the ring in figure.) i.e., opposite direction to that in the solenoid.
This makes the same sense of flow of current in the ring (when viewed from the bottom of
the ring) and solenoid forming same magnetic pole infront of each other. Hence, they will
repel each other and the ring will move upward.
Q. 15 Consider a metal ring kept (supported by a cardboard) on top of a fixed

solenoid carrying a current I (see figure of Question 14). The centre of
the ring coincides with the axis of the solenoid. If the current in the
solenoid is switched off, what will happen to the ring?
K Thinking Process
This problem is based on the application of Lenz’s law.
Ans. (b) When the current is switched off, magnetic flux linked through the ring decreases.
According to Lenz’s law, this decrease in flux will be opposed and the ring experience
downward force towards the solenoid.
This happen because the flux i decrease will cause a clockwise current (as seen from
the top in the ring in figure) i.e., the same direction to that in the solenoid. This makes
the opposite sense of flow of current in the ring (when viewed from the bottom of the
ring) and solenoid forming opposite magnetic pole infront of each other.
Hence, they will attract each other but as ring is placed at the cardboard it could not be
able to move downward.
Q. 16 Consider a metallic pipe with an inner radius of 1 cm. If a cylindrical bar

magnet of radius 0.8 cm is dropped through the pipe, it takes more time
to come down than it takes for a similar unmagnetised cylindrical iron
bar dropped through the metallic pipe. Explain.
K Thinking Process
This problem is based on the concept of eddy current and application of Lenz’s law.
Ans. When cylindrical bar magnet of radius 0.8 cm is dropped through the metallic pipe with an
inner radius of 1 cm, flux linked with the cylinder changes and consequently eddy currents
are produced in the metallic pipe. According to Lenz’s law, these currents will oppose the
(cause) motion of the magnet.
Therefore, magnet’s downward acceleration will be less than the acceleration due to gravity
g. On the other hand, an unmagnetised iron bar will not produce eddy currents and will fall
with an acceleration due to gravity g.
Thus, the magnet will take more time to come down than it takes for a similar unmagnetised
cylindrical iron bar dropped through the metallic pipe.

Q. 17 A magnetic field in a certain region is given by B = B 0 cos(ω t) k$ and a
coil of radius a with resistance R is placed in the x–y plane with its
centre at the origin in the magnetic field (figure). Find the magnitude
and the direction of the current at (a, 0, 0) at
π π 3π
t= , t = and t =
2ω ω 2ω
y
x
(0, 0, 0) (a, 0, 0)
K Thinking Process
This problem requires application of Faraday’s law of EMI and finding mathematical
values of emf at different instants.
Ans. At any instant, flux passes through the ring is given by
φ = B.A = BA cos θ = BA (Q θ = 0)
or φ = B0 ( πa2 )cos ωt
By Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.,
Magnitude of induced emf is given by
ε = B0 ( πa2 ) ωsinωt
This causes flow of induced current, which is given by
I = B0 ( πa2 ) ωsinωt / R
Now, finding the value of current at different instants, so we have current at

π
t =
2ω
B ( πa2 )ω
I= 0 along $j
R
π π
Because sinωt = sin ω  = sin = 1
 2ω  2
π B( πa2 )ω
t = ,I =
ω R
 π
Here, sinωt = sin ω  = sin π = 0
 ω
3π
t =
2ω
B( πa2 )ω
I= along − $j
R
3π  3π
sinωt = sin ω  = sin = −1
 2ω  2
Q. 18 Consider a closed loop C in a magnetic field (figure). The flux passing

through the loop is defined by choosing a surface whose edge coincides
with the loop and using the formula φ = B 1 dA 1 , B 2 dA2 ..... . Now, if we
choose two different surfaces S 1 and S2 having C as their edge, would we
get the same answer for flux. Justify your answer.
S2
S1
K Thinking Process
This problem underline the concept of continuity of magnetic field lines. They can
neither be originated nor be destroyed in space.
Ans. The magnetic flux linked with the surface can considered as the number of magnetic field
lines passing through the surface. So, let dφ = BA represents magnetic lines in an area A to
B.
By the concept of continuity of lines B cannot end or start in space, therefore the number of
lines passing through surface S1 must be the same as the number of lines passing through
the surface S 2 . Therefore, in both the cases we gets the same answer for flux.
S2
S1
C
Q. 19 Find the current in the wire for the configuration shown in figure. Wire
PQ has negligible resistance. B, the magnetic field is coming out of the
paper. θ is a fixed angle made by PQ travelling smoothly over two
conducting parallel wires separated by a distance d.
B D P B
B B
R C v
θ
Q B B
K Thinking Process
The emf induced across PQ due to its motion or change in magnetic flux linked with the
loop change due to change of enclosed area.
Ans. The motional electric field E along the dotted line CD (∧ to both v and B and along V × B)
= vB
Therefore, the motional emf along PQ = (length PQ) × (field along PQ)
= (length PQ) × (vB sinθ)
= 
d 
 × (vBsinθ) = v Bd
 sinθ 
B D P B
B B
R C v
θ
Q B B
This induced emf make flow of current in closed circuit of resistance R.
dvB
I= and is independent of q.
R
Q. 20A (current versus time) graph of the current passing through a solenoid is
shown in figure. For which time is the back electromotive force (u) a
maximum. If the back emf at t = 3 s is e, find the back emf at t = 7 s, 15s
and 40 s. OA, AB and BC are straight line segments.
Current (A)
2A
A
1A
10 25
5 15 20 30 35 40
1A Time (s)
2A
B
K Thinking Process
When the current is varied, the flux linked with the coil also changes and an emf is
induced in the coil. The induced emf is given by
d(Nφ B)
ε=−
dt
dI
ε = −L
dt
Thus, the self-induced emf always opposes any change (increase or decrease) of current
in the coil.
Ans. The back electromotive force in solenoid is (u) a maximum when there is maximum rate of
change of current. This occurs is in AB part of the graph. So maximum back emf will be
obtained between 5s < t < 10 s .
Since, the back emf at t = 3s is e,
Also,
the rate of change of current at t = 3, s = slope of OA from t = 0s to t = 5 s = 1 / 5 A/s.
So, we have
If u = L 1/5  for t = 3s, = 1 / 5 (L is a constant). Applying ε = − L
dI dI
 dt  dt
Similarly, we have for other values
3 3
For 5s < t < 10s u1 = − L = − L = − 3e
5 5
Thus, at t = 7 s, u1 = − 3 e
For 10s < t < 30 s
2 L 1
u2 = L = = e
20 10 2
For t > 30 s, u 2 = 0
Thus, the back emf at t = 7 s, 15 s and 40 s are − 3 e, e / 2 and 0 respectively.
Q. 21There are two coils A and B separated by some distance. If a current of 2A

flows through A, a magnetic flux of 10 −2 Wb passes through B (no
current through B). If no current passes through A and a current of 1 A
passes through B, what is the flux through A?
K Thinking Process
A current I 1 is passed through the coil A and the flux linkage with coil B is,
N2φ2 = M21I 1
where, M21 is called the mutual inductance of coil A with respect to coil B andM21 = M12
And M12 is called the mutual inductance of coil B with respect to coil A.
Ans. Applying the mutual inductance of coil A with respect to coil B
N φ
M 21 = 2 2
I1
Therefore, we have
10−2
Mutual inductance = = 5 mH
2
Again applying this formula for other case
N1φ1 = M12 I 2 = 5 mH × 1A = 5 mWb.

Q. 22A magnetic field B = B 0 sin(ωt) k$ covers a large region where a wire AB
slides smoothly over two parallel conductors separated by a distance d
(figure). The wires are in the x-y plane. The wire AB (of length d) has
resistance R and the parallel wires have negligible resistance. If AB is
moving with velocity v, what is the current in the circuit. What is the
force needed to keep the wire moving at constant velocity?
y
A
C
O x
B
K Thinking Process
The emf induced across AB due to its motion and change in magnetic flux linked with
the loop change due to change of magnetic field.
Ans. Let us assume that the parallel wires at are y = 0 i.e., along x-axis and y = d . At t = 0, AB
has x = 0, i.e., along y-axis and moves with a velocity v. Let at time t, wire is at x(t ) = vt .
Now, the motional emf across AB is
= (B0 sinωt )vd (− $j )
emf due to change in field (along OBAC)
= − B0ω cos ωt x(t ) d
Total emf in the circuit = emf due to change in field (along OBAC) + the motional emf across
AB
= − B0d [ωx cos(ωt ) + v sin(ωt )]
Electric current in clockwise direction is given by
Bd
= 0 (ωx cos ωt + v sinωt )
R
The force acting on the conductor is given by F = ilBsin90° = ilB
Substituting the values, we have
Bd
Force needed along i = 0 (ωx cos ωt + v sinωt ) × d × B0 sinωt
R
B02d 2
= (ωx cos ωt + v sinωt )sinωt
R
This is the required expression for force.
Q. 23A conducting wire XY of mass m and negligible resistance slides smoothly

on two parallel conducting wires as shown in figure. The closed circuit
has a resistance R due to AC. AB and CD are perfect conductors. There is
a magnetic field B = B (t)k$
y
A x B
B
R l
B
X
C x (t) D
(i) Write down equation for the acceleration of the wire XY.
(ii) If B is independent of time, obtain v(t), assuming v (0) = u0
(iii) For (ii), show that the decrease in kinetic energy of XY equals the heat
lost in .
K Thinking Process
This problem relates EMI, magnetic force, power consumption and mechanics.
Ans. Let us assume that the parallel wires at are y = 0, i.e., along x-axis and y = l. At t = 0, XY
has x = 0 i.e., along y-axis.
(i) Let the wire be at x = x (t) at time t.
The magnetic flux linked with the loop is given by
φ = B.A = BA cos 0 = BA
at any instant t Magnetic flux = B(t )(l × x(t ))
Total emf in the circuit = emf due to change in field (along XYAC) + the motional emf
across XY
dφ dB(t )
E=− =− l x (t ) − B(t ) l v(t ) [second term due to motional emf]
dt dt
Electric current in clockwise direction is given by
1
I= E
R
The force acting on the conductor is given by F = ilBsin90° = ilB
Substituting the values, we have
IB(t )  dB(t )
Force = − I x (t ) − B(t )Iv(t ) $i
R  dt 
Applying Newton’s second law of motion,
d 2x I 2 B(t ) dB I 2 B2 (t ) dx
m 2 =− x(t ) − ...(i)
dt R dt R dt
which is the required equation.
(ii) If B is independent of time i.e., B = Constant
dB
Or =0
dt
Substituting the above value in Eq (i), we have

d 2x I 2 B2 dx
2
+ =0
dt mR dt
dv I 2 B2
or + v=0
dt mR
Integrating using variable separable form of differential equation, we have
 − I 2 B2t 
v = A exp 
 mR 
Applying given conditions, at t = 0, v = u 0
v(t ) = u 0 exp(− I 2 B2t / mR )
This is the required equation.
(iii) Since the power consumption is given by P = I 2 R
B2 I 2 v 2 (t )
Here, I 2R = ×R
R2
B2 I 2 2
=
u 0 exp(− 2 I 2 B2t I mR )
R
Now, energy consumed in time interval dt is given by energy consumed = Pdt = I 2 Rdt
Therefore, total energy consumed in time t
B2 I 2 2 mR 
1 − e −( l B t / mr )
t 2 2
= ∫ I 2 Rdt = u0 2 2 
0 R 2I B 
m 2 m 2
= u 0 − v (t )
2 2
= decrease in kinetic energy.
This proves that the decrease in kinetic energy of XY equals the heat lost in R.
Q. 24ODBAC is a fixed rectangular conductor of negligible resistance (CO is not

connected) and OP is a conductor which rotates clockwise with an
angular velocity ω (figure). The entire system is in a uniform magnetic
field B whose direction is along the normal to the surface of the
rectangular conductor ABDC. The conductor OP is in electric contact with
ABDC. The rotating conductor has a resistance of λ per unit length. Find
the current in the rotating conductor, as it rotates by 180°.
A B B
B B
l
l l ω
P O P
C D
2l
K Thinking Process
The pattern of rate of change of area (hence flux) can be considered uniform from
π π 3π 3π π
0 <θ < ; <θ < and < θ < . Hence, forth finding emf and current.
4 4 4 4 2
Ans. Let us consider the position of rotating conductor at time interval

π
t = 0 to t = (or T/8)
4ω
P
A 2l B A 2l B
Q
l P
Q l x l
x
θ
θ
C O l D C O R D
the rod OP will make contact with the side BD. Let the length OQ of the contact at sometime
π T
t such that 0 < t < or 0 < t < be x. The flux through the area ODQ is
4ω 8
1 1
φ = B QD × OD = B l tanθ × l
2 2
1
= Bi 2 tanθ, where θ = ωt
2
Applying Faraday’s law of EMI,
dφ 1 2
Thus, the magnitude of the emf generated is ε = = Bl ωsec 2 ωt
dt 2
ε
The current is I = where R is the resistance of the rod in contact.
R
where, R ∝ λ
λl
R = λx =
cos ωt
1 Bl2ω Blω
∴ I= sec 2ωt cos ωt =
2 λl 2 λ cos ωt
π 3π T 3T
Let the length OQ of the contact at some time t such that <t < or < t < be x. The
4ω 4ω 8 8
rod is in contact with the side AB. The flux through the area OQBD is
 1 l2 
φ =  l2 + B
 2 tanθ 
Where, θ = ωt
Thus, the magnitude of emf generated in the loop is
dφ 1 2 sec 2 ωt
ε= = Bl ω
dt 2 tan2 ωt
ε ε εsinωt 1 Blω
The current is I = = = =
R λx λl 2 λ sinωt
3π π 3T T
Similarly for < t < or < t < , the rod will be in touch with AC.
4ω ω 8 2
A 2l B
P
l
l x
θ
C O l D
The flux through OQABD is given by

 l2 
φ =  2 l2 − B
 2 tanωt 
And the magnitude of emf generated in loop is given by
dφ Bω l2 sec 2 ωt
ε= =
dt 2 tan2 ωt
ε ε 1 Blω
l= = =
R λx 2 λ sinωt
These are the required expressions.
Q. 25Consider an infinitely long wire carrying a current I (t), with

dI
= λ = constant. Find the current produced in the rectangular loop of
dt
wire ABCD if its resistance is R (figure).
l
A B
dr
x
D C
x0 r
I(t)
K Thinking Process
This question need the use of integration in order to find the total magnetic flux linked
with the loop.
Ans. Let us consider a strip of length l and width dr at a distance r from infinite long current
carrying wire. The magnetic field at strip due to current carrying wire is given by
µ I
Field B(r ) = o (out of paper)
2 πr
Total flux through the loop is
µ I x dr µ o I x
Flux = 0 l∫ = ln ...(i)
2 π xo r 2 π x0
The emf induced can be obtained by differentiating the eq. (i) wrt t and then applying Ohm’s
law
ε
=I
R
1 dφ ε µ 0 I λ x Q dI = λ 
We have, induced current = = = ln  
R dt R 2 π R x0  dt 
Q. 26A rectangular loop of wire ABCD is kept close to an infinitely long wire
carrying a current I (t) = I 0 (1 − t/T ) for 0 ≤ t ≤ T and I(0) = 0 for t > T
(figure.). Find the total charge passing through a given point in the
loop, in time T . The resistance of the loop is R.
L1
A B
L2 + X
D C
x
K Thinking Process
The charge passes through the circuit can be obtained by finding the relation between
instantaneous current and instantaneous magnetic flux linked with it.
Ans. The emf induced can be obtained by differentiating the expression of magnetic flux linked
wrt t and then applying Ohm’s law
E 1 dφ
I= =
R R dt
We know that electric current
dQ dQ 1 dφ
I(t ) = or =
dt dt R dt
Integrating the variable separable form of differential equation for finding the charge
Q that passed in time t, we have
1
Q(t 1 ) − Q(t 2 ) = [φ(t 1 ) − φ(t 2 )]
R
µ L 2 + x dx'
φ(t 1 ) = L1 0 ∫ I(t 1 ) [Refer to the Eq. (i) of answer no.25]
2π x x'
µ L L + x
= 0 1 I(t 1 )ln 2
2π x
The magnitude of charge is given by,
µ L L +x
= 0 1 ln 2 [I 0 + 0]
2π x
µ L L + x
= 0 1 I1 ln 2 
2π  x 
Q. 27 A magnetic field B is confined to a region r ≤ a and points out of the
paper (the z-axis), r = 0 being the centre of the circular region. A
charged ring (charge = Q) of radius b, b > a and mass m lies in the x-y
plane with its centre at the origin. The ring is free to rotate and is at
rest. The magnetic field is brought to zero in time ∆t. Find the angular
velocity ω of the ring after the field vanishes.
K Thinking Process
The decrease in magnetic field causes induced emf and hence, electric field around ring.
The torque experienced by the ring produces change in angular momentum.
Ans. Since, the magnetic field is brought to zero in time ∆t, the magnetic flux linked with the ring
also reduces from maximum to zero. This, in turn, induces an emf in ring by the
phenomenon of EMI. The induces emf causes the electric field E generation around the
ring.
The induced emf = electric field E × (2 πb ) (Because V = E × d ) ...(i)

By Faraday's law of EMI
The induced emf = rate of change of magnetic flux
= rate of change of magnetic field × area
Bπa2
= ...(ii)
∆t
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
Bπa2
2 πbE = emf =
∆t
Since, the charged ring experienced a electric force = QE
This force try to rotate the coil, and the torque is given by
Torque = b × Force
 Bπa2 
= QEb = Q  b
 2 πb∆t 
Ba2
=Q
2∆t
If ∆L is the change in angular momentum
Ba2
∆L = Torque × ∆t = Q
2
Since, initial angular momentum = 0
Now, since Torque × ∆t = Change in angular momentum
QBa2
Final angular momentum = mb 2ω =
2
QBa2
ω=
2 mb 2
On rearranging the terms, we have the required expression of angular speed.
Q. 28 A rod of mass m and resistance R slides smoothly over two parallel

perfectly conducting wires kept sloping at an angle θ with respect to the
horizontal (figure). The circuit is closed through a perfect conductor at
the top. There is a constant magnetic field B along the vertical
direction. If the rod is initially at rest, find the velocity of the rod as a
function of time.
v
B
θ
d
K Thinking Process
This problem combines the mechanics, EMI, magnetic force and linear differential
equation.
Ans. Here, the component of magnetic field perpendicular the plane = Bcosθ
Now, the conductor moves with speed v perpendicular to Bcosθ component of magnetic
field. This causes motional emf across two ends of rod, which is given by = v(Bcos θ)d
v(Bcos θ) d
This makes flow of induced current i = where, R is the resistance of rod. Now,
R
current carrying rod experience force which is given by F = iBd (horizontally in backward
direction). Now, the component of magnetic force parallel to incline plane along upward
v (Bcos θ)d 
direction = F cos θ = iBd cos θ = 
dx
 Bd cos θ where, v =
 R  dt
Also, the component of weight (mg) parallel to incline plane along downward direction
= mg sinθ.
Now, by Newton’s second law of motion
d 2x Bcos θd  dx 
m 2 = mg sinθ −   × (Bd )cos θ
dt R  dt 
2 2
dv Bd
= g sinθ − (cos θ)2 v
dt mR
dv B2d 2
+ (cos θ)2 v = g sinθ
dt mR
But, this is the linear differential equation.
On solving, we get
g sinθ  B2d 2 
v= 2 2 + A exp − (cos 2 θ) t 
B d cos θ 2
 mR 
mR
A is a constant to be determine by initial conditions.
The required expression of velocity as a function of time is given by
mgR sinθ   B2d 2 
= 2 2 2 
1 − exp − (cos 2θ) t  
B d cos θ   mR  
Q. 29 Find the current in the sliding rod AB (resistance = R) for the

arrangement shown in figure. B is constant and is out of the paper.
Parallel wires have no resistance, v is constant. Switch S is closed at
time t = 0.
X A
S
B
v d
C B
Y B
K Thinking Process
This problem combines the concept of EMI, charging of capacitor and linear differential
equation.
Ans. The conductor of length d moves with speed v, perpendicular to magnetic field B as shown
in figure. This produces motional emf across two ends of rod, which is given by = vB d.
Since, switch S is closed at time t = 0. capacitor is charged by this potential difference. Let
Q ( t) is charge on the capacitor and current flows from A to B.
Now, the induced current
vBd Q
I= −
R RC
On rearranging the terms, we have
Q dQ vBd
+ =
RC dt R
This is the linear differential equation. On solving, we get

Q = vBdC + Ae − t / RC
⇒ Q = vBdC [1 − e − t / RC ] (At time t = 0, Q = 0 = A = − vBdc).
vBd − t / RC
Differentiating, we get I − e
R
This is the required expression of current.
Q. 30Find the current in the sliding rod AB (resistance = R) for the

arrangement shown in figure. B is constant and is out of the paper.
Parallel wires have no resistance, v is constant. Switch S is closed at
time t = 0.
X A
S B B
v d
L B B
B
B B
K Thinking Process
This problem combines the concept of EMI, growth of current in inductor and linear
differential equation.
Ans. The conductor of length d moves with speed v, perpendicular to magnetic field B as shown
in figure. This produces motional emf across two ends of rod, which is given by = vBd.
Since, switch S is closed at time t = 0. current start growing in inductor by the potential
difference due to motional emf.
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage rule, we have
dI dI
−L + vBd = IR or L + IR = vBd
dt dt
This is the linear differential equation. On solving, we get
vBd
I= + Ae − Rt / 2
R
At t = 0 I = 0
vBd vBd
⇒ A=− ⇒I= (1 − e − Rt / L ) .
R R
This is the required expression of current.
Q. 31A metallic ring of mass m and radius l (ring being horizontal) is falling
under gravity in a region having a magnetic field. If z is the vertical
direction, the z-component of magnetic field is B z = B 0 (1 + λ z). If R
is the resistance of the ring and if the ring falls with a velocity v, find
the energy lost in the resistance. If the ring has reached a constant
velocity, use the conservation of energy to determine v in terms of m, B,
λ and acceleration due to gravity g.
K Thinking Process
This problem establishes a relationship between induced current, power lost and velocity
acquired by freely falling ring.
Ans. The magnetic flux linked with the metallic ring of mass m and radius l falling under gravity in
a region having a magnetic field whose z-component of magnetic field is Bz = B0 (1 + λz)
is
φ = Bz ( π l2 ) = B0 (1 + λz) ( π l2 )
dφ
Applying Faraday’s law of EMI, we have emf induced given by = rate of change of flux
dt
Also, by Ohm’s law
dz
B0 ( π l2 )λ = IR
dt
πl2 B0 λ
On rearranging the terms, we have I= v
R
( πl2 λ)2 B02 v 2
Energy lost/second = I 2 R =
R
dz
This must come from rate of change in PE = mg = mgv
dt
[as kinetic energy is constant for v = constant]
( πl2 λB0 )2 v 2 mgR
Thus, mgv = or v =
R ( πl2 λB0 )2
This is the required expression of velocity.
Q. 32 A long solenoid S has n turns per meter, with diameter a. At the centre
of this coil, we place a smaller coil of N turns and diameter b (where
b < a). If the current in the solenoid increases linearly, with time, what
is the induced emf appearing in the smaller coil. Plot graph showing
nature of variation in emf, if current varies as a function of mt 2 + C .
K Thinking Process
This problem require an insight to magnetic field due to current carrying solenoid having
varying current which induces emf in coil of radius B.
Ans. Magnetic field due to a solenoid S, B = µ 0 nl where signs are as usual.
Magnetic flux in smaller coil φ = NBA, where
A = πb 2
Applying Faraday’s law of EMI, we have
− dφ − d
So, e= = (NBA)
dt dt
d (B)
= − Nπb 2
dt
where, B = µ 0 Ni
dI
= − Nπb 2 µ 0 n
dt
d
= − Nnπµ 0 b 2 (mt 2 + C ) = − µ 0 Nnπb 2 2 mt
dt
Since, current varies as a function of mt 2 + C.
e = − µ 0 Nnπb 2 2 mt
7
Alternating Current
Q. 1 If the rms current in a 50 Hz AC circuit is 5 A, the value of the current
1/300 s after its value becomes zero is
(a) 5 2 A (b) 5 3 / 2 A
(c) 5 / 6 A (d) 5 / 2 A
Ans. (b) Given, ν = 50 Hz, I rms = 5A
1
t = s
300
We have to find I (t )
I 0 = Peak value = 2, I rms = 2 × 5
=5 2 A
1
I = I 0 sin ωt = 5 2 sin 2 π νt = 5 2 sin 2 π × 50 ×
300
π 3
= 5 2 sin =5 2 × = 5 3/2 A
3 2
Q. 2 An alternating current generator has an internal resistance R g and an

internal reactance X g . It is used to supply power to a passive load
consisting of a resistance R g and a reactance X L . For maximum power to
be delivered from the generator to the load, the value of X L is equal to
(a) zero (b) Xg
(c) − Xg (d) Rg
Ans. (c) For delivering maximum power from the generator to the load, total internal reactance
must be equal to conjugate of total external reactance.
Hence, Xint = * X ext
⇒ X g = ( X L )* = − X L
⇒ XL = − Xg
Alternating Current 111
Q. 3 When a voltage measuring device is connected to AC mains, the meter

shows the steady input voltage of 220 V. This means
(a) input voltage cannot be AC voltage, but a DC voltage
(b) maximum input voltage is 220 V
(c) the meter reads not v but < v 2 > and is calibrated to read < v 2 >
(d) the pointer of the meter is stuck by some mechanical defect
Ans. (c) The voltmeter connected to AC mains reads mean value (<v 2 >) and is calibrated in
such a way that it gives value of <v 2 >, which is multiplied by form factor to give rms
value.
Q. 4 To reduce the resonant frequency in an L-C-R series circuit with a

generator
(a) the generator frequency should be reduced
(b) another capacitor should be added in parallel to the first
(c) the iron core of the inductor should be removed
(d) dielectric in the capacitor should be removed
Ans. (b) We know that resonant frequency in an L-C-R circuit is given by
1
v0 =
2 π LC
Now to reduce v 0 either we can increase L or we can increase C.
To increase capacitance, we must connect another capacitor parallel to
the first.
Q. 5 Which of the following combinations should be selected for better tuning

of an L-C-R circuit used for communication?
. H, C = 35 µ F
(a) R = 20 Ω, L = 15
(b) R = 25 Ω, L = 2.5 H, C = 45 µF
(c) R = 15 Ω, L = 3.5 H, C = 30 µF
(d) R = 25 Ω, L = 15
. H, C = 45 µF
K Thinking Process
For better tuning of an L-C-R circuit used for communication, quality factor of the circuit
must be as high as possible.
Ans. (c) Quality factor (Q) of an L-C-R circuit is given by,
1 L
Q=
R C
where R is resistance, L is inductance and C is capacitance of the circuit. To make Q
high,
R should be low, L should be high and C should be low.
These conditions are best satisfied by the values given in option (c).
Note We should be careful while writing formula for quality factor, because we are
considering series L-C-R circuit.
Q. 6 An inductor of reactance 1Ω and a resistor of 2Ω are connected in series

to the terminals of a 6V (rms) AC source. The power dissipated in the
circuit is
(a) 8 W (b) 12 W
(c) 14.4 W (d) 18 W
Ans. (c) Given, X L = 1Ω, R = 2Ω
Erms = 6 V, Pav = ?
Average power dissipated in the circuit
Pav = Erms I rms cos φ ...(i)
I E
I rms = 0 = rms
2 Z
Z= R 2 + X L2
= 4 + 1= 5
6
I rms = A
5
R 2
cos φ = =
Z 5
6 2
Pav = 6 × × [from Eq. (i)]
5 5
72 72
= = = 14.4 W
5 5 5
Q. 7 The output of a step-down transformer is measured to be 24 V when

connected to a 12 W light bulb. The value of the peak current is
(a) 1 / 2 A (b) 2 A
(c) 2 A (d) 2 2 A
Ans. (a) Secondary voltage VS = 24V
Power associated with secondary PS = 12 W
P 12
IS = S =
VS 24
1
=
A = 0.5 A
2
Peak value of the current in the secondary
I 0 = IS 2
1
= (0.5) (1.414) = 0707
. = A
2

Q. 8 As the frequency of an AC circuit increases, the current first increases and
then decreases. What combination of circuit elements is most likely to
comprise the circuit?
(a) Inductor and capacitor (b) Resistor and inductor
(c) Resistor and capacitor (d) Resistor, inductor and capacitor
K Thinking Process
We can decide the elements, comprising the given circuit by predicting the variation in
their reactances with frequency.
Ans. (a,d)
Reactance of an inductor of inductance L is, X L = 2 πνL
where v is frequency of the AC circuit. I
Xc = Reactance of the capacitive circuit I max
1
=
2 πfC
On increasing frequency ν, clearly X L increases and XC
decreases.
For a L-C-R circuit,
Z = Impedance of the circuit Z = Zmin z
= R 2 + ( X L − XC )2
2
= R 2 +  2 πvL −
1 

 2 πvC 
As frequency (ν) increases, Z decreases and at certain value of frequency know as resonant
frequency (ν0 ), impedance Z is minimum that is Zmin = R current varies inversely with
impedance and at Zmin current is maximum.
Q. 9 In an alternating current circuit consisting of elements in series, the

current increases on increasing the frequency of supply. Which of the
following elements are likely to constitute the circuit?
(a) Only resistor (b) Resistor and an inductor
(c) Resistor and a capacitor (d) Only a capacitor
Ans. (c, d)
According to the question, the current increases on increasing the frequency of supply.
Hence, the reactance of the circuit must be decreases as increasing frequency.
For a capacitive circuit,
1 1
XC = =
ωC 2 πfC
Clearly when frequency increases, XC decreases.
2
R 2 + 
1 
For R-C circuit, X= 
 ωC 
when frequency increases X decreases.
Q. 10Electrical energy is transmitted over large distances at high alternating

voltages. Which of the following statements is (are) correct?
(a) For a given power level, there is a lower current
(b) Lower current implies less power loss
(c) Transmission lines can be made thinner
(d) It is easy to reduce the voltage at the receiving end using step-down
transformers
K Thinking Process
Power loss due to transmission lines having resistance (R) and rms current flowing I rms is
I 2rms R.
Ans. (a, b, d)
We have to transmit energy (power) over large distances at high alternating voltages, so
current flowing through the wires will be low because for a given power (P).
P = Erms I rms , I rms is low when Erms is high.
Power loss = I 2 rms R = low (QI rms is low)
Now at the receiving end high voltage is reduced by using step-down transformers.
Q. 11For a L-C-R circuit, the power transferred from the driving source to the
driven oscillator is P = I 2 Z cos φ.
(a) Here, the power factor cos φ ≥ 0 , P ≥ 0
(b) The driving force can give no energy to the oscillator (P = 0) in some cases
(c) The driving force cannot syphon out (P < 0) the energy out of oscillator
(d) The driving force can take away energy out of the oscillator
Ans. (a, b, c)
According to question power transferred,
P = I 2 Z cos φ
where I is the current, Z = Impedance and cos φ is power factor
R
As power factor, cos φ =
Z
where R > 0 and Z > 0
⇒ cosφ > 0 ⇒ P > 0
Q. 12When an AC voltage of 220 V is applied to the capacitor C

(a) the maximum voltage between plates is 220 V
(b) the current is in phase with the applied voltage
(c) the charge on the plates is in phase with the applied voltage
(d) power delivered to the capacitor is zero
Ans. (c, d)
When the AC voltage is applied to the capacitor, the plate connected to + –
+ –
the positive terminal will be at higher potential and the plate connected to + –
+ –
the negative terminal will be at lower potential. + –
The plate with positive charge will be at higher potential and the plate
with negative charge will be at lower potential. So, we can say that the + –
charge is in phase with the applied voltage. (AC)
Power applied to a circuit is Pav = Vrms I rms cos φ

For capacitive circuit, φ = 90°
⇒ cos φ = 0
⇒ Pav = Power delivered = 0
Q. 13The line that draws power supply to your house from street has
(a) zero average current
(b) 220 V average voltage
(c) voltage and current out of phase by 90 °
π
(d) voltage and current possibly differing in phase φ such that φ <
2
Ans. (a, d)
For house hold supplies, AC currents are used which are having zero average value
over a cycle.
R
The line is having some resistance so power factor cos φ = ≠ 0
Z
so, φ ≠ π / 2 ⇒ φ ,< π / 2
i.e., phase lies between 0 and π /2.

Q. 14If a L-C circuit is considered analogous to a harmonically oscillating
springblock system, which energy of the L-C circuit would be analogous
to potential energy and which one analogous to kinetic energy?
Ans. If we consider a L-C circuit analogous to a harmonically oscillating springblock system.
1
The electrostatic energy CV 2 is analogous to potential energy and energy associated with
2
moving charges (current) that is magnetic energy  LI 2  is analogous to kinetic energy.
1
2 
Q. 15Draw the effective equivalent circuit of the circuit shown in figure, at

very high frequencies and find the effective impedance.
R1 C1 L1
C2
L2 R2 R3
K Thinking Process
The component with infinite resistance will be considered as open circuit and the
component with zero resistance will be considered as short circuited.
Ans. We know that inductive reactance X L = 2 πfL

1
and capacitive reactance XC =
2 πfC
For very high frequencies (f → ∞), X L → ∞ and XC → 0
When reactance of a circuit is infinite it will be considered as open circuit. When reactance of
a circuit is zero it will be considered as short circuited.
So, C1, C 2 → shorted and L1, L2 → opened.
R1 R1 R3
R2 R3
So, effective impedance = R eq = R1 + R 3
Q. 16 Study the circuits (a) and (b) shown in figure and answer the following
questions.
R R C L
(a) (b)
(a) Under which conditions would the rms currents in the two circuits be
the same?
(b) Can the rms current in circuit (b) be larger than that in (a)?
Ans. Let, (I rms ) a = rms current in circuit (a)
(I rms ) b = rms current in circuit (b)
V V
(I rms ) a = rms =
R R
V V
(I rms ) b = rms =
Z R + ( X − X )2
2
L C
(a) When (I rms ) a = (I rms ) b

R= R 2 + ( X L − XC )2
⇒ X L = XC , resonance condition
(b) As Z ≥ R
(I rms ) a R 2 + ( X L − XC )2
⇒ =
(I rms ) b R
Z
= ≥1
R
⇒ (I rms ) a ≥ (I rms )b
No, the rms current in circuit (b), cannot be larger than that in (a).
Q. 17Can the instantaneous power output of an AC source ever be negative?

Can the average power output be negative?
Ans. Let the applied emf
E = E0 sin (ωt )
and current developed is
I = I 0 sin (ωt ± φ)
Instantaneous power output of the AC source
P = EI = (E0 sin ωt ) [I 0 sin (ωt ± φ)]
= E0 I 0 sin ωt ⋅ sin (ωt + φ)
E I
= 0 0 [cos φ − cos (2ωt + φ)] ...(i)
2
V0 I 0
Average power Pav = cos φ
2 2
= Vrms I rms cos φ ...(ii)
where φ is the phase difference.
Clearly, from Eq. (i)
when cos φ < cos (2 ωt + φ)
P <0
Yes, the instantaneous power output of an AC source can be negative
From Eq. (ii) Pav > 0
R
Because cos φ = > 0
Z
No, the average power output of an AC source cannot be negative.
Q. 18 In series LCR circuit, the plot of I max versus ω is shown in figure. Find the
bandwidth and mark in the figure.
Im (A)
1.0
0.5
0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
ω(rad/s)
Ans. Consider the diagram .

Bandwidth = ω2 − ω1
y
1.0
Im (A)
0.5
x
0 0.8 1.0 1.2
ω(rad/s)
1
where ω1 and ω2 corresponds to frequencies at which magnitude of current is times of
2
maximum value.
Imax 1
=I rms =
≈ 07
. A
2 2
Clearly from the diagram, the corresponding frequencies are 0.8 rad/s and 1.2 rad/s.
∆ ω = Bandwidth = 1⋅ 2 − 0.8 = 0.4 rad/s
Q. 19 The alternating current in a circuit is described by the graph shown in

figure. Show rms current in this graph.
3
2
I(A)
1
0 T 2T
–1 t
–2
–3
Ans. I rms = rms current

12 + 2 2 5
= = = 158
. A ≈ 1.6A
2 2
3
2
I(A)
1
0 T 2T
–1 t
–2
–3
The rms value of the current (I rms ) = 1. 6 A is indicated in the graph.
Q. 20 How does the sign of the phase angle φ, by which the supply voltage
leads the current in an L-C-R series circuit, change as the supply
frequency is gradually increased from very low to very high values.
Ans. The phase angle (φ) by which voltage leads the current in L-C-R series circuit is given by
1
2 πνL −
X − XC 2 πνC
tan φ = L =
R R
tan φ < 0 (for ν < ν0)
tan φ> 0 (for ν > ν0 )
tan φ = 0  for ν = ν = 1 
 
 0
2 π 2C 

Q. 21A device ‘X’ is connected to an AC source. The variation of voltage,
current and power in one complete cycle is shown in figure.
(a) Which curve shows power consumption over a full cycle?
(b) What is the average power consumption over a cycle?
(c) Identify the device X.
A
B
v, L, P
C
t
Ans. (a) We know that Power = P = VI

that is curve of power will be having maximum amplitude, equals to multiplication of
amplitudes of voltage (V) and current (I) curve. So, the curve will be represented by A.
(b) As shown by shaded area in the diagram, the full cycle of the graph consists of one
positive and one negative symmetrical area.
Hence, average power over a cycle is zero.

(c) As the average power is zero, hence the device may be inductor (L) or capacitor (C) or
the series combination of L and C.
Q. 22 Both alternating current and direct current are measured in amperes.

But how is the ampere defined for an alternating current?
Ans. For a Direct Current (DC),
1 ampere = 1 coulomb/sec
An AC current changes direction with the source frequency and the attractive force would
average to zero. Thus, the AC ampere must be defined in terms of some property that is
independent of the direction of current.
Joule’s heating effect is such property and hence it is used to define rms value of AC.
Q. 23 A coil of 0.01H inductance and 1Ω resistance is connected to 200 V,

50Hz AC supply. Find the impedance of the circuit and time lag between
maximum alternating voltage and current.
Ans. Given, inductance L = 0.01 H
resistance R = 1Ω, voltage (V) = 200 V
and frequency (f) = 50 Hz.
Impedance of the circuit Z= R 2 + X L2 = R 2 + (2 πfL)2
= 12 + (2 × 314
. × 50 × 0.01)2
or Z = 10.86 = 3.3Ω
ωL 2 πfL 2 × 314
. × 50 × 0.01
tan φ = = = = 314
.
R R 1
φ = tan−1 (314
. ) ≈ 72 °
72 × π
Phase difference φ= rad.
180
Time lag between alternating voltage and current
φ 72 π 1
∆t = = = s
ω 180 × 2 π × 50 250
Q. 24A 60 W load is connected to the secondary of a transformer whose

primary draws line voltage. If a current of 0.54 A flows in the load, what
is the current in the primary coil? Comment on the type of tansformer
being used.
Ans. Given, PS = 60 W, IS = 0.54 A
Current in the primary I p = ?
Taking line voltage as 220 V.
We can write Since,
⇒ PL = 60 W, I L = 0.54A
60
⇒ VL = = 110 V . ...(i)
0.54
Voltage in the secondary (ES ) is less than voltage in the primary (EP ).
Hence, the transformer is step down transformer.
Since, the transformation ratio
V I
r= s = p
Vp Is
110 V Ip
Substituting the values, =
220 V 0.54 A
On solving I p = 0.27A
Q. 25Explain why the reactance provided by a capacitor to an alternating

current decreases with increasing frequency.
Ans. A capacitor does not allow flow of direct current through it as the resistance across the gap
is infinite. When an alternating voltage is applied across the capacitor plates, the plates
are alternately charged and discharged. The current through the capacitor is a result of this
changing voltage (or charge).
Thus, a capacitor will pass more current through it if the voltage is changing at a faster rate,
i.e. if the frequency of supply is higher. This implies that the reactance offered by a capacitor
is less with increasing frequency.
1
Mathematically, the reactance can be written as XC = .
ωC
Q. 26Explain why the reactance offered by an inductor increases with

increasing frequency of an alternating voltage.
Ans. An inductor opposes flow of current through it by developing a back emf according to
Lenz’s law. The induced voltage has a polarity so as to maintain the current at its present
value. If the current is decreasing, the polarity of the induced emf will be so as to increase
the current and vice -versa.
Since, the induced emf is proportional to the rate of change of current, it will provide greater
reactance to the flow of current if the rate of change is faster, i.e., if the frequency is higher.
The reactance of an inductor, therefore, is proportional to the frequency. Mathematically, the
reactance offered by the inductor is given by X L = ωL.

Q. 27An electrical device draws 2 kW power from AC mains (voltage 223 V
 − 3
(rms) = 50000 V). The current differs (lags) in phase by φ  tan φ = 
 4
as compared to voltage. Find (a) R, (b) X C − X L and (c) I M . Another device
has twice the values for R, X C and X L . How are the answers affected?
K Thinking Process
We have to apply the formula for phase relation, net reactance as well as instantaneous
power associate with the circuit in terms of voltage and current.
Ans. Given, power drawn = P = 2kW = 2000 W
3
tan φ = − , I M = I 0 = ?, R = ?, XC − X L = ?
4
Vrms = V = 223 V
V2
Power P =
Z
V 2 223 × 223
⇒ Z= = = 25
P 2 × 103
Impedance Z = 25 Ω
Impedance Z = R 2 + ( X L − XC )2
⇒ 25 = R 2 + ( X L − XC )2
or 625 = R 2 + ( X L − XC )2 …(i)
X − XC 3
Again, tanφ = L =
R 4
3R
or X L − XC = …(ii)
4
3R
From Eq. (ii), we put X L − XC = in Eq. (i), we get
4
2
9R 2
625 = R 2 + 
3R 
 =R +
2
 4  16
25R 2
or 625 =
16
(a) Resistance R = 25 × 16 = 400 = 20Ω
3R 3
(b) X L − XC = = × 20 = 15Ω
4 4
V 223
(c) Main current I M = 2 I = 2 = × 2 = 12.6 A
Z 25
As R, XC , X L are all doubled, tanφ does not change. Z is doubled, current is halved. So,
power is also halved.
Q. 28 1 MW power is to be delivered from a power station to a town 10 km

away. One uses a pair of Cu wires of radius 0.5 cm for this purpose.
Calculate the fraction of ohmic losses to power transmitted if
(i) power is transmitted at 220V. Comment on the feasibility of doing
this.
(ii) a step-up transformer is used to boost the voltage to 11000V, power
transmitted, then a step-down transformer is used to bring voltage to
220 V. (ρ cu = 1.7 × 10 −8 SI unit)
Ans. (i) The town is 10 km away, length of pair of Cu wires used, L = 20 km = 20000 m.
l l
Resistance of Cu wires, R= =
A π (r )2
. × 10−8 × 20000
17
= = 4Ω
. (0.5 × 10−2 )2
314
106
I at 220 V VI = 106 W; I = = 0.45 × 104 A
220
RI 2 =power loss
= 4 × (0.45)2 × 108 W
> 106 W
Therefore, this method cannot be used for transmission.
(ii) When power P = 106 W is transmitted at 11000 V.
V′ I ′ = 106 W = 11000 I ′
1
Current drawn, I ′ = × 102
11
.
1
Power loss = RI 2 = × 4 × 104
121
.
= 3.3 × 104 W
3.3 × 104
Fraction of power loss = = 3.3%
106
Q. 29 Consider the L-C-R circuit shown in figure. Find the net current i and the
V
phase of i. Show that i = . Find the impedance Z for this circuit.
Z
R
i2
i1 L
C
i
Vm sin ωt
K Thinking Process
The circuit consists of inductor (L) and capacitor (C) connected in series and the
combination is connected parallel with a resistance R. Due to this combination there is
oscillation of electromagnetic energy.
Ans. In the given figure i is the total current from the source. It is divided into two parts i1 through
R and i 2 through series combination of C and L.
So, we can write i = i1 + i 2
As, Vm sin ωt = R i1 [from the circuit diagram]
Vm sin ωt
⇒ i1 = ...(i)
R
If q 2 is charge on the capacitor at any time t, then for series combination of C and L.
Applying KVL in the Lower circuit as shown,
R
i2 C L
i1
C
i
Vm sin ωt
q2 L di 2
+ − Vm sin ωt = 0
C dt
⇒
q2
+
L d 2q 2
= Vm sinωt Q i = dq 2  ... (ii)
C dt 2  2 dt 
Let q 2 = q m sin (ωt + φ) ... (iii)
dq 2
∴ = q mω cos (ωt + φ)
dt
d 2q 2
⇒ = − q mω2 sin (ωt + φ)
dt 2
Now putting these values in Eq. (ii), we get
q m  + L (−ω2 ) sin (ωt + φ) = Vm sinωt
1
 C 
If φ = 0 and  − Lω2  > 0,

1
C 
Vm
then qm = ...(iv)
 1 − Lω 2 
 
C 
dq 2
From Eq. (iii), i2 = = ωq m cos (ωt + φ)
dt
ω Vm cos (ωt + φ)
using Eq. (iv), i2 =
1
− Lω 2
C
V cos (ωt )
Taking φ = 0; i 2 = m …(v)
 1 − Lω
 
 ωC 
π
From Eqs. (i) and (v), we find that i1 and i 2 are out of phase by .
2
Vm sin ωt V cos ωt
Now, i1 + i 2 = + m
R  1 − Lω 
 
 ωC 
Vm Vm
Put = A = C cos φ and = B = C sin φ
R  1 − Lω
 
 ωC 
∴ i1 + i 2 = C cos φsin ωt + C sin φ cos ωt
= C sin (ωt + φ)
where C= A 2 + B2
1/ 2
 
−1 B
 Vm2 Vm2 
and φ = tan C= 2 + 
A  R  1 
− Lω 

  ωC  
−1 R
and φ = tan
 1 − Lω
 
 ωC 
1/ 2
 
 2 2 
V V
Hence, i = i1 + i 2 =  m2 + m  sin (ωt + φ)
R  1 − Lω  
2
   
  ωC  
1/ 2
 
 
i 1  1 1 
or = = +
Vm Z  R 2  1 − Lω 
2
   
  ωC  
This is the expression for impedance Z of the circuit.
Note In this problem, we should not apply the formulae of L-C-R series circuit directly.
Q. 30For a L-C-R circuit driven at frequency ω, the equation reads

di q
L + Ri + = Vi = Vm sin ωt
dt C
(a) Multiply the equation by i and simplify where possible.
(b) Interpret each term physically.
(c) Cast the equation in the form of a conservation of energy statement.
(d) Intergrate the equation over one cycle to find that the phase
difference between V and i must be acute.
K Thinking Process
Apply KVL for the given L-C-R series circuit and find the required relations. Also find
energy loss through the resistors to know net loss of energy through the circuit.
Ans. Consider the L-C-R circuit. Applying KVL for the loop, we can write
L C R
i i
V = Vm sin ωt
di q
⇒ L + + iR = Vm sin ωt .... (i)
dt C
Multiplying both sides by i, we get
di q
Li + i + i 2 R = (Vm i ) sin ωt = Vi ..... (ii)
dt C
di d  1 2
where Li =  Li  = rate of change of energy stored in an inductor.
dt dt  2 
Ri 2 = joule heating loss
q d q2 
i =   = rate of change of energy stored in the capacitor.
C dt  2C 
Vi = rate at which driving force pours in energy. It goes into (i) ohmic loss and (ii) increase of
stored energy.
Hence Eq. (ii) is in the form of conservation of energy statement. Integrating both sides of
Eq. (ii) with respect to time over one full cycle (0 → T) we may write
T d 1 2 q2  T T
∫0 dt  2 Li + 2C  dt + ∫0 Ri dt = ∫0 Vi dt
2
T
⇒ 0 + (+ ve ) = ∫ Vi dt
0
T
⇒ ∫ Vi dt > 0 if phase difference between V and i is a constant and acute angle.
0
Q. 31In the L-C-R circuit, shown in figure the AC driving voltage is V = Vm

sin ωt.
(a) Write down the equation of motion for q(t ).
(b) At t = t 0 , the voltage source stops and R is short circuited. Now write
down how much energy is stored in each of L and C.
(c) Describe subsequent motion of charges.
R L
K Thinking Process
We have to apply KVL write the equations in the form of current and charge double
differentiate the equation with respect to time and find the required relations.
Ans. (a) Consider the R-L-C circuit shown in the adjacent diagram.
R L
i C
V = Vm sin ωt
Given V = Vm sin ωt
Let current at any instant be i
Applying KVL in the given circuit
di q
iR + L + − Vm sin ωt = 0 …(i)
dt C
dq di d 2q
Now, we can write i = ⇒ = 2
dt dt dt
dq d 2q q
From Eq. (i) R+ L 2 + = Vm sin ωt
dt dt C
d 2q dq q
⇒ L 2 +R + = Vm sin ωt
dt dt C
This is the required equation of variation (motion) of charge.
(b) Let q = q msin (ωt + φ) = − q m cos (ωt + φ)

i = i m sin(ωt + φ) = q m ωsin (ωt + φ)
V Vm
im = m =
Z R + ( X − X )2
2
C L
φ = tan −1  XC − X L 
 
 R 
When R is short circuited at t = t 0 , energy is stored in L and C.
2
1 1  Vm 
U L = Li 2 = L   sin2 (ωt 0 + φ)
2 2  (R 2 + X − X )2 
 C L 
1 q2 1
and UC = × = [q 2 m cos 2 (ωt 0 + φ)]
2 C 2C
2
1  Vm 
=  
2C  R 2 + ( X − X )2 
 C L 
2
×  m  cos 2 (ωt 0 + φ)
1 i
=
2C  ω 
i 2m
= cos 2 (ωt 0 + φ) [Qi m = q mω]
2Cω2
2
1  Vm  cos 2 (ωt + φ)
=   0
2C  R 2 + ( X − X )2  ω2`
 C L 
2
1  Vm 
=   cos 2 (ωt 0 + φ)
2Cω  R 2 + ( XC − X L )2
2

 
(c) When R is short circuited, the circuit becomes an L-C oscillator. The capacitor will go on
discharging and all energy will go to L and back and forth. Hence, there is oscillation of
energy from electrostatic to magnetic and magnetic to electrostatic.
8
Electromagnetic Waves
Q. 1 One requires 11 eV of energy to dissociate a carbon monoxide molecule
into carbon and oxygen atoms. The minimum frequency of the appropriate
electromagnetic radiation to achieve the dissociation lies in
(a) visible region (b) infrared region
(c) ultraviolet region (d) microwave region
Ans. (c) Given, energy required to dissociate a carbon monoxide molecule into carbon and
oxygen atoms E = 11eV
We know that, E = hν, where h = 6.62 × 10−34 J-s
ν = frequency
⇒ 11eV = hν
. × 10−19
11 × 16
⇒ ν= J
h
11 × 1. 6 × 10−19
= J
6.62 × 10−34
= 2.65 × 1015 Hz
This frequency radiation belongs to ultraviolet region.
Q. 2 A linearly polarised electromagnetic wave given as E = E o $i cos (kz − ωt) is

incident normally on a perfectly reflecting infinite wall at z = a. Assuming
that the material of the wall is optically inactive, the reflected wave will
be given as
(a) Er = E o $i(kz − ωt ) (b) Er = E o $i cos(kz + ωt )
(c) Er = − E o $i cos(kz + ωt ) (d) E = E $i sin(kz − ωt )
r o
K Thinking Process
When a wave is reflected from a denser medium, then its phase changes by 180° or π.
Ans. (b) When a wave is reflected from denser medium, then the type of wave doesn’t change
but only its phase changes by 180° or π radian.
Thus, for the reflected wave z$ = − z$ , $i = − $i and additional phase of π in the incident
wave.
Electromagnetic Waves 129
Given, here the incident electromagnetic wave is,

E = Eo $i cos(kz − ωt )
The reflected electromagnetic wave is given by
E r = Eo (− $i ) cos[k(− z) − ωt + π ]
= − E $i cos[−(kz + ωt ) + π ]
o
= Eo $i cos[−(kZ + ωt ) = Eo $i cos(kz + ωt )]
Q. 3 Light with an energy flux of 20 W/cm2 falls on a non-reflecting surface at

normal incidence. If the surface has an area of 30 cm2 , the total
momentum delivered (for complete absorption) during 30 min is
(a) 36 × 10 −5 kg-m/s (b) 36 × 10 −4 kg-m/s
(c) 108 × 10 4 kg-m/s (d) 1. 08 × 10 7 kg-m/s
Ans. (b) Given, energy flux φ = 20W / cm2
Area, A = 30cm2
Time, t = 30 min = 30 × 60 s
Now, total energy falling on the surface in time t is, U = φAt = 20 × 30 × (30 × 60) J
U
Momentum of the incident light =
c
20 × 30 × (30 × 60)
= ⇒ = 36 × 10−4 kg-ms −1
3 × 108
Momentum of the reflected light = 0
∴Momentum delivered to the surface
= 36 × 10−4 − 0 = 36 × 10−4 kg-ms −1
Q. 4 The electric field intensity produced by the radiations coming from 100 W
bulb at a 3 m distance is E. The electric field intensity produced by the
radiations coming from 50 W bulb at the same distance is
E E
(a) (b) 2E (c) (d) 2E
2 2
K Thinking Process
Electric field intensity on a surface due to incident radiation is,
I av ∝ E o2
Pav.
∝ E o2
A
Here, Pav ∝ E o2 [Q A is same in bothcases]
Ans. (c) We know that, Eo ∝ Pav
(Eo )1 (Pav )1 E 1000
∴ = ⇒ =
(Eo )2 (Pav )2 (Eo )2 50
(Eo )2 = E / 2
Now according to question, P′ = 50 W, P = 100 W
∴ Putting these value in Eq.(i), we get
E′ 50 E′ 1 E
= ⇒ = ⇒ E′ =
E 100 E 2 2
Q. 5 If E and B represent electric and magnetic field vectors of the

electromagnetic wave, the direction of propagation of electromagnetic
wave is along
(a) E (b) B (c) B × E (d) E × B
Ans. (d) The direction of propagation of electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to both electric
field vector E and magnetic field vector B, i.e., in the direction of E × B.
This can be seen by the diagram given below
x
y B
Here, electromagnetic wave is along the z-direction which is given by the cross product
of E and B.
Q. 6 The ratio of contributions made by the electric field and magnetic field
components to the intensity of an EM wave is
(a) c :1 (b) c2 : 1 (c) 1 : 1 (d) c :1
K Thinking Process
Intensity of electromagnetic wave, I = U av c
where, U av = Average energy
and c = speed to light
Ans. (c) 1
Intensity in terms of electric field Uav = εo Eo2
2
1 Bo2
Intensity in terms of magnetic field Uav =
2 µo
Now taking the intensity in terms of electric field.
1
(Uav ) electric field = εo Eo2
2
1
⇒ = εo (cBo )2 (Q Eo = cBo )
2
1
= εo × c 2 B2
2
1
But, c=
µ o εo
1 1 1 Bo2
∴ (Uav ) Electric field = εo × Bo2 =
2 µ o εo 2 µo
= (Uav )magnetic field
Thus, the energy in electromagnetic wave is divided equally between electric field
vector and magnetic field vector.
Therefore, the ratio of contributions by the electric field and magnetic field components
to the intensity of an electromagnetic wave is 1 : 1.
Q. 7 An EM wave radiates outwards from a dipole antenna, with E o as the

amplitude of its electric field vector. The electric field E o which transports
significant energy from the source falls off as
1 1
(a) (b)
r3 r2
1
(c) (d) remains constant
r
Ans. (c) From a diode antenna, the electromagnetic waves are radiated outwards.
The amplitude of electric field vector (Eo ) which transports significant energy from the
1
source falls off intensity inversely as the distance (r ) from the antenna, i.e., Eo ∝ .
r
Q. 8 An electromagnetic wave travels in vacuum along z-direction

E = (E 1 i$ E2 $j)cos(kz − ω t). Choose the correct options from the following
(a) The associated magnetic field is given as
1
B = (E1$i − E 2$j ) cos(kz − ωt )
c
(b) The associated magnetic field is given as
1
B = (E1$i − E 2$j ) cos(kz − ωt )
c
(c) The given electromagnetic field is circularly polarised
(d) The given electromagnetic wave is plane polarised
K Thinking Process
From Maxwell’s equations, it is seen that the magnitude of the electric and the magnetic
fields in an electromagnetic wave are related as
E
Bo = o
c
Ans. (d) Here, in electromagnetic wave, the electric field vector is given as,
E = (E1$i + E2 $j )cos(kz − ωt )
In electromagnetic wave, the associated magnetic field vector,
E E $i + E2 $j
B= = 1 cos(kz − ωt )
c c
Also, E and B are perpendicular to each other and the propagation of electromagnetic
wave is perpendicular to E as well as B, so the given electromagnetic wave is plane
polarised.

Q. 9 An electromagnetic wave travelling along z-axis is given as
E = E o cos(kz − ωt). Choose the correct options from the following
1$ 1
(a) The associated magnetic field is given as B =k × E = ( k$ × E)
c ω
(b) The electromagnetic field can be written in terms of the associated magnetic
field as E = c (B × k$ )
(c) k$ ⋅ E = 0, k$ ⋅ B = 0
(d) k$ × E = 0, k$ × B = 0
K Thinking Process
Given, E = Eo cos(kz − ωt) . Thus, it acts along negative y-direction.
Ans. (a, b, c)
Suppose an electromagnetic wave is travelling along negative z-direction. Its electric field is
given by
E = Eo cos(kz − ωt )
which is perpendicular to z-axis. It acts along negative y-direction.
The associated magnetic field B in electromagnetic wave is along x-axis i.e., along k$ × E.
E
As, Bo = o
c
1
∴ B = (k$ × E )
c
The associated electric field can be written in terms of magnetic field as
E = c (B × k$ ).
Angle between k and E is 90° between k$ and B is 90°. Therefore, E = 1Ecos 90° = 0 and
$
k$ ⋅ B = 1 E cos 90° = 0 .
Q. 10 A plane electromagnetic wave propagating along x-direction can have

the following pairs of E and B.
(a) E x , By (b) E y , Bz (c) Bx , E y (d) E z, By
Ans. (b, d)
As electric and magnetic field vectors E and B are perpendicular to each other as well as
perpendicular to the direction of propagation of electromagnetic wave.
Here in the question electromagnetic wave is propagating along x-direction. So, electric and
magnetic field vectors should have either y-direction or z-direction.
Q. 11 A charged particle oscillates about its mean equilibrium position with a

frequency of 10 9 Hz. The electromagnetic waves produced
(a) will have frequency of10 9 Hz (b) will have frequency of 2 × 10 9 Hz
(c) will have wavelength of 0.3 m (d) fall in the region of radiowaves
K Thinking Process
The frequency of electromagnetic waves produced by a charged particle is equal to the
frequency by which it oscillates about its mean equilibrium position.
Ans. (a, c, d)
Given, frequency by which the charged particles oscillates about its mean equilibrium
position = 109 Hz.
So, frequency of electromagnetic waves produced by the charged particle is ν = 109 Hz.
c 3 × 108
Wavelength λ = = = 0.3 m
ν 109
Also, frequency of 109 Hz fall in the region of radiowaves.
Q. 12The source of electromagnetic waves can be a charge

(a) moving with a constant velocity (b) moving in a circular orbit
(c) at rest (d) falling in an electric field
K Thinking Process
An electromagnetic wave can be produced by accelerated or oscillating charge.
Ans. (b, d)
Here, in option (b) charge is moving in a circular orbit.
In circular motion, the direction of the motion of charge is changing continuously, thus it is
an accelerated motion and this option is correct.
Also, we know that a charge starts accelerating when it falls in an electric field.
Q. 13 An EM wave of intensity I falls on a surface kept in vacuum and exerts

radiation pressure p on it. Which of the following are true?
I
(a) Radiation pressure is if the wave is totally absorbed
c
I
(b) Radiation pressure is if the wave is totally reflected
c
2I
(c) Radiation pressure is if the wave is totally reflected
c
I 2I
(d) Radiation pressure is in the range < p < for real surfaces
c c
Ans. (a, c, d)
Radiation pressure ( p) is the force exerted by electromagnetic wave on unit area of the
surface, i.e., rate of change of momentum per unit area of the surface.
Momentum per unit time per unit area
Intensity I
= =
Speed of wave c
∆I
Change in momentum per unit time per unit area = = radiation pressure ( p )
c
∆I
i.e., p=
c
I
Momentum of incident wave per unit time per unit area =
c
When wave is fully absorbed by the surface, the momentum of the reflected wave per unit
time per unit area = 0.
∆I I I
Radiation pressure ( p) = change in momentum per unit time per unit area = = −0= .
c c c
When wave is totally reflected, then momentum of the reflected wave per unit time per unit
area = − , Radiation pressure p = −  −  = .
I I I 2I
c c  c c
I 2I
Here, p lies between and .
c c

Q. 14 Why is the orientation of the portable radio with respect to broadcasting
station important?
Ans. The orientation of the portable radio with respect to broadcasting station is important
because the electromagnetic waves are plane polarised, so the receiving antenna should
be parallel to the vibration of the electric or magnetic field of the wave.
Q. 15 Why does microwave oven heats up a food item containing water

molecules most efficiently?
Ans. Microwave oven heats up the food items containing water molecules most efficiently
because the frequency of microwaves matches the resonant frequency of water molecules.
Q. 16 The charge on a parallel plate capacitor varies as q = q 0 cos 2πvt. The

plates are very large and close together (area = A, separation = d).
Neglecting the edge effects, find the displacement current through the
capacitor.
Ans. The displacement current through the capacitor is,
dq
Id = Ic = …(i)
dt
Here, q = q 0 cos 2 πvt (given)
Putting this value in Eq (i), we get
Id = Ic = − q 0 sin2 πvt × 2 πv
Id = Ic = − 2 πvq 0 sin2 πvt
Q. 17A variable frequency AC source is connected to a capacitor. How will the

displacement current change with decrease in frequency?
K Thinking Process
1
Capacities reactance X c is inversely proportional to the displacement current i.e., X c ∝ .
I
1
Ans. Capacitive reaction Xc = ,
2 πfC
1
∴ Xc ∝
f
As frequency decreases, Xc increases and the conduction current is inversely proportional
 1
to Xc Q I ∝ .
 Xc 
So, displacement current decreases as the conduction current is equal to the displacement
current.
Q. 18 The magnetic field of a beam emerging from a filter facing a floodlight is

given by
B 0 = 12 × 10 −8 sin(1 . 20 × 10 7 z − 3 . 60 × 10 15 t) T.
What is the average intensity of the beam?
Ans. Magnetic field B = B0 sinωt
Given, equation B = 12 × 10−8 sin(120
. × 107 z − 3.60 × 1015 t ) T.
On comparing this equation with standard equation, we get
B0 = 12 × 10−8
1 B02 1 (12 × 10−8 )2 × 3 × 108
The average intensity of the beam Iav = ⋅c = ×
2 µ0 2 4 π × 10−7
= 1.71 W/m 2
Q. 19Poynting vectors S is defined as a vector whose magnitude is equal to the

wave intensity and whose direction is along the direction of wave
1
propogation. Mathematically, it is given by S = E × B. Show the
µo
nature of S versus t graph.
Ans. Consider and electromagnetic waves, let E be varying along y-axis, B is along z-axis and
propagation of wave be along x-axis. Then E × B will tell the direction of propagation of
energy flow in electromegnetic wave, along x-axis.
Let E = Eo sin(ωt − kx )$j
B = B sin(ωt − kx ) k$
o
1 1
S= (E × B) = Eo Bo sin2 (ωt − kx )[$j × k$ ]
µo µo
Eo Bo
= sin2 (ωt − kx ) $i
µo
The variation of|S| with time t will be as given in the figure below
T = 2π/ω
S
S
t
Bz Ey
Q. 20 Professor CV Raman surprised his students by suspending freely a tiny

light ball in a transparent vacuum chamber by shining a laser beam on
it. Which property of EM waves was he exhibiting? Give one more
example of this property.
Ans. An electromagnetic wave carries energy and momentum like other waves.
Since, it carries momentum, an electromagnetic wave also exerts pressure called radiation
pressure. This property of electromagnetic waves helped professor CV Raman surprised his
students by suspending freely a tiny light ball in a transparent vacuum chamber by shining a
laser beam on it. The tails of the camets are also due to radiation pressure.

Q. 21Show that the magnetic field B at a point in between the plates of a
µ ε r dE
parallel plate capacitor during charging is o o (symbols having
2 dt
usual meaning).
Id
I
Ans. Consider the figure ginen below to prove that the magneti field B at a point in between the
ε µ r dE
plater of a paravel- plate copocior during charging is 0 0
2 dt
Id
I
Let Id be the displacement current in the region between two plates of parallel plate
capacitor, in the figure.
The magnetic field induction at a point in a region between two plates of capacitor at a
perpendicular distance r from the axis of plates is
µ 2I µ µ dφE Q I = E0d φE 
B = 0 d = 0 Id = 0 × ε0
4 πr 2 πr 2 πr dt  d dt 
µ 0 ε0 d µ ε dE
= (Eπr 2 ) = 0 0 πr 2
2 πr dt 2 πr dt
µ 0 ε0 r dE
B= [Q φE = Eπr 2 ]
2 dt
Q. 22 Electromagnetic waves with wavelength

(i) λ 1 is used in satellite communication.
(ii) λ 2 is used to kill germs in water purifies.
(iii) λ 3 is used to detect leakage of oil in underground pipelines.
(iv) λ 4 is used to improve visibility in runways during fog and mist
conditions.
(a) Identify and name the part of electromagnetic spectrum to which these
radiations belong.
(b) Arrange these wavelengths in ascending order of their magnitude.
(c) Write one more application of each.
Ans. (a) (i) Microwave is used in satellite communications.

So, λ1 is the wavelength of microwave.
(ii) Ultraviolet rays are used to kill germs in water purifier. So, λ 2 is the wavelength of UV
rays.
(iii) X-rays are used to detect leakage of oil in underground pipelines. So, λ 3 is the
wavelength of X-rays.
(iv) Infrared is used to improve visibility on runways during fog and mist conditions. So,
it is the wavelength of infrared waves.
(b) Wavelength of X-rays < wavelength of UV < wavelength of infrared < wavelength of
microwave.
⇒ λ 3 < λ 2 < λ 4 < λ1
(c) (i) Microwave is used in radar.
(ii) UV is used in LASIK eye surgery.
(iii) X-ray is used to detect a fracture in bones.
(iv) Infrared is used in optical communication.
Q. 23 Show that average value of radiant flux density S over a single period T
1
is given by S = E 20 .
2c µ 0
1  1 
Ans. Radiant flux density S = (E × B) = c 2 εo (E × B) Q c = 
µ0  µ 0 ε0 
Suppose electromagnetic waves be propagating along x-axis. The electric field vector of
electromagnetic wave be along y-axis and magnetic field vector be along z-axis. Therefore,
E 0 = E 0 cos(k x − ωt )
and B = B0 cos(kx − ωt )
E × B = (E 0 × B0 )cos 2 (kx − ωt )
S = c2 εo (E × B)
= c 2 ε0 (Eo × Bo )cos 2 (kx − ωt )
Average value of the magnitude of radiant flux density over complete cycle is
1 T
Sav = c 2 εο |E 0 × B0| ∫ cos 2 (kx − ωt )dt
T o
1 T Q Tcos 2 (kx − ωt )dt = T 
 ∫o
= c 2 ε0 E0 B0 × ×
T 2 2 
2  E 
ε0 E0  0 
c E
⇒ Sav =  As, c = 0 
2  c   B0 
c c 1  1 1 
= ε0 E02 = × 2 E02 c = or ε0 = 2 
2 2 c µ0  µ 0 ε0 c µ0 
E02
⇒ Sav = Hence proved.
2µ 0c
Q. 24 You are given a 2µF parallel plate capacitor. How would you establish an
instantaneous displacement current of 1 mA in the space between its
plates?
Ans. Given, capacitance of capacitor C = 2µF,
Displacement current Id = 1mA
Charge q = CV
Id dt = CdV [Qq = it ]
dV
or Id = C
dt
dV
1 × 10−3 = 2 × 10−6 ×
dt
dV 1
or = × 10+3 = 500 V/s
dt 2
So, by applying a varying potential difference of 500 V/s, we would produce a displacement
current of desired value.
Q. 25 Show that the radiation pressure exerted by an EM wave of intensity I on

I
a surface kept in vacuum is .
C
Force F
Ans. Pressure = =
Area A
Force is the rate of change of momentum
dp
i.e., F=
dt
U
Energy in time dt, U = p ⋅ C or p =
c
1 U
∴ Pressure = ⋅
A C ⋅ dt
Pressure =
I Q I = Intensity = U 
C  A ⋅ dt 
Q. 26What happens to the intensity of light from a bulb if the distance from
the bulb is doubled? As a laser beam travels across the length of room,
its intensity essentially remain constant.
What geometrical characteristic of LASER beam is responsible for the
constant intensity which is missing in the case of light from the bulb?
Ans. As the distance is doubled, the area of spherical region (4 πr 2 ) will become four times, so
the intensity becomes one fourth the initial value Q I ∝ 2  but in case of laser it does not
1
 r 
spread, so its intensity remain same.
Geometrical characteristic of LASER beam which is responsible for the constant intensity are
as following
(i) Unidirection (ii) Monochromatic
(iii) Coherent light (iv) Highly collimated
These characteristic are missing in the case of light from the bulb.
Q. 27 Even though an electric field E exer ts a force qE on a charged particle

yet electric field of an EM wave does not contribute to the radiation
pressure (but transfers energy). Explain.
Ans. Since, electric field of an EM wave is an oscillating field and so is the electric force caused
by it on a charged particle. This electric force averaged over an integral number of cycles is
zero, since its direction changes every half cycle.
Hence, electric field is not responsible for radiation pressure.

Q. 28 An infinitely long thin wire carrying a uniform linear static charge
density λ is placed along the z-axis (figure). The wire is set into motion
along its length with a uniform velocity v = vk$ z . Calculate the pointing
1
vector S = (E × B).
µ0
a
x
V
λe$ s $
Ans. Given, E= j
2 πε0 a
µ i µ λv $
B = 0 $i = 0 i [Q I = λ V ]
2 πa 2 πa
1 1  λ $j µ 
∴ S = [E × B] =  × 0 λ $i 
µ0 µ 0  2 πε0 a 2 πa 
λv2
λV $
2
= ($j × $i ) = − k
4 π 2 ε0 a 2 4 π 2 ε0 a 2
Q. 29Sea water at frequency v = 4 × 10 8 Hz has permittivity ε ≈ 80 ε 0 ,

permeability µ ≈ µ 0 and resistivity ρ = 0.25 m. Imagine a parallel plate
capacitor immersed in sea water and driven by an alternating voltage
source V (t) = V0 sin(2π vt). What fraction of the conduction
current density is the displacement current density?
K Thinking Process
The conduction current density is given by the Ohm’s law = Electric field between the
plates.
Ans. Suppose distance between the parallel plates is d and applied voltage V( t ) = V0 2 πvt .
Thus, electric field
V
E = 0 sin(2 πvt )
d
1 V0
Now using Ohm’s law, Jc = sin(2 πvt )
ρd
V
⇒ = 0 sin(2 πvt ) = J c0sin2 πvt
ρd
V
Here, J c0 = 0
ρd
Now the displacement current density is given as
δE εδ  V0 sin(2 πvt )
Jd = ε =
dt dt  d 
ε2 πvV0
= cos(2 πvt )
d
⇒ = Jd0 cos(2 πvt )
2 πVεV0
where, J d0 =
d
J d0 2 πvεV0 ρd
⇒ = ⋅ = 2 πvερ
J c0 d V0
= 2 π × 80ε0 v × 0.25 = 4 πε0 v × 10
10v 4
= =
9 × 109 9
Q. 30A long straight cable of length l is placed symmetrically along z-axis and
has radius a(<< l ). The cable consists of a thin wire and a co-axial
conducting tube. An alternating current I (t) = I 0 sin(2πvt) flows down
the central thin wire and returns along the co-axial conducting tube. The
induced electric field at a distance s from the wire inside the cable is
 s $
E (s , t) = µ 0 I 0 v cos(2πvt) ln   k.
 a
(i) Calculate the displacement current density inside the cable.
(ii) Integrate the displacement current density across the cross-section of
the cable to find the total displacement current I d .
(iii) Compare the conduction current I 0 with the displacement current I 0d .
K Thinking Process
Displacement current density
dE
Jd = ε 0
dt
Ans. (i) Given, the induced electric field at a distance r from the wire inside the cable is
E (s,t ) = µ 0 I 0 v cos(2 πvt )ln   k$
s
 a
Now, displacement current density,
 s 
µ I v cos(2 πvt )ln   k$
dE d
Jd = ε0 = ε0
dt dt  0 0  a  
[cos 2 πvt ]ln   k$

d s
= ε0µ 0 I 0 v
dt  a
= 2 I 0 v 2 2 π[− sin2 πvt ] ln   k$

1 s
c  a
v2
= 2 2 πI 0 sin2 πvt ln   k$ Q l s = − l
a a
c  s  4 a 4
s 
= 2 2 πI 0 ln  sin2 πvt k$
1 a
λ  s
2 πI 0 a
= ln sin2 πvt k$
λ2 s
a 2π a
(ii) Id = ∫ Jd sdsdθ = ∫ s= 0 Jd sds∫0 dθ = ∫ s= 0 Jd sds × 2 π
a 2 π  a 
= ∫ s= 0  λ2 I0 loge  s  sds sin 2 πvt  × 2 π
2
2π
= 
a  a
 λ  0 ∫ s= 0  s 
 I   sds sin 2 πvt
2
2π
=  ln  d (s 2 ).sin 2 πvt
a a 1
 λ  0 ∫ s= 0  s  2
⇒  I
2 2
a2  2 π  a  a  s 
=   I 0 sin 2 πvt ∫ s= 0 ln   ⋅ d  
2 λ   s   a
2 2 2
a2  2 π  a  a  s
=   I 0 sin 2 πvt ∫ s= 0 ln   ⋅ d  
4  λ   s  a
2 2 2
a2  2 π  a  s  s
=−   I 0 sin 2 πvt ∫ s= 0 ln   ⋅ d  
4  λ   a  a
a2  2 π 
2  a 2
 s  s
2 
=−   I 0 sin 2 πvt × (−1) Q ∫ s= 0 ln   d   = − 1
4  λ    a   a  
2
a2  2 π 
∴ Id =   I 0 sin 2 πvt
4  λ 
2
2 πa 
⇒ =   I sin 2 πvt
 2λ  0
(iii) The displacement current,
2
2 πa 
Id =   I sin 2 πvt = I 0d sin 2 πvt
 2λ  0
2 2
2 πa   aπ 
Here, I 0d =   I =  I
 2λ  0  λ  0
2
aπ
=  
I 0d
∴
I0  λ
Q. 31A plane EM wave travelling in vacuum along z-direction is given by

E = E 0 sin(kz − ωt) $i and B = B 0 sin(kz − ωt) $j.
(i) Evaluate ∫ E ⋅ dl over the rectangular loop 1234 shown in figure.
(ii) Evaluate ∫ B ⋅ ds over the surface bounded by loop 1234.

−dφ B E
(iii) Use equation ∫ E ⋅ dl = to prove 0 = c.
dt B0
(iv) By using similar process and the equation
dφ E 1
∫ B ⋅ dl = µ 0 I + ε 0 dt , prove that c = µ ε
0 0
x
4 3
z
1 2
Ans. (i) Consider the figure given below

x
E =Ex^i 4 E 3
dl
h dl E E dl
1 E 2
z
z1 dl z2
B =B0^
j
y
During the propagation of electromagnetic wave a long z-axis, let electric field vector (E )
be along x-axis and magnetic field vector B along y-axis, i.e., E = E0 $i and B = B0 $j.
Line integral of E over the closed rectangular path 1234 in x - z plane of the figure
2 3 4 1
∫ E ⋅ dl = ∫1 E ⋅ dl + ∫2E ⋅ dl + ∫3E ⋅ dl + ∫4E ⋅ dl
2 3 4 1
= ∫ E ⋅ dlcos 90 + ∫ E ⋅ dlcos 0 + ∫ E ⋅ dlcos 90 + ∫ E ⋅ dlcos180°
1 2 3 4
= E0 h[sin(kz2 − ωt ) − sin(kz1 − gωt )]
(ii) For evaluating ∫ B ⋅ ds, let us consider the rectangle 1234 to be made of strips of are
ds = hdz each.
Z2
∫ B ⋅ ds = ∫ B ⋅ ds cos 0 = ∫ B ⋅ ds = ∫Z 1
B0 sin(kz − ωt )hdz
− B0 h
= [cos(kz2 − ωt ) − cos(kz1 − ωt )]
k
x
4 3
B
h dl
1 ds 2
z
z1 dz z2
B = B0 j
y
−dφB d
(iii) Given, ∫ E ⋅ dl = = − ∫ B ⋅ ds
dt dt
Putting the values from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
E0 h[sin(kz2 − ωt ) − sin(kz1 − ωt )]
−d  By h 
= {cos(kz2 − ωt ) − cos(kz1 − ωt )
dt  k 
By h
= ω[sin(kz2 − ωt ) − sin(kz1 − ωt )]
k
Bω Q ω = c 
⇒ E0 = 0 = By c  
k  k 
E0
⇒ =c
B0
(iv) For evaluating ∫ B ⋅ dl, let us consider a loop 1234 in y - z plane as shown in figure given
below
x
E = Ex i
1 dl 4
z
B
B = B0 j dl B B dl
dl
y 2 3
B
2 3 4 1
∫ B ⋅ dl = ∫1 B ⋅ dl + ∫2 B ⋅ dl + ∫3 B ⋅ dl + ∫4 B ⋅ dl
2 3 4 1
= ∫1 B ⋅ dlcos 0 + ∫2 B ⋅ dlcos 90° + ∫3 B ⋅ dlcos180°+ ∫4 B ⋅dlcos 90°
= B0 h[sin(kz1 − ωt ) − sin(kz2 − ωt ) …(iii)
Now to evaluate φ E = ∫ E ⋅ ds, let us consider the rectangle 1234 to be made of strips of
area hd 2 each.
x
E = Ex^
i
1 z1 dz z2
z
4
B = B0^
j ds h
dl
y 2 3
B
z 2
φE = ∫ E ⋅ ds = ∫ Eds cos 0 = ∫ Eds = ∫z E0 sin(kz1 − ωt )hdz
1
E0 h
=− [cos(kz2 − ωt ) − cos(kz1 − ωt )]
k
dφE E0 hω
∴ = [sin(kz1 − ωt ) − sin(kz2 − ωt )] …(iv)
dt k
 εo dφ 
In ∫ B ⋅ dl = µ 0  I + dt E , I = conduction current
= 0 in vacuum
dφ
∴ ∫ B ⋅ dl = µ 0 ε dtE
Using relations obtained in Eqs. (iii) and (iv) and simplifying, we get
ωµ 0 ε0
B0 = E0
k
E0 ω 1
⇒ =
B0 k µ 0 ε0
E0
But = c and ω = ck
B0
1 1
⇒ c ⋅c = , therefore c =
µ 0 ε0 µ 0 ε0
Q. 32 A plane EM wave travelling along z-direction is described by

E = E 0 sin(kz − ωt) $i and B = B 0 sin(kz − ωt) $j. Show that
(i) the average energy density of the wave is given by
1 1 B 20
uav = ε 0 E 02 +
4 4 µ0
(ii) the time averaged intensity of the wave is given by
1
I av = cε o E 20 .
2
Ans. (i) The electromagnetic wave carry energy which is due to electric field vector and
magnetic field vector. In electromagnetic wave, E and B vary from point to point and
from moment to moment. Let E and B be their time averages.
The energy density due to electric field E is

1
u E = ε0 E 2
2
The energy density due to magnetic field B is
1 B2
uB =
2 µ0
Total average energy density of electromagnetic wave
1 1 B2
u av = u E + u B = ε0 E 2 +
2 2 µ0
Let the EM wave be propagating along z-direction. The electric field vector and magnetic
field vector be represented by
E = E0 sin(kz − ωt )
B = B0 sin(kz − ωt )
E2
The time average value of E 2 over complete cycle = 0
2
B02
and time average value of B over complete cycle =
2
2
1 εo E02 1  B02 
uav = + µ 0  
2 2 2  2 
1E B2
= εo E02 + 0
4 4µ 0
1
(ii) We know that E0 = cB0 and c =
µ 0 ε0
1 B02 1 E02 / c 2 E2 1
∴ = = 0 × µ 0 ε0 = ε0 E02
4µ0 4 µ0 4µ 0 4
∴ uB = uE
1 1 B02
Hence, uav = ε0 E02 +
4 4µ0
1 1
= ε0 E0 + ε0 E02
2
4 4
1 1 B02
= ε0 E 0 =
2
2 2 µ0
Time average intensity of the wave
1 1
Iav = uavc = ε0 E02c = ε0 E02
2 2
9
Ray Optics and Optical
Instruments
Q. 1 A ray of light incident at an angle θ on a refracting face of a prism
emerges from the other face normally. If the angle of the prism is 5° and
the prism is made of a material of refractive index 1.5, the angle of
incidence is
(a) 7.5° (b) 5° (c) 15° (d) 2.5°
K Thinking Process
The ray refractive by first surface falls normally on second surface , in order to emerges
from the other face normally.
Ans. (a) Since, deviation δ = (µ − 1) A = (15
. − 1) × 5° = 2.5°
By geometry, angle of refraction by first surface is 5°.
But δ = θ − r , so, we have, 2.5° = θ − 5° on solving θ = 7.5°.
Q. 2 A short pulse of white light is incident from air to a glass slab at normal
incidence. After travelling through the slab, the first colour to emerge is
(a) blue (b) green (c) violet (d) red
K Thinking Process
When light ray goes from one medium to other medium, the frequency of light remains
unchanged.
Ans. (d) Since v ∝ λ, the light of red colour is of highest wavelength and therefore of highest
speed. Therefore, after travelling through the slab, the red colour emerge first.
Q. 3 An object approaches a convergent lens from the left of the lens with a
uniform speed 5 m/s and stops at the focus. The image
(a) moves away from the lens with an uniform speed 5 m/s
(b) moves away from the lens with an uniform acceleration
(c) moves away from the lens with a non-uniform acceleration
(d) moves towards the lens with a non-uniform acceleration
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments 147
K Thinking Process
This problem has link with the formation of image when object is at different positions.
Ans. (c) When an object approaches a convergent lens from the left of the lens with a uniform
speed of 5 m/s, the image away from the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.
Q. 4 A passenger in an aeroplane shall

(a) never see a rainbow
(b) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric circles
(c) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric arcs
(d) shall never see a secondary rainbow
Ans. (b) A passenger in an aeroplane may see a primary and a secondary rainbow like
concentric circles.
Q. 5 You are given four sources of light each one providing a light of a single
colour - red, blue, green and yellow. Suppose the angle of refraction for
a beam of yellow light corresponding to a particular angle of incidence
at the interface of two media is 90°. Which of the following statements
is correct if the source of yellow light is replaced with that of other
lights without changing the angle of incidence?
(a) The beam of red light would undergo total internal reflection
(b) The beam of red light would bend towards normal while it gets refracted
through the second medium
(c) The beam of blue light would undergo total internal reflection
(d) The beam of green light would bend away from the normal as it gets refracted
through the second medium
K Thinking Process
This problem is based on the critical angle of total internal reflection.
Ans. (c) According to VIBGYOR, among all given sources of light, the blue light have smallest
wavelength.According to Cauchy relationship, smaller the wavelength higher the
refractive index and consequently smaller the critical angle.
So, corresponding to blue colour, the critical angle is least which facilitates total internal
reflection for the beam of blue light. The beam of green light would also undergo total
internal reflection.
Q. 6 The radius of curvature of the curved surface of a plano-convex lens is

20 cm. If the refractive index of the material of the lens be 1.5, it will
(a) act as a convex lens only for the objects that lie on its curved side
(b) act as a concave lens for the objects that lie on its curved side
(c) act as a convex lens irrespective of the side on which the object lies
(d) act as a concave lens irrespective of side on which the object lies
K Thinking Process
R
By lens maker’s formula for plano-convex lens, focal length is given by f = . This is
µ −1
always positive for µ >1 or optically denser medium of material of lens placed in air.
Ans. (c) R 20
Here, R = 20cm, µ = 15
. , on substituting the values in f = = = 40 cm of
µ − 1 15 . −1
converging nature as f>0. Therefore, lens act as a convex lens irrespective of the side
on which the object lies.
Q. 7 The phenomena involved in the reflection of radiowaves by ionosphere is

similar to
(a) reflection of light by a plane mirror
(b) total internal reflection of light in air during a mirage
(c) dispersion of light by water molecules during the formation of a rainbow
(d) scattering of light by the particles of air
Ans. (b) The phenomenon involved in the reflection of radiowaves by ionosphere is similar to
total internal reflection of light in air during a mirage i.e., angle of incidence is greater
than critical angle.
Q. 8 The direction of ray of light incident on a concave mirror is shown by PQ

while directions in which the ray would travel after reflection is shown
by four rays marked 1, 2, 3 and 4 (figure). Which of the four rays
correctly shows the direction of reflected ray?
1
2 Q
4
C F
3 P
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

Ans. (b) The PQ ray of light passes through focus F and incident on the concave mirror, after
reflection, should become parallel to the principal axis and shown by ray-2 in the
figure.
Q. 9 The optical density of turpentine is higher than that of water while its
mass density is lower. Figure shows a layer of turpentine floating over
water in a container. For which one of the four rays incident on
turpentine in figure, the path shown is correct?
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
1 2 3 4
K Thinking Process
When a light ray goes from (optically) rarer medium to (optically) denser medium, then
it bends towards the normal i.e., i>r and vice-versa.
Ans. (b) Here, light ray goes from (optically) rarer medium air to optically denser terpentine,
then it bends towards the normal i.e., i>r whereas when it goes from to optically
denser medium terpentine to rarer medium water. then it bends away the normal i.e.,
i<r.
Q. 10A car is moving with at a constant speed of 60 km h−1 on a straight road.

Looking at the rear view mirror, the driver finds that the car
following him is at a distance of 100 m and is approaching with a speed
of 5 kmh−1 .
In order to keep track of the car in the rear, the driver begins to glance
alternatively at the rear and side mirror of his car after every 2 s till the
other car overtakes. If the two cars were maintaining their speeds,
which of the following statement (s) is/are correct?
(a) The speed of the car in the rear is 65 km h −1
(b) In the side mirror, the car in the rear would appear to approach with a speed of
5 kmh −1 to the driver of the leading car
(c) In the rear view mirror, the speed of the approaching car would appear to
decrease as the distance between the cars decreases
(d) In the side mirror, the speed of the approaching car would appear to increase as
the distance between the cars decreases
K Thinking Process
The image formed by convex mirror does not depend on the relative position of object
w.r.t. mirror.
Ans. (d) The speed of the image of the car would appear to increase as the distance between
the cars decreases.
Q. 11There are certain material developed in laboratories which have a

negative refractive index figure. A ray incident from air (Medium 1) into
such a medium (Medium 2) shall follow a path given by
i
i 1 1
(a) (b)
r
r 2 2
i r 1 1
(c) (d)
2 2
Ans. (a) The negative refractive index metamaterials are those in which incident ray from air
(Medium 1) to them refract or bend differently to that of positive refractive index
medium.

Q. 12Consider an extended object immersed in water contained in a plane
trough. When seen from close to the edge of the trough the object looks
distorted because
(a) the apparent depth of the points close to the edge are nearer the surface of the
water compared to the points away from the edge
(b) the angle subtended by the image of the object at the eye is smaller than the
actual angle subtended by the object in air
(c) some of the points of the object far away from the edge may not be visible
because of total internal reflection
(d) water in a trough acts as a lens and magnifies the object
K Thinking Process
This problem is based on the phenomenon of reflection when it goes from denser to rare
medium.
Ans. (a, b, c)
When immersed object is seen from close to the edge of the trough the object looks
distorted because the apparent depth of the points close to the edge are nearer the surface
of the water compared to the points away from the edge.
The angle subtended by the image of the object at the eye is smaller than the actual angle
subtended by the object in air and some of the points of the object far away from the edge
may not be visible because of total internal reflection.
Q. 13A rectangular block of glass ABCD has a refractive index 1.6. A pin is
placed midway on the face AB figure. When observed from the face AD,
the pin shall A B
(a) appear to be near A

(b) appear to be near D
(c) appear to be at the centre of AD
(d) not be seen at all
D C
K Thinking Process
This problem is associated with the phenomenon of total internal reflection.
Ans. (d) For µ = 16. , the critical angle,µ = 1/ sin C, we have C = 387 . °, when viewed from AD, as
long as angle of incidence on AD of the ray emanating from pin is greater than the critical
angle , the light suffers from total internal reflection and cannot be seen through AD.
Q. 14Between the primary and secondary rainbows, there is a dark band known
as Alexandar’s dark band. This is because
(a) light scattered into this region interfere destructively
(b) there is no light scattered into this region
(c) light is absorbed in this region
(d) angle made at the eye by the scattered rays with respect to the incident light of
the sun lies between approximately 42° and 50°
Ans. (a, d)
Alexandar’s dark band lies between the primary and secondary rainbows, forms due to light
scattered into this region interfere destructively.
Since, primary rainbows subtends an angle nearly 41° to 42° at observer's eye, whereas,
secondary rainbows subtends an angle nearly 51° to 54° at observer’s eye w.r.t. incident
light ray.
So, the scattered rays with respect to the incident light of the sun lies between approximately
42° and 50°.
Q. 15A magnifying glass is used, as the object to be viewed can be brought

closer to the eye than the normal near point. This results in
(a) a larger angle to be subtended by the object at the eye and hence, viewed in
greater detail
(b) the formation of a virtual erect image
(c) increase in the field of view
(d) infinite magnification at the near point
K Thinking Process
The problems is about the case when an object is placed between optical centre and
focus of the convergent (magnifying) lens.
Ans. (a, b)
A magnifying glass is used, as the object to be viewed can be brought closer to the eye than
the normal near point. This results in a larger angle to be subtended by the object at the eye
and hence, viewed in greater detail. Morever, the formation of a virtual erect and enlarged
image, takes place.
Q. 16 An astronomical refractive telescope has an objective of focal length

20m and an eyepiece of focal length 2 cm.
(a) The length of the telescope tube is 20.02 m
(b) The magnification is 1000
(c) The image formed is inverted
(d) An objective of a larger aperture will increase the brightness and reduce
chromatic aberration of the image
K Thinking Process
The magnifying power m is the ratio of the angle β subtended at the eye by the final
image to the angle α which the object subtends at the lens or the eye. Hence, in normal
adjustment
β h fo fo
m≈ ≈ =
α fe h fe
In this case, the length of the telescope tube is fo + fe .
Ans. (a, b, c)
The length of the telescope tube is fo + fe = 20 + (0.02 ) = 20.02 m
Also, m = 20 / 0.02 = 1000
Also, the image formed is inverted .

Q. 17 Will the focal length of a lens for red light be more, same or less than
that for blue light?
Ans. As the refractive index for red is less than that for blue, parallel beams of light incident on a
lens will be bent more towards the axis for blue light compared to red.
In other words, µ b > µ r
By lens maker’s formula ,
1  1 1 
= (n21 − 1)  − 
f  R1 R 2 
Therefore, fb < fr .
Thus, the focal length for blue light will be smaller than that for red.
Q. 18The near vision of an average person is 25 cm. To view an object with an

angular magnification of 10, what should be the power of the
microscope?
Ans. The least distance of distinct vision of an average person
(i.e., D ) is 25cm, in order to view an object with magnification 10,
Here, v = D = 25 cm and u = f
But the magnification m = v / u = D / f
D
m=
f
D 25
⇒ f= = = 2.5 = 0.025 m
m 10
1
P= = 40 D
0.025
This is the required power of lens .
Q. 19An unsymmetrical double convex thin lens forms the image of a point
object on its axis. Will the position of the image change if the lens is
reversed?
K Thinking Process
One lens have unique focal length irrespective of its face or geometry taken for use.
Ans. No, the reversibility of the lens maker’s equation.
Q. 20 Three immiscible liquids of densities d 1 > d 2 > d 3 and refractive indices

h
µ 1 > µ 2 > µ 3 are put in a beaker. The height of each liquid column is.
3
A dot is made at the bottom of the beaker. For near normal vision, find
the apparent depth of the dot.
K Thinking Process
The image formed by first medium act as an object for second medium .
Ans. Let the apparent depth be O1 for the object seen from m2 , then
µ h
O1 = 2
µ1 3
Since, apparent depth = real depth /refractive index µ.

Since, the image formed by Medium 1, O2 act as an object for Medium 2.
If seen from µ 3 , the apparent depth is O2 .
Similarly, the image formed by Medium 2 , O2 act as an object for Medium 3
µ
O2 = 3  + O1 
h
µ2  3 
µ 3  h µ 2 h h  µ 3 µ 2 
=  +  =  + 
µ 2  3 µ1 3  3  µ 2 µ1 
Seen from outside, the apparent height is
1 h  1 h h µ3 µ3 
O3 =  + O2  = +  + 
µ3  3  µ 3  3 3  µ 2 µ1  
h 1 1 1
=  + + 
3  µ1 µ 2 µ 3 
This is the required expression of apparent depth.
Q. 21 For a glass prism (µ = 3), the angle of minimum deviation is equal to

the angle of the prism. Find the angle of the prism.
Ans. The relationship between refractive index, prism angle A and angle of minimum deviation is
given by
( A + Dm )
sin 
 2 
µ=

sin 
A
2
Here,
∴Given, Dm = A
Substituting the value, we have
sin A
∴ µ=
A
sin
2
A A
2 sin cos
On solving, we have = 2 2 = 2 cos A
A 2
sin
2
A A
2 sin cos
sin A 2 2 A
∴ µ= = = 2 cos
A A 2
sin sin
2 2
For the given value of refractive index,
we have
A 3
∴ cos =
2 2
A
or = 30°
2
∴ A = 60°
This is the required value of prism angle.
Q. 22A short object of length L is placed along the principal axis of a concave
mirror away from focus. The object distance is u. If the mirror has a focal
length f , what will be the length of the image? You may take
L < < | v − f |.
K Thinking Process
The length of image is the separation between the images formed by mirror of the
extremities of object.
Ans. Since, the object distance is u. Let us consider the two ends of the object be at distance
u1 = u − L / 2 and u 2 = u + L / 2, respectively so that|u1 − u 2| = L. Let the image of the two
ends be formed at v1 and v 2 , respectively so that the image length would be
L′ = |v1 − v 2| ... (i)
Applying mirror formula, we have
1 1 1 fu
+ = or v =
u v f u−f
On solving, the positions of two images are given by
f (u − L / 2 ) f(u + L / 2 )
v1 = , v2 =
u − f − L /2 u − f + L /2
For length, substituting the value in (i), we have
f 2L
L ′ = |v1 − v 2| =
(u − f )2 × L2 / 4
Since, the object is short and kept away from focus, we have
L2 / 4 < < (u − f )2
f2
Hence, finally L′ = L
(u − f )2
This is the required expression of length of image.
Q. 23A circular disc of radius R is placed co-axially and horizontally inside an

opaque hemispherical bowl of radius a figure. The far edge of the disc is
just visible when viewed from the edge of the bowl. The bowl is filled
with transparent liquid of refractive index µ and the near edge of the
disc becomes just visible. How far below the top of the bowl is the disc
placed?
α
a O a M
d α
i
α
90–
A R C R B
K Thinking Process
This problem involves the wide application of geometry and Snell’s law.
Ans. Refering to the figure, AM is the direction of incidence ray before liquid is filled. After liquid
is filled in , BM is the direction of the incident ray. Refracted ray in both cases is same as
that along AM.
Let the disc is separated by O at a distance d as shown in figure. Also, considering angle
α
a O a M
d α
i
α
90–
N
A R C R B
N = 90°, OM = a, CB = NB = a − R, AN = a + R
Here, in figure
a−R
sin t =
d + (a − R )2
2
a+ R
and sin α = cos(90 − α) =
d 2 + (a + R )2
But on applying Snell’s law,
1 sin t sin t
= =
µ sin r sin α
On substituting the values, we have the separation
µ ( a2 − b 2 )
d=
(a + r )2 − µ (a − r )2
Q. 24 A thin convex lens of focal length 25 cm is cut into two pieces 0.5cm
above the principal axis. The top part is placed at (0,0) and an object
placed at (– 50 cm, 0). Find the coordinates of the image.
K Thinking Process
There is no effect on the focal length of the lens if it is cut as given in the question.
50.0
0.5
O O′
Ans. If there was no cut, then the object would have been at a height of 0.5 cm from the
principal axis OO’.
Applying lens formula , we have
1 1 1
− =
v u f
1 1 1 1 1 1
∴ = + = + =
v u f − 50 25 50
∴ v = 50 cm
v 50
Mangnification is m = =− = −1
u 50
Thus, the image would have been formed at 50 cm from the pole and 0.5 cm below the
principal axis. Hence, with respect to the X-axis passing through the edge of the cut lens, the
coordinates of the image are (50 cm, –1 cm ).
Q. 25 In many experimental set-ups, the source and screen are fixed at a

distance say D and the lens is movable. Show that there are two
positions for the lens for which an image is formed on the screen. Find
the distance between these points and the ratio of the image sizes for
these two points.
K Thinking Process
This is also one of the methods for finding the focal length of the lens in laboratory and
known as displacement method.
Ans. Principal of reversibility is states that the position of object and image are interchangeable.
So, by the versibility of u and v, as seen from the formula for lens.
1 1 1
= −
f v u
It is clear that there are two positions for which there shall be an image.
On the screen, let the first position be when the lens is at O. Finding u and v and substituting
in lens formula.
Given, −u + v = D
⇒ u = − (D − v )
Placing it in the lens formula
1 1 1
+ =
D−v v f
On solving, we have
v + D−v 1
⇒ =
(D − v )v f
⇒ v 2 − Dv + Df = 0
D D2 − 4Df
⇒ v= ±
2 2
Hence, finding u
D D2 − 4Df 
u = − (D − v ) = −  ±
2 2 
 
u O u
D D2 − 4Df
When, the object distance is +
2 2
D D − 4Df
2
the image forms at −
2 2
Similarly, when the object distance is
D D2 − 4Df
−
2 2
D D2 − 4Df
The image forms at +
2 2
The distance between the poles for these two object distance is
D D2 − 4Df D D2 − 4Df 
+ − − = D2 − 4Df
2 2 2 2 
 
Let d = D2 − 4Df
D d D d
If u = + , then the image is at v = − .
2 2 2 2
D−d
∴ The magnification m1 =
D+d
D−d D+d
If u = , then v =
2 2
D+d
∴ The magnification m2 =
D−d
2
m2  D + d 
Thus, = .
m1  D − d 
This is the required expression of magnification.
Q. 26 A jar of height h is filled with a transparent liquid of refractive index µ

figure. At the centre of the jar on the bottom surface is a dot. Find the
minimum diameter of a disc, such that when placed on the top surface
symmetrically about the centre, the dot is invisible.
d
h
i i
K Thinking Process
The problem is based on the principle of total internal reflection and area of visibility.
Ans. Let d be the diameter of the disc. The spot shall be invisible if the incident rays from the dot
at O to the surface at d / 2 at the critical angle.
Let i be the angle of incidence.
Using relationship between refractive index and critical angle,
1
then, sin t =
µ
Using geometry and trigonometry.
d /2
Now, = tan i
h
d
⇒ = h tan i = h[ µ 2 − 1 ] − 1
2
2h
∴ d=
µ2 − 1
This is the required expression of d.
Q. 27A myopic adult has a far point at 0.1 m. His power of accomodation is
4 D.
(i) What power lenses are required to see distant objects?
(ii) What is his near point without glasses?
(iii) What is his near point with glasses? (Take the image distance from the
lens of the eye to the retina to be 2 cm.)
K Thinking Process
If two thin lenses of focal length f1 and f2 are in contact, the effective focal length of the
combination is given by,
1 1 1
= +
f f1 f2
in terms of power P = P1 + P2
Ans. (i) Let the power at the far point be Pf for the normal relaxed eye of an average person. The
required power
1 1 1
Pf = = + = 60 D
f 01 . 0.02
By the corrective lens the object distance at the far point is ∞.
The power required is
1 1 1
Pf′ = = + = 50 D
f ′ ∞ 0.02
So for eye + lens system,
we have the sum of the eye and that of the glasses Pg
∴ Pf′ = Pf + Pg
∴ Pg = − 10 D
(ii) His power of accomodatlon is 4 D for the normal eye. Let the power of the normal eye
for near vision be Pn .
Then, 4 = Pn − Pf or Pn = 64 D
Let his near point be x n , then
1 1 1
+ = 64 or + 50 = 64
xn 0.02 xn
1
= 14,
xn
1
∴ x n = ; 0.07 m
14
(iii) With glasses Pn′ = Pf′ + 4 = 54
1 1 1
54 = + = + 50
x n′ 0.02 x n′
1
=4
x n′
1
∴ x n′ = = 0.25m
4
Q. 28 Show that for a material with refractive index µ ≥ 2, light incident at

any angle shall be guided along a length perpendicular to the incident
face.
Ans. Any ray entering at an angle i shall be guided along AC if the angle ray makes with the face
AC (φ) is greater than the critical angle as per the principle of total internal reflection
φ + r = 90°, therefore sin φ = cos r
1
⇒ sinφ ≥
µ
1
⇒ cos r ≥ A C
µ
1 φ
or 1 − cos 2 r ≤ 1 − 2
µ r
1 i
i.e., sin2 r ≤ 2
µ
1 B D
i.e., sin2 r ≤ 1 − 2
µ
since, sin i = µ sin r
1 1
sin2 i ≤ 1 − 2 or sin2 i ≤ µ 2 − 1
µ2 µ
π
when i =
2
Then, we have smallest angle φ.
If that is greater than the critical angle, then all other angles of incidence shall be more than
the critical angle.
Thus, 1≤ µ 2 − 1
or µ2 ≥ 2
⇒ µ≥ 2
This is the required result.
Q. 29The mixture a pure liquid and a solution in a long vertical column

(i.e., horizontal dimensions << vertical dimensions) produces diffusion
of solute particles and hence a refractive index gradient along the
vertical dimension. A ray of light entering the column at right angles to
the vertical is deviated from its original path. Find the deviation in
travelling a horizontal distance d << h, the height of the column.
Ans. Let us consider a portion of a ray between x and x + dx inside the liquid. Let the angle of
incidence at x be θ and let it enter the thin column at height y. Because of the bending it
shall emerge at x + dx with an angle θ + dθ and at a height y + dy. From Snell’s law,
y θ
dy
θ + dθ
( y + dy)
dx
µ( y) sin θ = µ( y + dy) sin (θ + dθ)

 dµ 
or µ( y) sin θ;  µ( y) + dy (sinθ cos dθ + cos θ sindθ)
 dy 
dµ
or µ( y) sin θ + µ( y) cos θdθ + dy sinθ
dy
− dµ
or µ( y)cos θdθ ; dysin θ
dy
− dµ
dθ ; dy tan θ
µ dy
dx
But tanθ = (from the figure)
dy
On solving, we have
− 1 dµ
∴ dθ = dx
µ dy
Solving this variable separable form of differential equation.
− 1 dµ d − 1d µ
µ dy ∫0
∴ θ= dx = d
µ dy
Q. 30 If light passes near a massive object, the gravitational interaction

causes a bending of the ray. This can be thought of as happening due to
a change in the effective refractive index of the medium given by
n(r ) = 1 + 2 GM / rc 2
where r is the distance of the point of consideration from the centre of
the mass of the massive body, G is the universal gravitational constant,
M the mass of the body and c the speed of light in vacuum. Considering a
spherical object find the deviation of the ray from the original path as it
grazes the object.
Ans. Let us consider two planes at r and r + dr. Let the light be incident at an angle θ at the plane
at r and leave r + dr at an angle θ + dθ . Then from Snell’s law,
θ+dθ
dr R
θ r M
r
r + dr
n (r ) sin θ = n(r + dr ) sin (θ + dθ)
⇒ 
n(r ) sin θ ;  n(r ) +
dn 
dr  (sin θcos dθ + cos θsin dθ)
 dr 
;  n (r ) +
dn 
dr  (sin θ + cos θ dθ)
 dr 
Ignoring the product of differentials

dn
n(r ) sinθ ; n(r )sinθ + dr sinθ + n(r ) cos θdθ
dr
dn dθ
or we have, − tan θ = n(r )
dr dr
2GM  2GM  dθ dθ
tan θ =  1 +  ≈
2 2
r c  rc 2  dr dr
θ0 2GM ∞ tan θdr
∫0 dθ = c 2 ∫−∞ r 2
Now substitution for integrals, we have
R
Now, r 2 = x 2 + R 2 and tan θ =
x
2 rdr = 2 xdx
θ0 2GM ∞ R xdx
∫0 dθ = c 2 ∫−∞ x 3
( x 2 + R 2 )2
Put x = R tan φ
dx = R sec 2 φ d φ
2GMR π/2 R sec 2 φd φ
∴ θ0 =
c 2 ∫− π / 2 R 3 sec 3 φ
2GM π/2 4 GM
=
Rc 2 ∫− π / 2 cos φd φ =
Rc 2
This is the required proof.
Q. 31 An infinitely long cylinder of radius R is made of an unusual exotic

material with refractive index-1 (figure). The cylinder is placed between
two planes whose normals are along the y-direction. The centre of the
cylinder O lies along the y-axis. A narrow laser beam is directed along
the y-direction from the lower plate. The laser source is at a horizontal
distance x from the diameter in the y direction. Find the range of x such
that light emitted from the lower plane does not reach the upper plane.
y
θr
o R
θr θr
x
θi
Ans. Since, the material is of refractive index − 1, θr , is negative and θr′ positive.
Now, | θt| = |θr| = |θ′r|
The total deviation of the outcoming ray from the incoming ray is 4θt . Rays shall not reach
the recieving plate if
π 3π
≤ 4θt ≤ [angles measured clockwise from the y-axis]
2 2
π 3π
On solving, ≤ θt ≤
8 8
y Receiving plate
o θi R
θr θr x
θt
x
x
Now, sin θt =
R
π x 3π
≤ sin−1 ≤
8 R 8
π x 3π
or ≤ ≤
8 R 8
Rπ R3π
Thus, for light emitted from the source shall not reach the receiving plate. If ≤x≤ .
8 8
Q. 32 (i) Consider a thin lens placed between a source (S) and an observer (O)
b2
(Figure). Let the thickness of the lens vary as w(b) = w 0 − , where b
α
is the verticle distance from the pole, w 0 is a constant. Using Fermat’s
principle i.e., the time of transit for a ray between the source and
observer is an extremum find the condition that all paraxial rays
starting from the source will converge at a point O on the axis. Find
the focal length.
P1
b
S u v O
(ii) A gravitational lens may be assumed to have a varying width of the

form
k 
w(b) = k 1 ln  2  bmin < b < bmax
 b
 k2 
= k 1 ln   b < bmin
 bmin 
Show that an observer will see an image of a point object as a ring
about the centre of the lens with an angular radius
u
(n − 1) k 1
β= v
u+v
Ans. (i) The time elapsed to travel from S to P1 is

SP1 u 2 + b2
t1 = =
c c
u  1 b2 
or 1 +  assuming b < < u 0 .
c  2 u 2 
The time required to travel from P1 to O is
PO v 2 + b2 v  1 b2 
t2 = 1 = ;  1 + 
c c c  2 v 2 
The time required to travel through the lens is
(n − 1) w(b )
t1 =
c
where n is the refractive index.
Thus, the total time is
t = u + v + b 2  +  + (n − 1) w(b )
1 1 1 1
c 2 u v
1 1 1
Put = +
D u v
1 1 b2  b 2  
Then, t = u + v + + (n − 1)  w0 + 
c  2 D  α  
Fermet’s principle gives the time taken should be minimum.
For that first derivative should be zero.
dt b 2(n − 1)b
=0= −
db CD cα
α = 2(n − 1) D
Thus, a convergent lens is formed if α = 2(n − 1)D. This is independant of and hence, all
paraxial rays from S will converge at O i.e., for rays
and (b < < v.)
1 1 1
Since, = + , the focal length is D.
D u v
(ii) In this case, differentiating expression of time taken t w.r.t. b
1 1 b2 k 
t =  u + v + + (n − 1) k1In  2  
c  2 D  b 
dt b k
= 0 = − (n − 1) 1
db D b
⇒ b 2 = (n − 1) k1D
∴ b = (n − 1)k1D
Thus, all rays passing at a height b shall contribute to the image. The ray paths make an
angle.
b (n − 1)k1D (n − 1)k1uv (n − 1)k1u
β; = = =
v v2 v 2 (u + v ) (u + v )v
10
Wave Optics
Q. 1 Consider a light beam incident from air to a glass slab at Brewster’s
angle as shown in figure.
A polaroid is placed in the path of the emergent ray at point P and
rotated about an axis passing through the centre and perpendicular to
the plane of the polaroid.
P
(a) For a particular orientation, there shall be darkness as observed
through the polaroid
(b) The intensity of light as seen through the polaroid shall be
independent of the rotation
(c) The intensity of light as seen through the polaroid shall go through a
minimum but not zero for two orientations of the polaroid
(d) The intensity of light as seen through the polaroid shall go through a
minimum for four orientations of the polaroid
K Thinking Process
When the light beam incident at Brewster’s angle, the transmitted beam is unpolarised
and reflected beam is polarised.
Ans. (c) Consider the diagram the light beam incident from air to the glass slab at Brewster’s
angle (i p ). The incident ray is unpolarised and is represented by dot (.).
The reflected light is plane polarised represented by arrows.
Wave Optics 165
As the emergent ray is unpolarised, hence intensity cannot be zero when passes
through polaroid.
N
Polarised
θB
Polaroid
(P)
Q. 2 Consider sunlight incident on a slit of width 10 4 Å. The image seen

through the slit shall
(a) be a fine sharp slit white in colour at the centre
(b) a bright slit white at the centre diffusing to zero intensities at the edges
(c) a bright slit white at the centre diffusing to regions of different colours
(d) only be a diffused slit white in colour
Ans. (a) Given, width of the slit = 104 Å
= 104 × 10− 10 m = 10− 6 m = 1µ m
Wavelength of (visible) sunlight varies from 4000 Å to 8000 Å.
As the width of slit is comparable to that of wavelength, hence diffraction occurs with
maxima at centre. So, at the centre all colours appear i.e., mixing of colours form white
patch at the centre.
Q. 3 Consider a ray of light incident from air onto a slab of glass (refractive
index n) of width d, at an angle θ. The phase difference between the ray
reflected by the top surface of the glass and the bottom surface is
1/ 2 1/ 2
4 πd  1 2  4 πd  1 2 
(a) 1 − 2 sin θ +π (b) 1 − 2 sin θ
λ  n  λ  n 
1/ 2 1/ 2
4 πd  1 2  π 4 πd  1 2 
(c) 1 − 2 sin θ + (d) 1 − 2 sin θ + 2π
λ  n  2 λ  n 
Ans. (a) Consider the diagram, the ray (P) is incident at an angle θ and gets reflected in the
direction P ′ and refracted in the direction P ' ' . Due to reflection from the glass medium,
there is a phase change of π.
Time taken to travel along OP ′′
OP ' ' d / cos r nd
∆t = = =
v c/n c cos r
sin θ
From Snell’s law, n=
sin r
sin θ
⇒ sin r =
n
sin2 θ
cos r = 1 − sin2 r = 1 −
n2
N
P P′
O
r r r′ d
P′′
− 1/ 2
nd n2d  sin2 θ 
∴ ∆t = =  1 − 
 sin2 θ 
1/ 2
c  n2 
c  1 − 
 n2 
−1/ 2
2π 2 π nd  sin2 θ 
Phase difference = ∆φ = × ∆t =  1 − 
T λ  n2 
So, net phase difference = ∆φ + π
−1/ 2
4 πd  1 2 
=  1 − 2 sin θ + π
λ  n 
Q. 4 In a Young’s double-slit experiment, the source is white light. One of the

holes is covered by a red filter and another by a blue filter. In this case,
(a) there shall be alternate interference patterns of red and blue
(b) there shall be an interference pattern for red distinct from that for blue
(c) there shall be no interference fringes
(d) there shall be an interference pattern for red mixing with one for blue
Ans. (c) For the interference pattern to be formed on the screen, the sources should be
coherent and emits lights of same frequency and wavelength.
In a Young’s double-slit experiment, when one of the holes is covered by a red filter and
another by a blue filter. In this case due to filteration only red and blue lights are
present. In YDSE monochromatic light is used for the formation of fringes on the
screen. Hence, in this case there shall be no interference fringes.
Q. 5 Figure shows a standard two slit arrangement with slits S 1 , S2 , P1 , P2 are

the two minima points on either side of P (figure).
Screen
S1 P1
S
P
S3
S2 P2 Second
S4
screen
At P2 on the screen, there is a hole and behind P2 is a second 2-slit

arrangement with slits S 3 , S 4 and a second screen behind them.
Wave Optics 167
(a) There would be no interference pattern on the second screen but it would be
lighted
(b) The second screen would be totally dark
(c) There would be a single bright point on the second screen
(d) There would be a regular two slit pattern on the second screen
Ans. (d) According to question, there is a hole at point P2 . From Huygen’s principle, wave will
propagates from the sources S1 and S 2 . Each point on the screen will acts as
secondary sources of wavelets.
Now, there is a hole at point P2 (minima). The hole will act as a source of fresh light for
the slits S 3 and S 4 .
Therefore, there will be a regular two slit pattern on the second screen.

Q. 6 Two sources S 1 and S2 of intensity I 1 and I 2 are placed in front of a
screen [Fig. (a)]. The pattern of intensity distribution seen in the
central portion is given by Fig. (b).
S1
x
S2
(a) (b) x
In this case, which of the following statements are true?

(a) S1 and S 2 have the same intensities
(b) S1 and S 2 have a constant phase difference
(c) S1 and S 2 have the same phase
(d) S1 and S 2 have the same wavelength
Ans. (a, b, d)
Consider the pattern of the intensity shown in the figure
(i) As intensities of all successive minima is zero, hence we can say that two sources S1
and S 2 are having same intensities.
(ii) As width of the successive maxima (pulses) increases in continuous manner, we can
say that the path difference (x) or phase difference varies in continuous manner.
(iii) We are using monochromatic light in YDSE to avoid overlapping and to have very clear
pattern on the screen.
Q. 7 Consider sunlight incident on a pinhole of width 10 3 Å. The image of the

pinhole seen on a screen shall be
(a) a sharp white ring
(b) different from a geometrical image
(c) a diffused central spot, white in colour
(d) diffused coloured region around a sharp central white spot
Ans. (b, d)
Given, width of pinhole = 103 Å = 1000 Å
We know that wavelength of sunlight ranges from 4000 Å to 8000 Å.
Clearly, wavelength λ < width of the slit.
Hence, light is diffracted from the hole. Due to diffraction from the slight the image formed
on the screen will be different from the geometrical image.
Q. 8 Consider the diffraction pattern for a small pinhole. As the size of the
hole is increased
(a) the size decreases (b) the intensity increases
(c) the size increases (d) the intensity decreases
Ans. (a, b)
(a) When a decreases w increases.
So, size decreases.
1
(b) Now, light energy is distributed over a small area and intensity ∝ as area is
area
decreasing so intensity increases.
Q. 9 For light diverging from a point source,

(a) the wavefront is spherical
(b) the intensity decreases in proportion to the distance squared
(c) the wavefront is parabolic
(d) the intensity at the wavefront does not depend on the distance
Ans. (a, b)
Consider the diagram in which light diverges from a point source (O).
O
r
Spherical
Due to the point source light propagates in all directions symmetrically and hence,
wavefront will be spherical as shown in the diagram.
If power of the source is P, then intensity of the source will be
P
I=
4 πr 2
where, r is radius of the wavefront at any time.
Wave Optics 169

Q. 10Is Huygen’s principle valid for longitudinal sound waves?
Ans. When we are considering a point source of sound wave. The disturbance due to the
source propagates in spherical symmetry that is in all directions. The formation of
wavefront is in accordance with Huygen’s principle.
Wavefront
So, Huygen’s principle is valid for longitudinal sound waves also.
Q. 11 Consider a point at the focal point of a convergent lens. Another

convergent lens of short focal length is placed on the other side. What is
the nature of the wavefronts emerging from the final image?
Ans. Consider the ray diagram shown below
Wavefront
(spherical)
O1 I1 O2 I
L2
L1
The point image I1, due to L1 is at the focal point. Now, due to the converging lense L2 , let
final image formed is I which is point image, hence the wavefront for this image will be of
spherical symmetry.
Q. 12What is the shape of the wavefront on earth for sunlight?

Ans. We know that the sun is at very large distance from the earth. Assuming sun as spherical, it
can be considered as point source situated at infinity.
Due to the large distance the radius of wavefront can be considered as large (infinity) and
hence, wavefront is almost plane.
O Earth
Sun
Almost
plane
wavefront
Q. 13 Why is the diffraction of sound waves more evident in daily experience

than that of light wave?
Ans. As we know that the frequencies of sound waves lie between 20 Hz to 20 kHz so that their
wavelength ranges between 15 m to 15 mm. The diffraction occur if the wavelength of
waves is nearly equal to slit width.
As the wavelength of light waves is 7000 × 10− 10 m to 4000 × 10− 10 m. The slit width is very
near to the wavelength of sound waves as compared to light waves. Thus, the diffraction of
sound waves is more evident in daily life than that of light waves.
Q. 14 The human eye has an approximate angular resolution of φ = 5.8 × 10 − 4

rad and a typical photoprinter prints a minimum of 300 dpi (dots per
inch, 1 inch = 2.54 cm). At what minimal distance z should a printed
page be held so that one does not see the individual dots.
Ans. Given, angular resolution of human eye, φ = 5.8 × 10−4 rad.
and printer prints 300 dots per inch.
2.54
The linear distance between two dots is l = cm = 0.84 × 10−2 cm.
300
l
At a distance of z cm, this subtends an angle, φ =
z
l 0.84 × 10−2 cm
∴ z= = = 14.5 cm.
φ 5.8 × 10−4
Q. 15 A polaroid (I) is placed infront of a monochromatic source. Another

polariod (II) is placed in front of this polaroid (I) and rotated till no
light passes. A third polaroid (III) is now placed in between (I) and (II).
In this case, will light emerge from (II). Explain.
K Thinking Process
Natural light e.g., from the sun is unpolariser. This means the electric vector takes all
possible direction in the transverse plane, rapidly.
Ans. In the diagram shown, a monochromatic light is placed infront of polaroid (I) as shown
below.
Monochromatic Polaroid I Polaroid II

source
As per the given question, monochromatic light emerging from polaroid (I) is plane
polarised. When polaroid (II) is placed infront of this polaroid (I), and rotated till no light
passes through polaroid (II), then (I) and (II) are set in crossed positions, i.e., pass axes of I
and II are at 90°.
Monochromatic
source Polaroid I Polaroid III Polaroid II
Wave Optics 171
Consider the above diagram where a third polaroid (III) is placed between polaroid (I) and
polaroid II.
When a third polaroid (III) is placed in between (I) and (II), no light will emerge from (II), if
pass axis of (III) is parallel to pass axis of (I) or (II). In all other cases, light will emerge from
(II), as pass axis of (II) will no longer be at 90° to the pass axis of (III).

Q. 16 Can reflection result in plane polarised light if the light is incident on
the interface from the side with higher refractive index?
Ans. When angle of incidence is equal to Brewster’s angle, the Plane
transmitted light is unpolarised and reflected light is plane polarised
polarised.
iB
Consider the diagram in which unpolarised light is µ1
represented by dot and plane polarised light is represented
by arrows. µ2
Polarisation by reflection occurs when the angle of incidence
is the Brewster’s angle Unpolarised
µ
i.e., tan i B = 1µ 2 = 2 where µ 2 < µ 1
µ1
when the light rays travels in such a medium, the critical angle is
µ
sin ic = 2
µ1
where, µ 2 < µ 1
As tan i B > sin iC for large angles i B < iC .
Thus, the polarisation by reflection occurs definitely.
Q. 17For the same objective, find the ratio of the least separation between two
points to be distinguished by a microscope for light of 5000 Å and
electrons accelerated through 100V used as the illuminating substance.
K Thinking Process
2 sinβ
Resolving power of a microscope is calculated by , with µ as refractive index of the
1.22 λ
medium and β is the angle subtented by the objective at the object.
Ans. We know that
1 2 sin β . λ
122
Resolving power = = ⇒ dmin =
d 1.22 λ 2 sin β
where, λ is the wavelength of light and β is the angle subtended by the objective at the
object.
For the light of wavelength 5500 Å,
1.22 × 5500 × 10−10
dmin = ... (i)
2 sin β
For electrons accelerated through 100 V, the de-Broglie wavelength

12. 27 12.27
λ= = . × 10−9 m
= 012
V 100
. × 10−9
. × 012
122
dmin =
2 sin β
Ratio of the least separation
′
dmin . × 10−9
012
∴ = . × 10−3
= 02
dmin 5500 × 10−10
Q. 18Consider a two slit interference arrangements (figure) such that the

distance of the screen from the slits is half the distance between the
slits. Obtain the value of D in terms of λ such that the first minima on
the screen falls at a distance D from the centre O.
S1 T1
Source P
O
S C
S2 T2
Screen
K Thinking Process
For nth minima to be formed on the screen path difference between the rays coming
λ
from S1 and S2 must be (2 n − 1) .
2
Ans. From the given figure of two slit interference arrangements, we can write
T2 P = T2 O + OP = D + x
and T1P = TO
1 − OP = D − x
S1P = (S1T1 )2 + (PT1 )2 = D2 + (D − x )2

and S 2 P = (S 2T2 )2 + (T2 P)2 = D2 + (D + x )2
λ
The minima will occur when S 2 P − S1P = (2 n − 1)
2
λ
i.e., [D2 + (D + x )2 ]1/ 2 − [D2 + (D − x )2 ]1/ 2 = [for first minima n = 1]
2
If x=D
λ
we can write [D + 4D ] − [D + 0] =
2 2 1/ 2 2 1/ 2
2
λ
⇒ [5D2 ]1/ 2 − [D2 ]1/ 2 =
2
λ
⇒ 5D − D =
2
λ
⇒ D ( 5 − 1) = λ / 2 or D =
2 ( 5 − 1)
Putting 5 = 2 . 236
⇒ 5 − 1 = 2 . 236 − 1 = 1. 236
λ
D= = 0.404 λ
2 (1.236)
Wave Optics 173

Q. 19 Figure shown a two slit arrangement with a source
S1
which emits unpolarised light. P is a polariser with 1
axis whose direction is not given. If I 0 is the intensity S
of the principal maxima when no polariser is present, 2
calculate in the present case, the intensity of the P
S2
principal maxima as well as of the first minima.
K Thinking Process
The resultant amplitude will be the sum of amplitude of either beam in perpendicular
and parallel polarisation.
Ans. A = Resultant amplitude
= A parallel (A||) + A perpendicular (A⊥ )
⇒ A = A⊥ + A||
Without P A = A⊥ + A||
A1 = A1⊥ + A⊥2 = A⊥0 sin (kx − ωt ) + A⊥0 sin (kx − ωt + φ)
A|| = A|(|1) + A|(|2 )
A|| = A||0 [sin (kx − ωt ) + sin (kx − ωt + φ)]
where A⊥0 , A||0 are the amplitudes of either of the beam in perpendicular and parallel
polarisations.
2 2
∴Intensity = { A⊥0 + A||0 } [sin2 (kx − ωt ) (1 + cos 2 φ + 2 sin φ) + sin2 (kx − ωt ) sin2 φ]
+ A||0 }   . 2 (1 + cos φ)
2 2 1
= { A⊥0
2
2
= 2 A⊥0 (1 + cos φ), since, A⊥0 = A||0
av av
With P
Assume A⊥2 is blocked
Intensity = ( A|1| + A||2 )2 + ( A1⊥ )2
2 2 1
= A⊥0 (1 + cos φ) + A⊥0 .
2
2
Given, I 0 = 4 A⊥0 = Intensity without polariser at principal maxima.
Intensity at principal maxima with polariser
= A⊥0
2
2 + 1  = 5 I
 
 2 8
0
Intensity at first minima with polariser

2
2 A⊥0 I0
= A⊥0 (1 − 1) + = .
2 8
Q. 20 S1
P1
θ
A O
C
L = d/4 S2
Screen
AC = CO = D, S 1C = S2C = d << D
A small transparent slab containing material of µ = 1.5 is placed along
AS2 (figure). What will be the distance from O of the principal maxima
and of the first minima on either side of the principal maxima obtained
in the absence of the glass slab?
K Thinking Process
Whenever a transparent slab of refractive index µ and thickness t is inserted in the path
of the ray the fringes on the screen shifts by ( µ −1 ) t towards the slab.
Ans. In case of transparent glass slab of refractive index µ, the path difference will be calculated
as ∆x = 2d sin θ + ( µ − 1) L.
In case of transparent glass slab of refractive index µ,
the path difference = 2d sin θ + (µ − 1) L.
For the principal maxima, (path difference is zero)
i.e., 2d sin θ0 + (µ − 1) L = 0
L (µ − 1) − L (0.5)
or sin θ0 = − = [QL = d / 4]
2d 2d
−1
or sin θ0 =
16
−D
∴ OP = D tan θ0 ≈ D sin θ0 =
16
λ
For the first minima, the path difference is ±
2
λ
∴ 2d sin θ1 + 0.5L = ±
2
± λ / 2 − 0.5L ± λ / 2 − d / 8
or sin θ1 = =
2d 2d
± λ /2 − λ / 8 1 1
= =± −
2λ 4 16
[Q The diffraction occurs if the wavelength of waves is nearly equal to the side width (d)]
1 1 3
On the positive side sin θ′1+ = + − =
4 16 16
1 1 5
On the negative side sin θ′′1− = − − =−
4 16 16
The first principal maxima on the positive side is at distance
sin θ′1+ 3 3D
D tan θ′1+ = D =D = above point O
1 − sin θ′
2
16 − 3
2 2 247
1
The first principal minima on the negative side is at distance
5D 5D
D tanθ′′1 = = below point O.
162 − 52 231
Wave Optics 175
Q. 21Four identical monochromatic sources A, B, C, D as shown in the (figure)

produce waves of the same wavelength λ and are coherent. Two receiver
R 1 and R2 are at great but equal distances from B.
(i) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal?
(ii) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal when B is turned
off?
(iii) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal when D is turned
off?
(iv) Which of the two receivers can distinguish which of the sources B or D
has been turned off?
R2
λ/2 λ/2
R1 A B C
λ/2
D
R 1 B = d = R2 B
AB = BC = BD = λ /2
K Thinking Process
The resultant disturbance at a point will be calculated by some of disturbances due to
individual sources.
Ans. Consider the disturbances at the receiver R1 which is at a distance d from B.
Let the wave at R1 because of A be YA = a cos ωt . The path difference of the signal from A
with that from B is λ /2 and hence, the phase difference is π.
Thus, the wave at R1 because of B is
yB = a cos (ωt − π) = − a cos ωt .
The path difference of the signal from C with that from A is λ and hence the phase difference
is 2 π.
Thus, the wave at R1 because of C is Yc = a cos (ωt − 2 π) = a cos ωt
R2
λ/2 λ/2
R1 A B C
λ/2
D
The path difference between the signal from D with that of A is

1/ 2
λ
2
 λ  λ
d 2 +   − (d − λ / 2 ) = d  1 +  −d +
2  4d 2  2
1/ 2
 λ2  λ λ
= d  1 +  −d + ≈ (Qd >> λ)
 8d 2  2 2
Therefore, phase difference is π.
∴ YD = a cos (ωt − π) = − a cos ωt
Thus, the signal picked up at R1 from all the four sources is YR1 = yA + yB + yC + yD
= a cos ωt − a cos ωt + a cos ωt − a cos ωt = 0
(i) Let the signal picked up at R 2 from B be yB = a1 cos ωt .
The path difference between signal at D and that at B is λ /2.
∴ yD = − a1 cos ωt
The path difference between signal at A and that at B is
1/ 2
λ
2
 λ2  1λ 2
(d )2 +   − d = d  1 +  −d~
−
2  4d 2  8 d2
As d >> λ, therefore this path difference → 0
2π  1 λ2 
and phase difference =  2
→0
λ 8 d 
Hence, yA = a1 cos (ωt − φ)
Similarly, yC = a1 cos (ωt − φ)
∴Signal picked up by R 2 is
yA + yB + yC + yD = y = 2 a1 cos (ωt − φ)
2
∴ y = 4a12 cos 2 (ωt − φ)
∴ < I > = 2 a12
Thus, R1 picks up the larger signal.
(ii) If B is switched off,
R1 picks up y = a cos ωt
1
∴ I R1 = a2
2
R 2 picks up y = a cos ωt
a2
∴ I R 2 = a2 < cos 2 ωt > =
2
(iii) Thus, R1 and R 2 pick up the same signal.
If D is switched off.
R1 picks up y = a cos ωt
1
∴ I R1 = a2
2
R 2 picks up y = 3 a cos ωt
9a2
∴ I R 2 = 9 a2 < cos 2 ωt > =
2
Thus, R 2 picks up larger signal compared to R1.
(iv) Thus, a signal at R1 indicates B has been switched off and an enhanced signal at R 2
indicates D has been switched off.
Wave Optics 177
Q. 22 The optical properties of a medium are governed by the relative

permittivity (ε r ) and relative permeability (µ r ) . The refractive index is
defined as µ r ε r = n. For ordinary material, ε r > 0 and µ r > 0 and the
positive sign is taken for the square root.
In 1964, a Russian scientist V. Veselago postulated the existence of
material with ε r < 0 and µ r < 0. Since, then such metamaterials have
been produced in the laboratories and their optical properties studied.
For such materials n = − µ r ε r . As light enters a medium of such
refractive index the phases travel away from the direction of
propagation.
(i) According to the description above show that if rays of light enter
such a medium from air (refractive index = 1) at an angle θ in 2nd
quadrant, then the refracted beam is in the 3rd quadrant.
(ii) Prove that Snell’s law holds for such a medium.
Ans. Let us assume that the given postulate is true, then two parallel rays would proceed as
shown in the figure below
θi θi B
θi θi
B
Air C C Air
Medium E A A
D Medium
θr θr E
D θr θr
(i) (ii)
(i) Let AB represent the incident wavefront and DE represent the refracted wavefront. All
points on a wavefront must be in same phase and in turn, must have the same optical
path length.
Thus − εr µ r AE = BC − εr µ r CD
or BC = εr µ r (CD − AE )
BC > 0, CD > AE
As showing that the postulate is reasonable. If however, the light proceeded in the sense
it does for ordinary material (viz. in the fourth quadrant, Fig. 2)
Then, − εr µ r AE = BC − εr µ r CD
If BC > 0, then CD > AE
which is obvious from Fig (i).
Hence, the postulate reasonable.
However, if the light proceeded in the sense it does for ordinary material, (going from 2nd
quadrant to 4th quadrant) as shown in Fig. (i)., then proceeding as above,
− εr µ r AE = BC − εr µ r CD
As AE > CD, therefore BC < 0 which is not possible. Hence, the given postulate is correct.
(ii) From Fig. (i)
BC = AC sin θi
and CD − AE = AC sin θr
As BC = µ r εr [CD − AE = BC]
∴ AC sin θi = εr µ r AC sin θr
sin θi
or = εr µ r = n
sin θr
Which proves Snell’s law.
Q. 23 To ensure almost 100% transmittivity, photographic lenses are often

coated with a thin layer of dielectric material. The refractive index of
this material is intermediated between that of air and glass (which
makes the optical element of the lens). A typically used dielectric film is
MgF2 (n = 1.38). What should the thickness of the film be so that at the
centre of the visible spectrum (5500 Å) there is maximum transmission.
Ans. In this figure, we have shown a dielectric film of thickness d deposited on a glass lens.
r1
B
r2
i
Air, n = 1 E
C
r
Film, n = 1.38 d
r r
Glass, n = 1.5 D
Refractive index of film = 138
. and refractive index of glass = 15
. .
Given, λ = 5500 Å .
Consider a ray incident at an angle i. A part of this ray is reflected from the air-film interface
and a part refracted inside.
This is partly reflected at the film-glass interface and a part transmitted. A part of the
reflected ray is reflected at the film-air interface and a part transmitted as r2 parallel to r1. Of
course successive reflections and transmissions will keep on decreasing the amplitude of
the wave.
Hence, rays r1 and r2 shall dominate the behaviour. If incident light is to be transmitted
through the lens, r1 and r2 should interfere destructively. Both the reflections at A and D are
from lower to higher refractive index and hence, there is no phase change on reflection. The
optical path difference between r2 and r1 is
n ( AD + CD) − AB
If d is the thickness of the film, then
d
AD = CD =
cos r
AB = AC sin i
AC
= d tan r
2
∴ AC = 2d tan r
Hence, AB = 2d tan r sin i .
Wave Optics 179
2 nd
Thus, the optical path difference = − 2d tan r sin i
cos r
sin i d sin r
=2. − 2d sin i
sin r cos r cos r
 1 − sin2 r 
= 2d sin  
 sin r cos r 
= 2nd cos r
λ
For these waves to interfere destructively path difference = .
2
λ
⇒ 2 nd cos r =
2
λ
⇒ nd cos r = ... (i)
4
For photographic lenses, the sources are normally in vertical plane
∴ i = r = 0°
λ
From Eq. (i), nd cos 0° =
4
λ
⇒ d=
4n
5500 Å
= ≈ 1000 Å
4 × 1.38
11
Dual Nature of Radiation
and Matter
Q. 1 A particle is dropped from a height H. The de-Broglie wavelength of the
particle as a function of height is proportional to
(a) H (b) H1/ 2 (c) H 0 (d) H −1/ 2
K Thinking Process
h
The de-broglie wavelength λ is given by λ = .
mv
Ans. (d) Velocity of a body falling from a height H is given by
v = 2 gH
We know that de-broglie wavelength
h h h
λ= = ⇒=
mv m 2 gH m 2g H
h
Here, is a constant φ say ‘K’.
m 2g
1 1
So, λ=K ⇒λ∝
H H
⇒ λ ∝ H−1/ 2
Q. 2 The wavelength of a photon needed to remove a proton from a nucleus

which is bound to the nucleus with 1 MeV energy is nearly
(a) 1. 2 nm (b) 1. 2 × 10 −3 nm
(c) 1. 2 × 10 −6 nm (d) 1. 2 × 10 nm
K Thinking Process
hc
Energy of a photon is E = , where λ is the minimum wavelength of the photon required
λ
to eject the proton from nucleus.
Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 181
Ans. (b) Given in the question,

Energy of a photon, E = 1MeV ⇒ = 106 eV
Now, hc = 1240 eVnm
hc
Now, E=
λ
hc 1240 eVnm
⇒ l= =
E 106 eV
= 1.24 × 10−3 nm
Q. 3 Consider a beam of electrons (each electron with energy E 0 ) incident on a

metal surface kept in an evacuated chamber. Then,
(a) no electrons will be emitted as only photons can emit electrons
(b) electrons can be emitted but all with an energy, E 0
(c) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of E 0 − φ
(φ is the work function)
(d) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of E 0
Ans. (d) When a beam of electrons of energy E0 is incident on a metal surface kept in an
evacuated chamber electrons can be emitted with maximum energy E0 (due to elastic
collision) and with any energy less than E0 , when part of incident energy of electron is
used in liberating the electrons from the surface of metal.
Q. 4 Consider figure given below. Suppose the voltage applied to A is

increased. The diffracted beam will have the maximum at a value of θ that
(a) will be larger than the earlier value (b) will be the same as the earlier value
(c) will be less than the earlier value (d) will depend on the target
HT
Nickel
A
Electron beam target
q
Electron
LT gun
Diffracted Vacuum
electron chamber
Movable beam
collector
To galvanometer
K Thinking Process
The figure given here shows the Davisson-Germer experiment which was held to verify
the wave nature of electrons.
Ans. (c) In Davisson-Germer experiment, the de-Broglie wavelength associated with electron is
12.27
λ= Å ...(i)
V
where V is the applied voltage.
If there is a maxima of the diffracted electrons at an angle θ, then
2d sinθ = λ …(ii)
From Eq. (i), we note that if V is inversely proportional to the wavelength λ.
i.e., V will increase with the decrease in the λ.
From Eq. (ii), we note that wavelength λ is directly proportional to sinθ and hence θ.
So, with the decrease in λ, θ will also decrease.
Thus, when the voltage applied to A is increased. The diffracted beam will have the
maximum at a value of θ that will be less than the earlier value.
Q. 5 A proton, a neutron, an electron and an α-particle have same energy.

Then, their de-Broglie wavelengths compare as
(a) λ p = λ n > λ e > λ α (b) λ α < λ p = λ n > λ e
(c) λ e < λ p = λ n > λ α (d) λ e = λ p = λ n = λ α
K Thinking Process
1
The energy of any particle can be given by K = mv 2
2
⇒ mv = 2 mk ...(i)
Also, de-Broglie wavelength is given by
h
λ= ...(ii)
mv
Now, relation between energy and wavelength of any particle is given by putting the
value of Eq. (i) in Eq. (ii)
h
λ=
2 mk
Ans. (b) We know that the relation between λ and K is given by
h
λ=
2 mk
h
Here, for the given value of energy K, is a constant.
2k
1
Thus, λ∝
m
∴ λ p : λ n : λe : λ α
1 1 1 1
⇒ = : : :
mp mn me mα
Since, mp = mn, hence λ p = λ n
As, mα > mp , therefore λ α < λ p
As, me < mn, therefore λe > λ n
Hence, λ α < λ p = λ n < λe
Q. 6 An electron is moving with an initial velocity v = v 0 $i and is in a magnetic

field B = B 0 $j. Then, it’s de-Broglie wavelength
(a) remains constant
(b) increases with time
(c) decreases with time
(d) increases and decreases periodically
Ans. (a) Given, v = v 0 $i ⇒B = B0 $j
Force on moving electron due to magnetic field is, F = −e(v × B)
= − e[v 0i × B0 j] ⇒ = − ev 0 B0k
As this force is perpendicular to v and B, so the magnitude of v will not change, i.e.,
momentum (= mv ) will remain constant in magnitude. Hence,
h
de-Broglie wavelength λ = remains constant.
mv
Q. 7 An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity v = v 0 i(v 0 > 0) is in an

electric field E = − E 0 i$ (E 0 = constant > 0). It’s de-Broglie wavelength at
time t is given by
λ0  eE t 
(a) (b) λ 0 1 + 0 
 eE 0 t   mv 0 
1 + 
 m v0 
(c) λ 0 (d) λ 0t
K Thinking Process
h
de - Broglie wavelength is given by λ =
mv
Ans. (a) Initial de-Broglie wavelength of electron,
h
λ0 = ...(i)
mv 0
Force on electron in electric field,
F = − eE = − e[− E0 $i ] = eE0 $i
F eE0 $i
Acceleration of electron a= =
m m
Velocity of electron after time t,
 eE $i 
v = v 0 $i +  0  t =  v 0 +
eE0  $
t i
 m   m 
 eE0  $
= v 0 1 + t i
 mv 0 
de - Broglie wavelength associated with electron at time t is
h
λ=
mv
h λ0  h 
⇒ = = Q λ 0 = 
  eE0    eE0   mv 0
m v 0 1 + t   1 + t
  mv 0    mv 0 
Q. 8 An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity v = v 0 $i is in an electric field

E = E 0 $j. If λ 0 = h / mv 0 , it’s de-Broglie wavelength at time t is given by
e2E 02t 2
(a) λ 0 (b) λ 0 1 +
m2v 02
λ0 λ0
(c) (d)
e2E 2t 2  e2E 2t 2
1 + 20 2 1 + 20 2 
m v0  m v0 
Ans. (c) Initial de - Broglie wavelength of electron,

h
λ0 =
mv 0
Force on electron in electric field,
F = − eE = − eE0 $j
F eE0 $j
Acceleration of electron, a = =
m m
It is acting along negative y-axis.
The initial velocity of electron along x-axis, v x 0 = v 0 $i . Initial velocity of electron along
y-axis, v y 0 = 0.
Velocity of electron after time t along x-axis, v x = v 0 $i
(Q there is no electron along x-axis.)
Velocity of electron after time t along y-axis,
v y = 0 +  − 0 $j  t = − 0 t$j
eE eE
 m  m
Magnitude of velocity of electron after time t is
2
− eE0 
v= v x2 + v y2 = v 02 +  t
 m 
e 2 E02t 2
⇒ = v0 1 +
m2 v 02
h
de-Broglie wavelength, λ′ =
mv
h
⇒ =
mv 0 1 + e 2 E02t 2 / (m2 v 02 )
λ0
=
1 + e 2 E02t 2 / m2 v 02

Q. 9 Relativistic corrections become necessary when the expression for the
1
kinetic energy mv 2 , becomes comparable with mc 2 , where m is the mass
2
of the particle. At what de-Broglie wavelength, will relativistic corrections
become important for an electron?
(a) λ = 10 nm (b) λ = 10 −1 nm
(c) λ = 10 −4 nm (d) λ = 10 −6 nm
K Thinking Process
The de-Broglie wavelength at which relativistic corrections become important must be
greater than speed of light i.e., 3 × 10 8 m/s.
Ans. (c, d)
de-Broglie wavelength
h h
λ= ⇒ v=
mv mλ
Here, h = 6.6 × 10−34 Js
and for electron, m = 9 × 10−31 kg
Now consider each option one by one
(a) λ1 = 10 nm = 10 × 10−9 m = 10−8 m
6.6 × 10−34
⇒ v1 =
(9 × 10−31 ) × 10−8
2.2
⇒ = × 105 ≈ 105 m/s
3
(b) λ 2 = 10−1 nm = 10−1 × 10−9 m = 10−10 m
6.6 × 10−34
⇒ v2 = ≈ 107 m/s
(9 × 10−31 ) × 10−10
(c) λ 3 = 10−4 nm = 10−4 × 10−9 m = 10−13 m
6.6 × 10−34
⇒ v3 = ≈ 1010 m/s
(9 × 10−31 ) × 10−13
(d) λ 4 = 10−6 nm = 10−6 × 10−9 m = 10−15 m
6.6 × 10−34
⇒ v4 = ≈ 1012 m/s
9 × 10−31 × 10−15
Thus, options (c) and (d) are correct as v 3 and v 4 is greater than 3 × 108 m/s.
Q. 10 Two particles A1 and A2 of masses m 1 , m2 (m 1 > m2 ) have the same

de-Broglie wavelength. Then,
(a) their momenta are the same
(b) their energies are the same
(c) energy of A1 is less than the energy of A2
(d) energy of A1 is more than the energy of A2
Ans. (a, c)
h
de-Broglie wavelength λ =
mv
where, mv = p (moment)
h h
⇒ λ= ⇒ p=
p λ
Here, h is a constant.
1 p λ
So, p∝ ⇒ 1 = 2
λ p2 λ1
But (λ1 = λ 2 ) = λ
p1 λ
Then, = = 1 ⇒ p1 = p2
p2 λ
Thus, their momenta is same.
1 1 mv 2 × m
Also, E= mv 2 =
2 2 m
1 m2 v 2 1 p2
= =
2 m 2 m
1
Here, p is constant E∝
m
E1 m2
∴ = < 1 ⇒ E1 < E2
E2 m1
Q. 11 The de-Broglie wavelength of a photon is twice, the de-Broglie

c
wavelength of an electron. The speed of the electron is v e = . Then,
100
Ee Ee
(a) = 10 −4 (b) = 10 −2
Ep Ep
pe pe
(c) = 10 −2 (d) = 10 −4
mec mec
Ans. (b, c)
Suppose, Mass of electron = me , Mass of photon = mp ,
Velocity of electron = ve and Velocity of photon = v p
Thus, for electron, de-Broglie wavelength
h
λe =
me ve
h 100 h
= = (given) …(i)
me (c / 100) me c
1
Kinetic energy, Ee = me ve2
2
⇒ me ve = 2 Ee me
h h
so, λe = =
me ve 2 me Ee
h2
⇒ Ee = …(ii)
2λ2e me
For photon of wavelength λ p , energy
hc hc
Ep = = [Qλ p = 2 λe ]
λ p 2 λe
Ep hc 2 λ2 m
∴ = × e2 e
Ee 2 λe h
λe me c 100h me c
= = × = 100
h me c h
Ee 1
So, = = 10−2
Ep 100
For electron, pe = me ve = me × c / 100
pe 1
So, = = 10−2
me c 100
Q. 12 Photons absorbed in matter are converted to heat. A source emitting n

photon/sec of frequency ν is used to convert 1 kg of ice at 0°C to water
at 0°C. Then, the time T taken for the conversion
(a) decreases with increasing n, with ν fixed
(b) decreases with n fixed, ν increasing
(c) remains constant with n and ν changing such that nν = constant
(d) increases when the product nν increases
Ans. (a, b, c)
Energy spent to convert ice into water
= mass × latent heat
= mL = (1000 g) ×(80 cal/g)
= 80000 cal
Energy of photons used = nT × E = nT × hν [QE = hν]
mL
So, nThν = mL ⇒ T =
nhν
1
∴ T ∝ , when ν is constant.
n
1
T ∝ , when n is fixed.
ν
1
⇒ T∝ .
nν
Thus, T is constant, if nν is constant.
Q. 13 A particle moves in a closed orbit around the origin, due to a force which
is directed towards the origin. The de-Broglie wavelength of the particle
varies cyclically between two values λ 1 , λ 2 with λ 1 > λ 2 . Which of the
following statement are true?
(a) The particle could be moving in a circular orbit with origin as centre
(b) The particle could be moving in an elliptic orbit with origin as its focus
(c) When the de-Broglie wavelength is λ 1, the particle is nearer the origin than
when its value is λ 2
(d) When the de-Broglie wavelength is λ 2, the particle is nearer the origin than
when its value is λ 1
Ans. (b, d)
The de-Broglie wavelength of the particle can be varying cyclically between two values λ1
and λ 2 , if particle is moving in an elliptical orbit with origin as its one focus.
Consider the figure given below

v2
A P
O
Let v1, v 2 be the speed of particle at A and B respectively and origin is at focus O. If λ1, λ 2
are the de-Broglie wavelengths associated with particle while moving at A and B
respectively. Then,
h
λ1 =
mv1
h
and λ2 =
mv 2
λ1 v 2
∴ =
λ2 v1
since λ1 > λ 2
∴ v 2 > v1
By law of conservation of angular momentum, the particle moves faster when it is closer to
focus.
From figure, we note that origin O is closed to P than A.

Q. 14 A proton and an α-particle are accelerated, using the same potential
difference. How are the de-Broglie wavelengths λ p and λ α related to
each other?
K Thinking Process
Here, since both proton and α-particle use the same potential difference, thus they are
taken as constant.
h
Ans. As, λ=
2 mqv
1
∴ λ∝
mq
λp mαq α 4mp × 2e
= = = 8
λα mp q p mp × e
∴ λp = 8λ α
i.e., wavelength of proton is 8 times wavelength of α-particle.
Q. 15 (i) In the explanation of photoeletric effect, we assume one photon of

frequency ν collides with an electron and transfers its energy. This
leads to the equation for the maximum energy E max of the emitted
electron as
E max = hν − φ 0
where φ 0 is the work function of the metal. If an electron absorbs 2
photons (each of frequency ν), what will be the maximum energy for
the emitted electron?
(ii) Why is this fact (two photon absorption) not taken into consideration
in our discussion of the stopping potential?
Ans. (i) Here it is given that, an electron absorbs 2 photons each of frequency ν then ν′ = 2 ν
where, v′ is the frequency of emitted electron.
Given, Emax = hν − φ0
Now, maximum energy for emitted electrons is
'
Emax = h(2ν) − φ0 = 2 hν − φ0
(ii) The probability of absorbing 2 photons by the same electron is very low. Hence, such
emission will be negligible.
Q. 16 There are materials which absorb photons of shorter wavelength and emit
photons of longer wavelength. Can there be stable substances which
absorb photons of larger wavelength and emit light of shorter wavelength.
Ans. According to first statement, when the materials which absorb photons of shorter
wavelength has the energy of the incident photon on the material is high and the energy of
emitted photon is low when it has a longer wavelength.
But in second statement, the energy of the incident photon is low for the substances which
has to absorb photons of larger wavelength and energy of emitted photon is high to emit
light of shorter wavelength. This means in this statement material has to supply the energy
for the emission of photons.
But this is not possible for a stable substances.
Q. 17 Do all the electrons that absorb a photon come out as photoelectrons?

Ans. In photoelectric effect, we can observe that most electrons get scattered into the metal by
absorbing a photon.
Thus, all the electrons that absorb a photon doesn’t come out as photoelectron. Only a few
come out of metal whose energy becomes greater than the work function of metal.
Q. 18 There are two sources of light, each emitting with a power of 100 W. One
emits X-rays of wavelength 1 nm and the other visible light at 500 nm.
Find the ratio of number of photons of X-rays to the photons of visible
light of the given wavelength?
Ans. Suppose wavelength of X-rays is λ1 and the wavelength of visible light is λ 2 .
Given, P = 100 W
λ1 = 1 nm
and λ 2 = 500 nm
Also, n1 and n2 represents number of photons of X-rays and visible light emitted from the
two sources per sec.
E hc hc
So, = P = n1 = n2
t λ1 λ2
n1 n2
⇒ =
λ1 λ 2
n1 λ 1
⇒ = 1 =
n2 λ 2 500

Q. 19 Consider figure for photoemission. How would you reconcile with
momentum-conservation? Note light (photons) have momentum in a
different direction than the emitted electrons.
electron
light
metal
Ans. During photoelectric emission, the momentum of incident photon is transferred to the
metal. At microscopic level, atoms of a metal absorb the photon and its momentum is
transferred mainly to the nucleus and electrons.
The excited electron is emitted. Therefore, the conservation of momentum is to be
considered as the momentum of incident photon transferred to the nucleus and electrons.
Q. 20 Consider a metal exposed to light of wavelength 600 nm. The maximum

energy of the electron doubles when light of wavelength 400 nm is used.
Find the work function in eV.
K Thinking Process
Maximum energy = hν − φ
Ans. Given,
For the first condition,
Wavelength of light λ = 600 nm
and for the second condition,
Wavelength of light λ′ = 400 nm
Also, maximum kinetic energy for the second condition is equal to the twice of the kinetic
energy in first condition.
i.e., '
Kmax = 2 Kmax
hc
Here, Kmax =
'
−φ
λ
hc
⇒ 2 Kmax = − φ0
λ′
2  − φ =  − φ
1230 1230
⇒ [Qhc ~− 1240eVnm]
 600   400 
1230
⇒ φ= = 102
. eV
1200
Q. 21 Assuming an electron is confined to a 1nm wide region, find the

uncertainty in momentum using Heisenberg uncertainty principle
(∆x × ∆p ≈ h). You can assume the uncertainty in position ∆x as 1 nm.
Assuming p ≈ ∆p, find the energy of the electron in electronvolts.
Ans. Here, ∆x = 1nm = 10−9 m, ∆p = ?
As ∆x ∆p ≈ h
h h
∴ ∆p = =
∆x 2 π∆x
6.62 × 10−34 Js
⇒ =
2 × (22 / 7 ) (10−9 ) m
. × 10−25 kg m/s
= 105
p2 (∆p)2
Energy, E= = [Q p ≈ ∆p]
2m 2m
. × 10−25 )2
(105
= J
. × 10−31
2 × 91
. × 10−25 )2
(105
⇒ = eV
. × 10−31 × 16
2 × 91 . × 10−19
= 3.8 × 10−2 eV.
Q. 22 Two monochromatic beams A and B of equal intensity I, hit a screen. The

number of photons hitting the screen by beam A is twice that by beam B.
Then, what inference can you make about their frequencies?
Ans. Suppose nA is the number of photons falling per second of beam A and nB is the number
of photons falling per second of beam B.
Thus, nA = 2 nB
Energy of falling photon of beam A = hνA
Energy of falling photon of beam B = hνB
Now, according to question,
intensity of A = intensity of B
∴ nA hνA = nB hνB
νA n n 1
⇒ = B = B =
νB nA 2 nB 2
⇒ νB = 2 νA
Thus, from this relation we can infer that frequency of beam B is twice of beam A.
Q. 23 Two particles A and B of de-Broglie wavelengths λ 1 and λ 2 combine to

form a particle C. The process conserves momentum. Find the de-Broglie
wavelength of the particle C. (The motion is one-dimensional)
Ans. Given from conservation of momentum,
|pC| = |pA| + |pB|
h h h  h h h
⇒ = + Q λ = mv = p ⇒ p = λ 
λC λA λB  
h hλ B + hλ A
⇒ =
λC λA λB
λC λA λB λA λB
⇒ = ⇒ λC =
h hλ A + hλ B λA + λB
Case I Suppose both pA and pB are positive,
λA λB
then λC =
λA + λB
Case II When both pA and pB are negative,
λA λB
then λC =
λA + λB
Case III When pA > 0, pB < 0 i.e., pA is positive and pB is negative,
h h h (λ − λ A )h
= − = B
λC λA λB λA λB
λA λB
⇒ λC =
λB − λA
Case IV pA < 0, pB > 0, i.e., pA is negative and pB is positive,
h −h h
∴ = +
λC λA λB
(λ − λ B )h λA λB
⇒ = A ⇒ λC =
λA λB λA − λB
Q. 24 A neutron beam of energy E scatters from atoms on a surface with a

spacing d = 0.1 nm. The first maximum of intensity in the reflected
beam occurs at θ = 30°. What is the kinetic energy E of the beam in eV?
Ans. Given, d = 01
. nm,
θ = 30° ⇒ n = 1
Now, according to Bragg’s law
2d sinθ = nλ ⇒ 2 × 01 . × sin 30 = 1λ
⇒ . nm ⇒ = 10−10 m
λ = 01
h h
Now, λ= =
mv p
h 6.62 × 10−34
⇒ p= =
λ 10−10
⇒ = 6.62 × 10−24 kg-m/s
1 1 m2 v 2 1 p2
Now, KE = mv 2 = =
2 2 m 2 m
1 (6.62 × 10−24 )2
= × J
2 . × 10−27
167
= 0.21eV

Q. 25 Consider a thin target (10 −2 m square, 10 −3 m thickness) of sodium,
which produces a photocurrent of 100 µA when a light of intensity 100
W/m 2 (λ = 660 nm) falls on it. Find the probability that a photoelectron
is produced when a photon strikes a sodium atom.
[Take density of Na = 0.97 kg/m 3 ]
K Thinking Process
Absorption of two photons by an atom depends on the probability of photoemission by
a single photon on a single atom.
Ans. Given, A = 10−2 m 2 = 10−2 × 10−2 m 2
⇒ = 10−4 m 2
d = 10−3 m
i = 100 × 10−6 A = 10−4 A
Intensity, I = 100 W/m 2
⇒ λ = 660 nm = 660 × 10−9 m
ρNa = 0.97 kg/m 3
Avogadro’s number = 6 × 1026 kg atom
Volume of sodium target = A × d
= 10−4 × 10−3
⇒ = 10−7 m 3
We know that 6 × 10 atoms of Na weights = 23 kg
26
23
So, volume of 6 × 10 Na atoms =
6
m3.
0.97
23
Volume occupied by one Na atom = = 3.95 × 10−26 m 3
0.97 × (6 × 1026 )
Number of Na atoms in target ( n Na)
10−7
= = 2.53 × 1018
3.95 × 10−26
Let n be the number of photons falling per second on the target.
Energy of each photon = hc / λ
nhc
Total energy falling per second on target = = IA
λ
IAλ
∴ n=
hc
100 × 10−4 × (660 × 10−9 )
⇒ = = 3.3 × 1016
(6.62 × 10−34 ) × (3 × 108 )
Let P be the probability of emission per atom per photon.
The number of photoelectrons emitted per second
N = P × n × ( n Na )
= P × (3.3 × 1016 ) × (2.53 × 1018 )
Now, according to question,
i = 100 µA = 100 × 10−6 = 10−4 A.
Current, i = Ne
∴ 10−4 = P × (3.3 × 1016 ) × (2.53 × 1018 ) × (16
. × 10−19 )
10−4
⇒ P=
. × 10−19 )
(3.3 × 10 ) × (2.53 × 1018 ) × (16
16
= 7.48 × 10−21
Thus, the probability of emission by a single photon on a single atom is very much less than
1. It is due to this reason, the absorption of two photons by an atom is negligible.
Q. 26 Consider an electron in front of metallic surface at a distance d (treated

as an infinite plane surface). Assume the force of attraction by the plate
1 q2
is given as . Calculate work in taking the charge to an infinite
4 4 πε 0 d 2
distance from the plate. Taking d = 0.1 nm, find the work done in
electron volts. [Such a force law is not valid for d < 0.1 nm]
K Thinking Process
1 1 ∞ q2
4 πε 0 4 ∫0 x2
Work done by an external agency = + . dx
Ans. According to question, consider the figure given below

. nm = 10−10 m,
From figure, d = 01
q2
F=
4 × 4πε0d 2
d=0.1 nm
Let the electron be at distance x from metallic surface. Then, force of attraction on it is
q2
Fx =
4 × 4πε0 x 2
Work done by external agency in taking the electron from distance d to infinity is
∞ ∞ q 2dx 1
W = ∫ Fx dx = ∫
d d 4 × 4 πε x 2
0
q2  1
=
4 × 4 πε0  d 
. × 10−19 )2 × 9 × 109
(16
= J
4 × 10−10
. × 10−19 )2 × (9 × 109 )
(16
= eV = 3.6 eV
(4 × 10−10 ) × (16
. × 10−19 )
Q. 27 A student performs an experiment on photoelectric effect, using two

materials A and B. A plot of Vstop versus v is given in figure.
VStop
(V) A B
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
5 × 1014 10 × 1014 15 × 1014

Frequency (Hz)
(i) Which material A or B has a higher work function?
. × 10 −19 C, find the value
(ii) Given the electric charge of an electron = 16
of h obtained from the experiment for both A and B.
Comment on whether it is consistent with Einstein’s theory.
Ans. (i) Given, thresholed frequency of A is given by νOA = 5 × 1014 Hz and
For B, νOB = 10 × 1014 Hz
We know that
Work function, φ = hν0 or φ0 ∝ ν0
⇒ φ0 ∝ ν0
φOA 5 × 1014
So, = <1
φOB 10 × 1014
⇒ φOA < φOB
Thus, work function of B is higher than A.
h 2
(ii) For metal A, slope = =
e (10 − 5)1014
2e . × 10−19
2 × 16
or h= =
5 × 1014 5 × 1014
−34
= 6.4 × 10 Js
h 2.5
For metal B, slope = =
e (15 − 10)1014
2.5 × e . × 10−19
2.5 × 16
or h= =
5 × 10 14
5 × 1014
= 8 × 10−34 Js
Since, the value of h from experiment for metals A and B is different. Hence, experiment is
not consistent with theory.
Q. 28 A particle A with a mass m A is moving with a velocity v and hits a particle

B (mass mB ) at rest (one dimensional motion). Find the change in the
de-Broglie wavelength of the particle A. Treat the collision as elastic.
Ans. As collision is elastic, hence laws of conservation of momentum and kinetic energy are
obeyed.
According to law of conservation of momentum,
mA v + mB 0 = mA v1 + mB v 2
⇒ mA (v − v1 ) = mB v 2
According to law of conservation of kinetic energy,
1 1 1
mA v 2 = mA v12 + mB v 22 ...(i)
2 2 2
⇒ mA (v − v12 ) = mB v 22
⇒ mA (v − v1 )(v + v1 ) = mB v 2 2 ...(ii)
Dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. (i),
we get, v + v1 = v 2 or v = v 2 − v1 ...(iii)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (iii), we get
 m − mB   2 mA 
v1 =  A  v and v 2 =   v
 mA + mB   mA + mB 
h
λ initial =
mA v
h h(mA + mB )
λ final = =
mA v1 mA (mA − mB )v
h  mA + mB 
∆λ = λ final − λ initial =  − 1
mA v  mA − mB 
Q. 29 Consider a 20 W bulb emitting light of wavelength 5000 Å and shining on

a metal surface kept at a distance 2 m. Assume that the metal surface
has work function of 2 eV and that each atom on the metal surface can
be treated as a circular disk of radius 1.5 Å.
(i) Estimate number of photons emitted by the bulb per second.
[Assume no other losses]
(ii) Will there be photoelectric emission?
(iii) How much time would be required by the atomic disk to receive energy
equal to work function (2 eV)?
(iv) How many photons would atomic disk receive within time duration
calculated in (iii) above?
(v) Can you explain how photoelectric effect was observed instantaneously?
Ans. Given, P = 20 W, λ = 5000 Å = 5000 × 10−10 m
d = 2 m, φ0 = 2 eV, r = 15 . × 10−10 m
. A = 15
p pλ
(i) Number of photon emitted by bulb per second is n′ = =
hc / λ hc
20 × (5000 × 10−10 )
=
(6.62 × 10−34 ) × (3 × 108 )
⇒ = 5 × 1019 s −1
hc (6.62 × 10−34 ) (3 × 108 )

(ii) Energy of the incident photon = =
λ 5000 × 10−10 × 16 . × 10−19
= 2.48 eV
As this energy is greater than 2 eV (i.e., work function of metal surface), hence
photoelectric emission takes place.
r
p
(iii) Let ∆t be the time spent in getting the energy φ = (work function of metal).
Consider the figure,
P
× π r 2 ∆ t = φ0
4 πd 2
4φ0d 2
⇒ ∆t =
Pr 2
. × 10−19 ) × 2 2
4 × (2 × 16
= ≈ 28.4s
. × 10−10 )2
20 × (15
(iv) Number of photons received by atomic disc in time ∆t is
n′ × πr 2
N= × ∆t
4 πd 2
n′ r 2 ∆t
⇒ =
4d 2
. × 10−10 )2 × 28.4
(5 × 1019 ) × (15
= ≈2
4 × (2 )2
(v) As time of emission of electrons is 11.04 s.
Hence, the photoelectric emission is not instantaneous in this problem.
In photoelectric emission, there is an collision between incident photon and free electron
of the metal surface, which lasts for very very short interval of time (≈ 10−9 s ), hence we
say photoelectric emission is instantaneous.
12
Atoms
Q. 1 Taking the Bohr radius as a 0 = 53 pm, the radius of Li ++ ion in its ground
state, on the basis of Bohr’s model, will be about
(a) 53 pm (b) 27 pm
(c) 18 pm (d) 13 pm
K Thinking Process
Since, the radii of the orbits increase inversely as atomic number Z i.e.,
1
r∝ .
Z
Ans. (c) The atomic number of lithium is 3, therefore, the radius of Li + + ion in its ground state,
1
on the basis of Bohr’s model, will be about times to that of Bohr radius.
3
53
Therefore, the radius of lithium ion is near ≈ 18 pm.
3
Q. 2 The binding energy of a H-atom, considering an electron moving around a

fixed nuclei (proton), is
me 4
B=− (m = electron mass)
8n 2ε 20 h 2
If one decides to work in a frame of reference where the electron is at
rest, the proton would be moving around it. By similar arguments, the
binding energy would be
Me 4
B = − 2 2 2 (M = proton mass)
8n ε 0 h
Atoms 199
This last expression is not correct, because

(a) n would not be integral
(b) Bohr-quantisation applies only two electron
(c) the frame in which the electron is at rest is not inertial
(d) the motion of the proton would not be in circular orbits, even approximately.
K Thinking Process
The electron revolves uniformly around nucleus have certain centripetal acceleration
associated with it.
Ans. (c) When one decides to work in a frame of reference where the electron is at rest, the
given expression is not true as it forms the non- inertial frame of reference.
Q. 3 The simple Bohr model cannot be directly applied to calculate the energy
levels of an atom with many electrons. This is because
(a) of the electrons not being subject to a central force
(b) of the electrons colliding with each other
(c) of screening effects
(d) the force between the nucleus and an electron will no longer be given by
Coulomb’s law
K Thinking Process
The electrostatic force of attraction between electron and nucleus is a central force
which provide necessary centripetal force for circular motion of electron.
Ans. (a) The simple Bohr model cannot be directly applied to calculate the energy levels of an
atom with many electrons. This is because of the electrons not being subject to a
central force.
Q. 4 For the ground state, the electron in the H-atom has an angular
momentum = h, according to the simple Bohr model. Angular momentum
is a vector and hence there will be infinitely many orbits with the vector
pointing in all possible directions. In actuality, this is not true,
(a) because Bohr model gives incorrect values of angular momentum
(b) because only one of these would have a minimum energy
(c) angular momentum must be in the direction of spin of electron
(d) because electrons go around only in horizontal orbits
K Thinking Process
Bohr’s second postulate defines these stable orbits. This postulate states that the electron
revolves around the nucleus only in those orbits for which the angular momentum is
h
some integral multiple of where h is the Planck’s constant (= 6.6 × 10 −34 J-s).
2π
Ans (a) In the simple Bohr model, only the magnitude of angular momentum is kept equal to
h
some integral multiple of , where, h is Planck’s constant and thus, the Bohr model
2π
gives incorrect values of angular momentum.
Q. 5 O2 molecule consists of two oxygen atoms. In the molecule, nuclear force

between the nuclei of the two atoms
(a) is not important because nuclear forces are short-ranged
(b) is as important as electrostatic force for binding the two atoms
(c) cancels the repulsive electrostatic force between the nuclei
(d) is not important because oxygen nucleus have equal number of neutrons and
protons
K Thinking Process
The nuclear force is much stronger than the Coulomb force acting between charges or
the gravitational forces between masses. The nuclear binding force has to dominate over
the Coulomb repulsive force between protons inside the nucleus.
This happens only because the nuclear force is much stronger than the Coulomb force.
The nuclear force between two nucleons falls rapidly to zero as their distance is more
than a few femtometres.
Ans. (a) In the molecules, nuclear force between the nuclei of the two atoms is not important
because nuclear forces are short-ranged.
Q. 6 Two H atoms in the ground state collide inelastically. The maximum

amount by which their combined kinetic energy is reduced is
(a) 10.20 eV (b) 20.40 eV (c) 13.6 eV (d) 27.2 eV
K Thinking Process
The lowest state of the atom, called the ground state, is that of the lowest energy, with
the electron revolving in the orbit of smallest radius, the Bohr radius, a 0. The energy of
this state (n =1), E 1 is −13.6 eV.
Ans. (a) The total energy associated with the two H-atoms in the ground state collide in
elastically = 2 × (13.6 eV) = 27.2 eV.
The maximum amount by which their combined kinetic energy is reduced when any
one of them goes into first excited state after the inelastic collision.
The total energy associated with the two H-atoms after the collision
=  2  + (13.6) = 17.0 eV
13.6
 2 
Therefore, maximum loss of their combined kinetic energy
= 27.2 − 17.0 = 10.2 eV
Q. 7 A set of atoms in an excited state decays

(a) in general to any of the states with lower energy
(b) into a lower state only when excited by an external electric field
(c) all together simultaneously into a lower state
(d) to emit photons only when they collide
K Thinking Process
The electron of atoms in excited states can fall back to a state of lower energy, emitting a
photon in the process.
Ans. (a) A set of atoms in an excited state decays in general to any of the states with lower
energy.
Atoms 201

Q. 8 An ionised H-molecule consists of an electron and two protons. The
protons are separated by a small distance of the order of angstrom. In the
ground state.
(a) the electron would not move in circular orbits
(b) the energy would be (2) 4 times that of a H-atom
(c) the electrons, orbit would go around the protons
(d) the molecule will soon decay in a proton and a H-atom
K Thinking Process
A hydrogen molecule contain two electrons and two protons whereas ionised
H-molecule consists of an electron and two protons.
Ans. (a, c)
The protons are separated by a small distance of the order of angstrom. In the ground state
the electron would not move in circular orbits the electrons, orbit would go around the
protons.
Q. 9 Consider aiming a beam of free electrons towards free protons. When they
scatter, an electron and a proton cannot combine to produce a H-atom.
(a) Because of energy conservation
(b) Without simultaneously releasing energy in the form of radiation
(c) Because of momentum conservation
(d) Because of angular momentum conservation
Ans. (a, b)
When beam of free electrons is aiming towards free protons. Then, they scatter but an
electron and a proton cannot combine to produce a H-atom because of energy
conservation and without simultaneously releasing energy in the form of radiation.
Q. 10 The Bohr model for the spectra of a H-atom

(a) will not be applicable to hydrogen in the molecular from
(b) will not be applicable as it is for a He-atom
(c) is valid only at room temperature
(d) predicts continuous as well as discrete spectral lines
K Thinking Process
Niel’s Bohr proposed a model for hydrogenic (single electron) atoms in order to explain
the line spectra emitted by atoms, as well as the stability of atoms.
Ans. (a, b)
The Bohr model for the spectra of a H-atom will not be applicable to hydrogen in the
molecular form. And also, it will not be applicable as it is for a He-atom.
Q. 11 The Balmer series for the H-atom can be observed

(a) if we measure the frequencies of light emitted when an excited atom falls to the
ground state
(b) if we measure the frequencies of light emitted due to transitions between
excited states and the first excited state
(c) in any transition in a H-atom
(d) as a sequence of frequencies with the higher frequencies getting closely packed
K Thinking Process
The various lines in the atomic spectra are produced when electrons jump from higher
energy state to a lower energy state and photons are emitted. These spectral lines are
called emission lines.
Ans. (b, d)
Balmer series for the H-atom can be observed if we measure the frequencies of light emitted
due to transitions between higher excited states and the first excited state and as a
sequence of frequencies with the higher frequencies getting closely packed.
−1 me 4
Q. 12 Let E n = be the energy of the nth level of H-atom. If all the
8ε 20 n 2h 2
(E2 − E 1 )
H-atoms are in the ground state and radiation of frequency
h
falls on it,
(a) it will not be absorbed at all
(b) some of atoms will move to the first excited state
(c) all atoms will be excited to the n = 2 state
(d) no atoms will make a transition to the n = 3 state
K Thinking Process
When an atom absorbs a photon that has precisely the same energy needed by the
electron in a lower energy state to make transitions to a higher energy state, the process
is called absorption.
Ans. (b, d)
(E2 − E1 )
When all the H-atoms are in the ground state and radiation of frequency falls on it,
h
some of atoms will move to the first excited state and no atoms will make a transition to the
n = 3 state.
Q. 13 The simple Bohr model is not applicable to He 4 atom because

(a) He4 is an inert gas
(b) He4 has neutrons in the nucleus
(c) He4 has one more electron
(d) electrons are not subject to central forces
K Thinking Process
Neil’s Bohr proposed a model for hydrogenic (single electron) atoms in order to explain
the line spectra emitted by atoms, as well as the stability of atoms.
Ans. (c, d)
The simple Bohr model is not applicable to He 4 atom because He 4 has one more electron
and electrons are not subject to central forces.
Atoms 203

Q.14 The mass of a H-atom is less than the sum of the masses of a proton and
electron. Why is this?
K Thinking Process
Einstein showed that mass is another form of energy and one can convert mass-energy
into other forms of energy, say kinetic energy and vice-versa. Einstein gave the famous
mass-energy equivalence relation E = mc2 where the energy equivalent of mass m is
related by the above equation and c is the velocity of light.
Ans. Since, the difference in mass of a nucleus and its constituents, ∆M, is called the mass
defect and is given by
∆M = [Zmp + ( A − Z )mn ] − M
Also, the binding energy is given by B= mass defect (∆M) × c 2 .
Thus, the mass of a H-atom is
B
mp + me − 2 , where B ≈ 13.6 eV is the binding energy.
c
Q. 15 Imagine removing one electron from He 4 and He 3 . Their energy levels, as

worked out on the basis of Bohr model will be very close. Explain why?
K Thinking Process
Neil’s Bohr proposed a model for hydrogenic (single electron) atoms in order to explain
the stability of atoms.
Ans. On removing one electron from He 4 and He 3 , the energy levels, as worked out on the basis
of Bohr model will be very close as both the nuclei are very heavy as compared to electron
mass.Also after removing one electron from He 4 and He 3 atoms contain one electron and
are hydrogen like atoms.
Q. 16 When an electron falls from a higher energy to a lower energy level, the
difference in the energies appears in the form of electromagnetic
radiation. Why cannot it be emitted as other forms of energy?
K Thinking Process
The accelerated electron produces electric as well as magnetic field hence
electromagnetic energy.
Ans. The transition of an electron from a higher energy to a lower energy level can appears in
the form of electromagnetic radiation because electrons interact only electromagnetically.
Q. 17 Would the Bohr formula for the H-atom remain unchanged if proton had
a charge (+ 4/3)e and electron a charge (−3/4)e, where e = 1.6 × 10 −19 C.
Give reasons for your answer.
K Thinking Process
The electrostatic force of attraction between positively charged nucleus and negatively
charged electrons provides necessary centripetal force of revolution. Also, the magnitude
of electrostatic force F ∝ q1 q2.
Ans. If proton had a charge (+4/ 3) e and electron a charge (−3/ 4) e, then the Bohr formula for the
H-atom remain same, since the Bohr formula involves only the product of the charges
which remain constant for given values of charges.
Q. 18 Consider two different hydrogen atoms. The electron in each atom is in

an excited state. Is it possible for the electrons to have different
energies but the same orbital angular momentum according to the Bohr
model?
K Thinking Process
Bohr’s postulate states that the electron revolves around the nucleus only in those orbits
h
for which the angular momentum is some integral multiple of , where h is Planck’s
2π
constant (= 6.6 ⋅10 −34 J-s). Thus, the angular momentum (L) of the orbiting electron is
quantised. i.e.,
nh
L=
2π
Ans. According to Bohr model electrons having different energies belong to different levels
having different values of n. So, their angular momenta will be different, as
nh
L= or L ∝ n
2π

Q. 19 Positronium is just like a H-atom with the proton replaced by the
positively charged anti-particle of the electron (called the positron
which is as massive as the electron). What would be the ground state
energy of positronium?
K Thinking Process
The reduced mass m of two particle system of masses m1 and m2 is given by
1 1 1
= +
m m1 m2
Ans. The total energy of the electron in the stationary states of the hydrogen atom is given by
me 4
En = − 2 2 2
8n ε0 h
where signs are as usual and the m that occurs in the Bohr formula is the reduced mass of
electron and proton. Also, the total energy of the electron in the ground state of the
hydrogen atom is −13.6 eV.For H-atom reduced mass me . Whereas for positronium, the
reduced mass is
m
m≈ e
2
Hence, the total energy of the electron in the ground state of the positronium atom is
−13.6 eV
= −6.8 eV
2
Atoms 205
Q. 20 Assume that there is no repulsive force between the electrons in an

atom but the force between positive and negative charges is given by
Coulomb’s law as usual. Under such circumstances, calculate the ground
state energy of a He-atom.
K Thinking Process
The total energy of the electron in the nth stationary states of the hydrogen. Atom of
hydrogen like atom of atomic number Z is given by
−13.6 eV
E n = Z2
n2
Ans. For a He -nucleus with charge 2e and electrons of charge − e, the energy level in ground
state is
−13.6eV −13.6eV
En = Z 2 = 22 = − 54.4eV
n2 12
Thus, the ground state will have two electrons each of energy E and the total ground state
energy would be −(4 × 13.6)eV = −54.4eV.
Q. 21 Using Bohr model, calculate the electric current created by the electron
when the H-atom is in the ground state.
K Thinking Process
q  1
The electric current due to revolution of charge is given by i = = Q   = Q × n, where
T T 
n is frequency.
Ans. The electron in Hydrogen atom in ground state revolves on a circular path whose radius is
equal to the Bohr radius (an ). Let the velocity of electron is v.
2 πa0
∴ Number of revolutions per unit time =
v
q
The electric current is given by i = , if q charge flows in time t. Here, q = e
t
2 πa0
The electric current is given by i = e.
v
Q. 22 Show that the first few frequencies of light that is emitted when
electrons fall to nth level from levels higher than n, arc approximate
harmonics (i.e., in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3 K) when n >> 1.
K Thinking Process
The problem is based on the explanation of spectrum of hydrogen atom.
Ans. The frequency of any line in a series in the spectrum of hydrogen like atoms corresponding
to the transition of electrons from (n + p) level to nth level can be expressed as a difference
of two terms;
 1 1
v mn = cRZ 2  − 2
 (n + p)
2
n 
where, m = n + p, ( p = 1, 2, 3, K) and R is Rydberg constant.
For p << n
1 −2
1
v mn = cRZ 2  2  1 +  − 2 
p
 n  n n 
v mn = cRZ 2  2 − 3 − 2 
1 2p 1
 n n n 
[By binomial theorem (1 + x )n = 1 + nx if|x| < 1]
2 p  2cRZ 2 
v mn = cRZ 2 3 ~  3
 p
n  n 
Thus, the first few frequencies of light that is emitted when electrons fall to the nth level
from levels higher than n , are approximate harmonic (i.e., in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3 …) when
n >> 1.
Q. 23 What is the minimum energy that must be given to a H-atom in ground

state so that it can emit an H γ line in Balmer series? If the angular
momentum of the system is conserved, what would be the angular
momentum of such H γ photon?
K Thinking Process
The third line in Balmer series in the spectrum of hydrogen atom is Hg.
Ans. Hγ in Balmer series corresponds to transition n = 5 to n = 2. So, the electron in ground state
i.e., from n = 1must first be placed in state n = 5.
Energy required for the transition from n = 2 to n = 5 is given by
= E1 − E5 = 13.6 − 0.54 = 13.06 eV
Since, angular momentum is conserved,
angular momentum coresponding to Hg photon = change in angular momentum of
electron
= L5 − L2 = 5h − 2 h = 3h = 3 × 1.06 × 10−34
= 3.18 × 10−34 kg-m2/s

Q. 24 The first four spectral in the Lyman series of a H-atom are λ = 1218Å,
1028Å, 974.3Å and 951.4Å. If instead of Hydrogen, we consider
deuterium, calculate the shift in the wavelength of these lines.
K Thinking Process
The reduced mass m of two particle system of masses m1 and m2 is given by
1 1 1
= + .
m m1 m2
Ans. The total energy of the electron in the stationary states of the hydrogen atom is given by
me 4
En = − 2 2 2
8n ε0 h
where signs are as usual and the m that occurs in the Bohr formula is the reduced mass of
electron and proton in hydrogen atom.
Atoms 207
By Bohr’s model,
hνif = En − En f
i
On simplifying,
me 4  1 1
νif =  − 2 
2 3  2
8ε0 h  nf ni 
1
Since, λ∝
µ
1
Thus, λ if ∝ …(i)
µ
where µ is the reduced mass. (here, µ is used in place of m)
; me  1 − e 
me m
Reduced mass for H = µH =
me  M
1+
M
D = µ D; me  1 − e 
m
Reduced mass for
 2M 
 m  m 
= me  1 − e   1 + e 
 2 M  2 M
λ
If for hydrogen deuterium, the wavelength is H
λD
−1
λD µ H  m   1 
= ~ 1 + e  ~ 1 −  [From Eq. (i)]
λH λD  2M   2 × 1840 
λ D = λ H × (0.99973)
On substituting the values, we have
Thus, lines are 1217.7Å, 1027.7Å, 974.04Å, 951.143Å.
Q. 25 Deutrium was discovered in 1932 by Harold Urey by measuring the small

change in wavelength for a particular transition in 1 H and 2 H. This is
because, the wavelength of transition depend to a certain extent on the
nuclear mass. If nuclear motion is taken into account, then the electrons
and nucleus revolve around their common centre of mass.
Such a system is equivalent to a single particle with a reduced mass µ,
revolving around the nucleus at a distance equal to the electron-nucleus
separation. Here µ = m e M / (m e + M), where M is the nuclear mass and
m e is the electronic mass. Estimate the percentage difference in
wavelength for the 1st line of the Lyman series in 1H and 2H. (mass of
1
H nucleus is 1.6725 × 10 −27 kg, mass of 2H nucleus is 3.3374 × 10 −27
kg, Mass of electron = 9.109 × 10 −31 kg.)
K Thinking Process
The percentage difference in wavelength is given by
∆λ λ D − λ H
100 × = × 100, where signs are as usual.
λH λH
Ans. The total energy of the electron in the nth states of the hydrogen like atom of atomic
number Z is given by
µ Z 2e 4  1 
En = −  
8ε20 h2  n2 
where signs are as usual and the µ that occurs in the Bohr formula is the reduced mass of
electron and proton .
Let µ H be the reduced mass of hydrogen and µ D that of Deutrium. Then, the frequency of
µ e4 µ e4 3
the 1st Lyman line in hydrogen is hνH = H2 2  1 −  = H2 2 × .
1
8ε0 h  4  8εο h 4
3 µ H e4
Thus, the wavelength of the transition is λ H = . The wavelength of the transition for
4 8 ε20 h3c
3 µ De 4
the same line in Deutrium is λ D = .
4 8ε20 h3c
∴ ∆λ = λ D − λ H
Hence, the percentage difference is
∆λ λ D − λ H µ − µH
100 × = × 100 = D × 100
λH λH µH
me M D me M H
−
(me + M D ) (me − M H )
= × 100
me M H
(me + M H )
 m + MH  MD 
=  e  − 1 × 100

 em + M D  M H 
Since, me << M H << M D
  1 + me  
M   
∆λ M M
× 100 =  H × D H  − 1 × 100
λH  M D M H  1 + me  
   
  M D  
   
−1   
m m m m
=   1 + e   1 + e  − 1 × 100 ~ 1 + e − e − 1 × 100
 MH   MD    MH MD 
 
[By binomial theorem, (1 + x )n = 1 + nx is|x | < 1]
 1 1 
≈ me  −  × 100
M
 H M D
 1 1 
= 9.1 × 10−31  −27
− −27 
× 100
 1.6725 × 10 3.3374 × 10 
= 9.1 × 10−4 [0.5979 − 0.2996] × 100
= 2.714 × 10−2 %
Atoms 209
Q. 26 If a proton had a radius R and the charge was uniformly distributed,

calculate using Bohr theory, the ground state energy of a H-atom when
(i) R = 0.1Å and(ii) R = 10Å.
K Thinking Process
In this problem, expressions are to be derived in two cases namely for a point nucleus in
H-atom and for an spherical nucleus of radius R.
Ans. The electrostatic force of attraction between positively charged nucleus and negatively
charged electrons (Coulombian force) provides necessary centripetal force of revolution.
mv 2 e2 1
=− 2 ⋅
rB rB 4 πε0
By Bohr’s postulates in ground state, we have
mvr = h
On solving,
h2 1  e2  1
∴ m 2 2 ⋅ = +   2
m rB rB  4 πε0  rB
h2 4 πε0
∴ ⋅ = rB = 0.51Å [This is Bohr’s radius]
m e2
The potential energy is given by
 e2  1 mv 2
−   ⋅ = − 27.2eV; KE =
 4 πr0  rB 2
1 h2 h
= m⋅ 2 2 = = + 13.6 eV
2 m rB 2 mrB2
Now, for an spherical nucleus of radius R,
If R < rB , same result.
If R >> rB the electron moves inside the sphere with radius rB′ (r ′B = new Bohr radius).
 r ′3 
Charge inside rB′4 = e  B3 
R 
h2  4πε0  R 3
∴ r ′B =  
m  e 2  rB′3
r ′B4 = (0.51Å ) ⋅ R 3 [R = 10Å]
= 510(Å ) 4
∴ r ′B ~ (510) 1/ 4
Å<R
1 m h h 1
KE = mv 2 = ⋅ 2 2 = ⋅
2 2 m rB′ 2 m rB′2
 h2  r2  (0.51)2 3.54
= ⋅  B2  = (13.6 eV)
 = = 0.16 eV
 2 mr 2  rB′  (510)1/ 2 22.6
 B
 e 2   r ′2B − 3R 2 
PE = +   ⋅  

 4 π ε0   2 R
3

 e2 1   r (r ′2 − 3R 2 )  0.51( 510 − 300)
= +  ⋅  ⋅  B B 3  = + (27.2eV)
 
 4 πε0 rB   R   1000 
−141
= + (27.2eV) ⋅ = −3.83 eV
1000
Q. 27 In the Auger process, an atom makes a transition to a lower state

without emitting a photon. The excess energy is transferred to an outer
electron which may be ejected by the atom (This is called an Auger,
electron). Assuming the nucleus to be massive, calculate the kinetic
energy of an n = 4 Auger electron emitted by Chromium by absorbing the
energy from a n = 2 to n = 1 transition.
K Thinking Process
As the nucleus is massive, recoil momentum of the atom may be neglected and the
entire energy of the transition may be considered transferred to the Auger electron. As
there is a single valence electron in Cr, the energy states may be thought of as given by
the Bohr model.
1
Ans. The energy of the nth state En = − Z 2R where R is the Rydberg constant and Z = 24.
n2
The energy released in a transition from 2 to 1 is ∆E = Z 2 R  1 −  = Z 2 R.
1 3
 4 4
1
The energy required to eject a n = 4 electron is E4 = Z 2 R .
16
Thus, the kinetic energy of the Auger electron is
KE = Z 2 R  −  =
3 1 1 2
Z R
 4 16  16
11
= × 24 × 24 × 13.6eV
16
= 5385.6eV
e2
Q. 28 The inverse square law in electrostatic is | F | = for the force
(4πε 0 )r 2
 1
between an electron and a proton. The   dependence of | F | can be
r 
understood in quantum theory as being due to the fact that the particle
of light (photon) is massless. If photons had a mass m p , force would be
e2 1 λ m pc
modified to | F| = 2  2
+  ⋅ exp(−λr ) where λ = and
(4 πε 0 )r  r r  h
h
h = . Estimate the change in the ground state energy of a H-atom if
2π
m p were 10 −6 times the mass of an electron.
Ans. For mp = 10−6 times, the mass of an electron, the energy associated with it is given by
mp c 2 = 10−6 × electron mass × c 2
≈ 10−6 × 0.5 MeV
≈ 10−6 × 0.5 × 1.6 × 10−13
≈ 0.8 × 10−19 J
Atoms 211
The wavelength associated with is given by

h hc 10−34 × 3 × 108
= =
mp c mp c 2
0.8 × 10−19
≈ 4 × 10−7m >> Bohr radius
e2  1 λ
|F| = +  exp(−λr )
4 πε0  r 2 r 
h
where, λ −1 = ≈ 4 × 10−7m >> rB
mp c
1
∴ λ << i.e., λrB << 1
rB
e 2 exp(−λr )
U( r ) = − ⋅
4πε0 r
h
mvr = h ∴ v =
mr
mv 2  e2   1 λ
Also, = ≈   2 + 
 π ε 
 r 
r 4 0 r
h2  e2   1 λ
∴ =   2 + 
 4 πε0   r r 
3
mr
h2  e 2 
∴ =  [r + πr 2
m  4 πεo 
h 4 πε
If λ = 0; r = rB = ⋅ 2 0
m e
h2 e2
= ⋅ rB
m 4 π ε0
Since, λ −1 >> rB , put r = rB + δ
∴ rB = rB + δ + λ(rB2 + δ 2 + 2δrB ); neglect δ 2
or 0 = λrB2 + δ(1 + 2 λrB )
−λrB2
δ= ≈ λrB2 (1 − 2 λrB ) = − λrB2
1 + 2 λrB
Since, λrB << 1
e 2 exp(−λδ − λrB )
∴ V(r ) = − ⋅
4πε0 rB + δ
e 2 1  δ 
∴ V(r ) = −   1 −  ⋅ (1 − λrB )
4 πε0 rB   rB  
= (−27.2eV)remains unchanged
~
1 1 h2 h2 h2  2δ 
KE = − mv 2 = m ⋅ 2 = = 2 1 − 
2 2 mr 2(rB + δ)2
2 rB  rB 
= (13.6eV)[1 + 2 λrB ]
e2 h2
Total energy =− + 2 [1 + 2 λrB ]
4 πε0 rB 2 rB
= − 27.2 + 13.6[1 + 2 λrB ] eV
Change in energy = 13.6 × 2 λrB eV = 27.2 λrB eV
Q. 29 The Bohr model for the H-atom relies on the Coulomb’s law of
electrostatics. Coulomb’s law has not directly been verified for very short
distances of the order of angstroms. Supposing Coulomb’s law between
two opposite charge + q 1 , − q2 is modified to
q q 1
|F | = 1 2 2 , r ≥ R0
(4 πε 0 ) r
ε
q 1q2 1  R 0 
=   , r ≤ R0
4 πε 0 R 20  r 
Calculate in such a case, the ground state energy of a H-atom, if E = 0.1,
R 0 = 1Å.
K Thinking Process
The question offers hypothetical situation in dealing with the total energy of the electron
of hydrogen atom.
Ans. Considering the case, when r ≤ R 0 = 1 Å
Let ε = 2 + δ
qq Rδ
F = 1 2 ⋅ 2 +0 δ
4πε0 r
q1q 2
where, = (1.6 × 10−19 )2 × 9 × 109
4π 0 ε0
= 23.04 × 10−29N m2
The electrostatic force of attraction between positively charged nucleus and negatively
charged electrons (Coulombian force) provides necessary centripetal force.
mv 2 ∧R δ
= or v 2 = 1 +0 δ …(i)
r mr
1/ 2
nh nh  m  1/ 2 + δ / 2
mvr = nh ⋅ r = =  δ r
mv m  ∧R 0 
[Applying Bohr’s second postulates]
1
 n h2 2 1 − δ
Solving this for r, we get rn =  δ
 m ∧ R0 
where, rn is radius of nth orbit of electron.
For n = 1and substituting the values of constant, we get
1
 h 2 1 − δ
r1 =  δ
 m ∧ R0 
1
 1.052 × 10−68  2.9
r1 =  −31 −28 +19 
 9.1 × 10 × 2.3 × 10 × 10 
= 8 × 10−11
= 0.08 nm (< 01
. nm)
This is the radius of orbit of electron in ground state of hydrogen atom.
Atoms 213
1
nh  m ∧ Rδ  1 − δ
vn = = nh 2 2 0  .
mrn  n h 
h
For n = 1, v1 − = 1.44 × 106 m/s
mr1
[This is the speed of electron in ground state]
1
KE = mv12 − 9.43 × 10−19 J = 5.9eV
2
[This is the KE of electron in ground state]
∧
PE till R 0 = − [This is the PE of electron in ground state at r = R 0 ]
R0
∧R 0δ  1 
r
r dr
PE from R 0 to r = + ∧ R 0δ ∫R =+
0 r2 + δ
−1 − δ  r1 + δ  R 0
[This is the PE of electron in ground state at R 0 to r]
 1
∧R 0δ 1  ∧  R 0δ 1
=−  1+ δ − 1+ δ  = −  1+ δ − 
1 + δ  r R 0  1 + δ r R0 
∧  R 0δ 1 1 + δ
PE = −  − + 
1 + δ  r1 + δ R 0 R0 
∧  R 0−1.9 1.9 
PE = −  − 
− 0.9  r −0.9 R0 
2.3
= × 10−18 [(0.8)0.9 − 1.9]J = − 17.3 eV
0.9
Total energy is (−17.3 + 5.9) = −11.4 eV
This is the required TE of electron in ground state.
13
Nuclei
Q. 1 Suppose we consider a large number of containers each containing
initially 10000 atoms of a radioactive material with a half life of 1 yr.
After 1 yr,
(a) all the containers will have 5000 atoms of the material
(b) all the containers will contain the same number of atoms of the material but that
number will only be approximately 5000
(c) the containers will in general have different numbers of the atoms of the
material but their average will be close to 5000
(d) none of the containers can have more than 5000 atoms
K Thinking Process
ln2
T 12/ = , λ → decay constant.
λ
Ans. (c) Radioactivity is a process due to which a radioactive material spontaneously decays.
In half-life (t=1yr) of the material on the average half the number of atoms will decay.
Therefore, the containers will in general have different number of atoms of the material,
but their average will be approx 5000.
Q. 2 The gravitational force between a H-atom and another particle of mass m

will be given by Newton’s law
M.m
F = G 2 , where r is in km and
r
(a) M = mproton + melectron
B
(b) M = mproton + melectron − ( B = 13.6 eV).
c2
(c) M is not relate to the mass of the hydrogen atom.
|V |
(d) M = mproton + melectron − 2 (|V| = magnitude of the potential energy of
c
electron in the H-atom.
Nuclei 215
GMm
Ans (b) Given, F =
r2
M = effective mass of hydrogen atom
B2
= mass of electron + mass of proton −
C
where B is BE of hydrogen atom = 13.6 eV.
Q. 3 When a nucleus in an atom undergoes a radioactive decay, the electronic

energy levels of the atom
(a) do not change for any type of radioactivity
(b) change for α and β-radioactivity but not for γ-radioactivity
(c) change for α-radioactivity but not for others
(d) change for β-radioactivity but not for others
Ans. (b) α-β particle carries one unit of negative charge, an α-particle carries 2units of positive
charge and γ (particle) carries no charge, therefore electronic energy levels of the
atom charges for α and β decay, but not for γ-decay.
Q. 4 M x and M y denote the atomic masses of the parent and the daughter
nuclei respectively in radioactive decay. The Q-value for a β − decay is Q 1
and that for a β + decay is Q2 . If m e denotes the mass of an electron, then
which of the following statements is correct?
(a) Q1 = ( Mx − My ) c 2 and Q2 = [ Mx − My − 2me ] c 2
(b) Q1 = ( Mx − My ) c 2 and Q2 = ( Mx − My ) c 2
(c) Q1 = ( Mx − My − 2me) c2 and Q2 = ( Mx − My + 2c e) c 2
(d) Q1 = ( Mx − My + 2me) c 2 and Q2 = ( Mx − my + 2 me) c 2
Ans. (a) Let the nucleus is z X A . β + decay is represented as
z X → z −1 y + e 0 + ν + Q2
A A
+1
∴ Q2 = [mn ( z X A ) − mn ( z −1 yA ) − me ] c 2
= [ mn ( z X A ) + zme − mn ( z −1 Y
A
) − ( z −1) me − 2 me ] c 2
= [ m ( z X ) − m ( Z −1 Y
A A
) − 2 me ] c 2
= (M x − M y − 2 me ) c 2
β − decay is represented as
= z XA → z +1A
Y
+ −1e
0
+ ν + α1
α1 = [ mn ( z X ) − mn (
A
z +1 Y A ) − me ] c 2
= [mn ( z X A ) + zme − mn ( z + 1Y A ) − ( z + 1) me ]c 2
= [ m ( z X A ) − m ( z −1 Y A )] c 2
= ( Mx − My ) c 2
Q. 5 Tritium is an isotope of hydrogen whose nucleus triton contains 2

neutrons and 1 proton. Free neutrons decay into p + e + n . If one of the
neutrons in Triton decays, it would transform into He 3 nucleus. This does
not happen. This is because
(a) Triton energy is than that of a He3 nucleus
(b) The electron created in the beta decay process cannot remain in the nucleus
(c) both the neutons in triton have to decay simultaneously resulting in a nucleus
with 3 protons, which is not a He3 nucleus.
(d) free neutrons decay due to external perturbations which is absent in triton
nucleus
K Thinking Process
Isotopes of an element are having same atomic numbers and different mass numbers.
Ans. (a) Tritium (1H3 ) contains 1 proton and 2 neutrons. A neutron decays as n → P + e + ν ,
the nucleus may have 2 protons and one neutron, i.e., tritium will transform into 2He 3
(2 protons and 1 neutron).
Triton energy is less than that of 2He 3 nucleus, i.e., transformation is not allowed
energetically.
Q. 6 Heavy stable nuclei have more neutrons than protons. This is because of
the fact that
(a) neutrons are heavier than protons
(b) electrostatic force between protons are repulsive
(c) neutrons decay into protons through beta decay
(d) nuclear forces between neutrons are weaker than that between protons
Ans. (b) Stable heavy nuclei have more neutrons than protons. This is because electrostatic
force between protons is repulsive , which may reduce stability.
Q. 7 In a nuclear reactor , moderators slow down the neutrons which come out
in a fission process. The moderator used have light nuclei. Heavy nuclei
will not serve the purpose, because
(a) they will break up
(b) elastic collision of neutrons with heavy nuclei will not slow them down
(c) the net weight of the reactor would be unbearably high
(d) substances with heavy nuclei do not occur in liquid or gaseous state at room
temperature
K Thinking Process
When there is an elastic collision between two bodies of same mass their velocities are
exchanged.
Ans. (b) According to the question, the moderator used have light nuclei (like proton). When
protons undergo perfectly elastic collision with the neutron emitted their velocities are
exchanged, i.e., neutrons come to rest and protons move with the velocity of neutrons.
Heavy nuclei will not serve the purpose because elastic collisions of neutrons with
heavy nuclei will not slow them down.
Nuclei 217

Q. 8 Fusion processes, like combining two deuterons to form a He nucleus are
impossible at ordinary temperatures and pressure.The reasons for this can
be traced to the fact
(a) nuclear forces have short range
(b) nuclei are positively charged
(c) the original nuclei must be completely ionized before fusion can take place
(d) the original nuclei must first break up before combining with each other
Ans. (a, b)
Fusion processes are impossible at ordinary temperatures and pressures.The reason is
nuclei are positively charged and nuclear forces are short range strongest forces.
Q. 9 Samples of two radioactive nuclides A and B are taken λ A and λ B are the
disintegration constants of A and B respectively. In which of the following
cases, the two samples can simultaneously have the same decay rate at
any time?
(a) Initial rate of decay of A is twice the initial rate of decay of B and λ A = λ B
(b) Initial rate of decay of A is twice the initial rate of decay of B and λ A > λ B
(c) Initial rate of decay of B is twice the initial rate of decay of A and λ A > λ B
(d) Initial rate of decay of B is same as the rate of decay of A at t = 2h and λ B < λ A
Ans. (b, d)
The two samples of the two radioactive nuclides A and B can simultaneously have the
same decay rate at any time if initial rate of decay of A is twice the initial rate of decay of B
and λ A > λ B . Also, when initial rate of decay of B is same as rate of decay of A at t = 2h and
λB < λA .
Q. 10 The variation of decay rate of two radioactive samples A and B with time
is shown in figure.
Which of the following statements are true?
(a) Decay constant of A is greater than that of B,
hence A always decays faster than B
(b) Decay constant of B is greater than that of A but
its decay rate is always smaller than that of A dN
(c) Decay constant of A is greater than that of B but it dt
does not always decay faster than B P B
(d) Decay constant of B is smaller than that of A but A
still its decay rate becomes equal to that of A at a t
later instant
Ans. (c, d)
From the given figure, it is clear that slope of curve A is greater than that of curve B.
So rate of decay is faster for A than that of B.
dN
dt
P B
A
t
We know that   ∝ , λ, at any instant of time hence we can say that λ A > λ B . At point P
dN
 dt 
shown in the diagram the two curve intersect.
Hence at point P, rate of decay for both A and B is the same.

Q. 11 He 23 and He 31 nuclei have the same mass number. Do they have the same
binding energy?
Ans. Nuclei He 32 and He13 have the same mass number. He 32 has two proton and one neutron.
He13 has one proton and two neutron. The repulsive force between protons is missing in
3 3 3
1He so the binding energy of 1He is greater than that of 2 He .
Q. 12 Draw a graph showing the variation of decay rate with number of active
nuclei.
− dN
Ans. We know that, rate of decay = = λN
dt
dN
dt
N
where decay constant (λ ) is constant for a given radioactive material. Therefore, graph
dN
between N and is a straight line as shown in the diagram.
dt
Nuclei 219
Q. 13 Which sample A or B shown in figure has shorter mean-life?
dN
dt A
t t
Ans. From the given figure, we can say that
at t = 0,   =  
dN dN
 dt  A  dt  B
⇒ (N0 )A = (N0 )B
Considering any instant t by drawing a line perpendicular to time axis, we find that
 dN  >  dN 
   
 dt  A  dt  B
⇒ λ A NA > λ B NB
Q NA > NB (rate of decay of B is slower )
∴ λ B > λA
⇒ τA > τB Q Average life τ = 1 
 λ 
Q. 14 Which one of the following cannot emit radiation and why? Excited
nucleus, excited electron.
Ans. Excited electron cannot emit radiation because energy of electronic energy levels is in the
range of eV and not MeV ( mega electron volt ).
γ-radiations have energy of the order of MeV.
Q. 15 In pair annihilation, an electron and a positron destroy each other to

produce gamma radiations. How is the momentum conserved?
Ans. In pair annihilation, an electron and a positron destroy each other to produce 2γ photons
which move in opposite directions to conserve linear momentum. The annihilation is shown
below 0 e −1 + 0e +1 → 2 γ ray photons.

Q. 16 Why do stable nuclei never have more protons than neutrons?
Ans. Because protons are positively charged and repel one another electrically.
This repulsion becomes so great in nuclei with more than 10 protons or so, that an excess
of neutrons which produce only attractive forces, is required for stability.
Q. 17 Consider a radioactive nucleus A which decays to a stable nucleus C

through the following sequence
A→ B→ C
Here B is an intermediate nuclei which is also radioactive. Considering
that there are N 0 atoms of A initially, plot the graph showing the
variation of number of atoms of A and B versus time.
K Thinking Process
Based or decay law of unstable radioactive nuclei.
Ans. Consider the situation shown in the graph.
No. of atoms
Time
At t = 0, NA = N0 (maximum) while NB = 0. As time increases, NA decreases exponentially
and the number of atoms of B increases. They becomes (NB ) maximum and finally drop to
zero exponentially by radioactive decay law.
Q. 18 A piece of wood from the ruins of an ancient building was found to have
14
a C activity of 12 disintegrations per minute per gram of its carbon
content. The 14 C activity of the living wood is 16 disintegrations per
minute per gram. How long ago did the tree, from which the wooden
sample came, die? Given half-life of 14 C is 5760 yr.
K Thinking Process
Carbon dating is a technique that uses the decay of carbon −14 (14 C) to estimate the
age of organic materials, such as wood and leather.
Ans. Given, R = 12 dis/min per g, R 0 = 16 dis/min per g, T1/ 2 = 5760 yr
Let t be the span of the tree .
According to radioactive decay law,
R R
R = R 0e − λt or = e −λt or e λt = 0
R0 R
Taking log on both the sides
Nuclei 221
⇒ λt =  log10  × 2.303
R0 16
λt loge e = loge
R  12 
2.303(log 4 − log 3)
t =
λ
2.303(0.6020 − 4771
. ) × 5760  0.6931
= Qλ = 
 T1/ 2 
0.6931 
= 2391⋅ 20 yr
Q. 19 Are the nucleons fundamental particles, or do they consist of still

smaller parts? One way to find out is to probe a nucleon just as
Rutherford probed an atom. What should be the kinetic energy of an
electron for it to be able to probe a nucleon? Assume the diameter of a
nucleon to be approximately 10 −15 m.
K Thinking Process
We have to use de-Broglie formula (λ = h / p) to find momentum of the particle.
Ans. Each particle (neutron and proton) present inside the nucleus is called a nucleon.
Let λ be the wavelength λ = 10−15 m
To detect separate parts inside a nucleon, the electron must have wavelength less than
10−15 m.
We know that
h
λ = and KE = PE ...(i)
p
hc
Energy = ...(ii)
λ
From Eq. (i) and Eq. (ii),
hc 6.6 × 10−34 × 3 × 108
kinetic energy of electron = PE = − eV
λ 10−15 × 16
. × 10−19
KE = 109 eV
Q. 20 A nuclide 1 is said to be the mirror isobar of nuclide 2 if Z 1 = N2 and

Z 2 = N 1 .(a) What nuclide is a mirror isobar of 23
11 Na? (b) Which nuclide
out of the two mirror isobars have greater binding energy and why?
K Thinking Process
Based on the mirror isobar concept and binding energy concept.
Ans. (a) According to question, a nuclide 1 is said to be mirror isobar of nuclide 2, if Z1 = N2 and
Z 2 = N1.
Now in 11Na23 , Z1 = 11, N1 = 23 − 11 = 12
∴Mirror isobar of 11Na23 is 12, Mg 23 , for which Z 2 = 12 = N1 and N2 = 23 − 12 = 11 = Z1

23 23
(b) As 12 Mg contains even number of protons (12) against 11 Na which has odd number of
23
protons (11,) therefore 11 Mg has greater binding energy than 11Na 23 .

Q. 21 Sometimes a radioactive nucleus decays into a nucleus which itself is
radioactive. An example is
half-life half-life
38
Sulphur   
→ 38
Cl   
→ 38
Ar (stable)
=2.48h = 0.62 h
Assume that we start with 1000 38 S nuclei at time t = 0. The number of

38
Cl is of count zero at t = 0 and will again be zero at t = ∞. At what
value of t, would the number of counts be a maximum?
K Thinking Process
To solve this problem concept of chain of two decays will be used. For the process,
dN
A → B → C, the law of decay is B = λ BN B + λ AN A .
dt
Ans. Consider the chain of two decays
38
S  → 38
Cl  → 38
Ar
2. 48 h 0. 62 h
38
At time t, Let S have N1(t ) active nuclei and 38 Cl have N2 (t) active nuclei.
dN1
= − λ1N1 = rate of formation of Cl 38 .
dt
dN2
Also, = −λ1N2 + λ1N1
dt
But N1 = N0e −λ 1t
dN2
= λ1N0e − λ 1t − λ 2 N2 ...(i)
dt
Multiplying by e λ 2t dt and rearranging
e λ 2 t dN2 + λ 2 N2e λ 2 t dt = λ1N0e( λ 2 − λ 1 ) t dt
Integrating both sides
N0 λ1 ( λ 2 − λ 1 )t
N2e λ 2t = e +C
λ 2 − λ1
N0 λ1
Since, at t = 0, N2 = 0, C = −
λ 2 − λ1
λ 2t
N λ
∴ N2e = 0 1 (e( λ 2 − λ 1 )t − 1) ...(ii)
λ 2 − λ1
N0 λ1 λ2t
N2 = (e − λ 1t − e − )
λ 2 − λ1
dN2
For maximum count, =0
dt
λ 1t
λ1N0 e −λ 2 N2 = 0 [From Eq. (i)]
N0 λ 2 λ 1t
⇒ = e [From Eq.(ii)]
N2 λ1
λ 2t λ λ1
e − 2. e λ 1t [e( λ 2 − λ 1 )t − 1] = 0
λ1 (λ1 − λ1 )
λ 2t λ2 λ2
or e − e λ 2t + e λ 1t = 0
(λ 2 − λ1 ) (λ 2 − λ1 )
Nuclei 223
λ2 λ2
1− + e( λ 1 − λ 2 )t = 0
(λ 2 − λ1 ) (λ 2 − λ1 )
λ2 λ2
e( λ 1 − λ 2 )t = −1
(λ 2 − λ1 ) (λ 2 − λ1 )
λ
e( λ 1 − λ 2 )t = 1
λ2
 λ 
t =  loge 1  (λ1 − λ 2 )
 λ2 
loge  2. 48 
 0. 62 
=
2.48 − 0.62
loge 4 2.303 × 2 × 0.3010  0.693 
= = Q λ = 
 T1/ 2 
1. 86 186
. 
= 0745
. s
Note Do not apply directly the formula of radioactive. Apply formulae related to chain
decay.
Q. 22 Deuteron is a bound state of a neutron and a proton with a binding

energy B = 2.2 MeV. A γ-ray of energy E is aimed at a deuteron nucleus
to try to break it into a (neutron + proton) such that the n and p move
in the direction of the incident γ-ray. If E = B, show that this cannot
happen. Hence, calculate how much bigger than B must be E be for such
a process to happen.
K Thinking Process
Apply conservation of energy as well as conservation of momentum.
Ans. Given binding energy B = 2.2 MeV
From the energy conservation law,
pn2 p2
E − B = Kn + Kp = + p …(i)
2m 2m
From conservation of momentum,
E
pn + pp = …(ii)
C
As E = B, Eq. (i) pn2 + pp2 = 0
It only happen if pn = pp = 0
So, the Eq. (ii) cannot satisfied and the process cannot take place.
Let E = B + X, where X <<B for the process to take place.
Put value of pn from Eq. (ii) in Eq. (i), we get
E − p 
 p p2
c 
X= + p
2m 2m
2 Epp E2
or 2 pp −
2
+ 2 − 2 mX = 0
c c
Using the formula of quadratic equation, we get

2E 4E 2  E2 
± 2
− 8 2 − 2 mX 
c c c 
pp =
4
For the real value pp , the discriminant is positive
4E 2  E2 
2
= 8 2 − 2 mX 
c c 
4E 2
16mX =
c2
E2 B2
X= 2
≈ [∴X <<B ⇒ E ≅ B]
4mc 4mc 2
Q. 23 The deuteron is bound by nuclear forces just as H-atom is made up of p

and e bound by electrostatic forces. If we consider the force between
neutron and proton in deuteron as given in the form a coulomb
potential but with an effective charge e ′
1 e ′2
F = .
4 πε 0 r
estimate the value of (e ′ / e) given that the binding energy of a deuteron
is 2.2 MeV.
Ans. The binding energy is H-atom
me 4
E= = 13. 6 eV …(i)
πε20 h2
If proton and neutron had charge e ′ each and were governed by the same electrostatic
force, then in the above equation we would need to replace electronic mass m by the
reduced mass m′ of proton-neutron and the electronic charge e by e ′.
M×N M
m′ = =
M+ N 2
1836 m
= = 918 m
2
Here, M represents mass of a neutron/proton
918m (e ′ )4
∴ Binding energy = = 2 .2 MeV …(ii)
8ε20 h2
Dividing Eqs. (ii) and (i), we get
4
e′ 2.2 MeV 2.2 × 106
918   = =
e 13.6 eV 13.6
4
 e ′  = 2.2 × 10 = 176.21
6
 
e 13.6 × 918
e′
= (17621
. )1/ 4 = 3.64.
e
Nuclei 225
Q. 24 Before the neutrino hypothesis, the beta decay process was throught to
be the transition.
n→ p+e
If this was true, show that if the neutron was at rest, the proton and
electron would emerge with fixed energies and calculate them.
Experimentally, the electron energy was found to have a large range.
Ans. Before β-decay, neutron is at rest. Hence, En = mn c 2 , pn = 0
pn = pp + pe
Or pp + pe = 0 ⇒ pp = pe = p
1
Also, Ep = (mp2 c 4 + pp2 c 2 )2 ,
1
Ee = (me2 c 4 + pp2 c 2 )2
1
= (me2 c 4 + pe2c 2 )2
From conservation of energy,
1 1
(mp2 c 4 + p2c 2 )2 + = (me2 c 4 + p2c 2 )2 = mnc 2
mp c 2 ≈ 936MeV, mnc 2 ≈ 938MeV, me c 2 = 0.51MeV
Since, the energy difference between n and p is small, pc will be small, pc<<<mp c 2 , while
pc may be greater than mec 2
p2c 2 ~
⇒ mp c 2 + − mnc 2 − pc
2 mp2 c 4
To first order − mnc 2 − mp c 2 = 938MeV − 936MeV = 2MeV
pc ~
This gives the momentum of proton or neutron. Then,
1
Ep = (mp2 c 4 + p2c 2 )2 = 9362 + 2 2
− 936 MeV
~
1
Ee = (me2 c 4 + p2c 2 )2 = (0.51)2 + 2 2
− 2.06MeV
~

Q. 25 The activity R of an unknown radioactive nuclide is measured at hourly
intervals. The result found are tabulated as follows
t(h) 0 1 2 3 4
R(MB q ) 100 35.36 12.51 4.42 1.56
(i) Plot the graph of R versus t and calculate half-life from the graph.
 R 
(ii) Plot the graph of In   versus t and obtain the value of half-life
 R0 
from the graph.
K Thinking Process
Based on Decay law and half-life.
 R
Ans. In the table given below, we have listed values of R (MBq ) and ln  .
 R0 
t(h) 0 1 2 3 4
R(MB q ) 100 35.36 12.51 4.42 1.56
R
— −1.04 −2.08 −3.11 −4.16
R0
(i) When we plot the graph of R versus t, we obtain an exponential curve as shown.
100
90
80
70
60
R (MBq)
50
40
30
20
10
X
0 B1 2 3 4
t (h)
From the graph we can say that activity R reduces to 50% in t = OB ≈ 40 min
So, t 1/ 2 ≈ 40 min.
Nuclei 227
(ii) The adjacent figure shows the graph of In(R / R 0 ) versus t.

In (R/R0)
0 1 2 3 4
t(h)
–1.04
–2.08
–3.11
–4.16
Slope of this graph = − λ

−416
. − 311
λ = − 
.  −1
from the graph,  ⇒ = 1.05h
 1 
0.693 0.693
Half-life T1/ 2 = = = 0.66h
λ 105
.
= 39.6 min ≈ 40 min
Q. 26 Nuclei with magic number of proton Z = 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 52 and magic
number of neutrons N = 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82 and 126 are found to be very
stable.
(i) Verify this by caculating the proton. separation energy S p for
120
Sn(Z = 50) and 121 Sb(Z = 51).
The proton separation energy for a nuclide is the minimum energy
required to separate the least tightly bound proton from a nucleus of
that nuclide. It is given by
S p = (M z − 1 , N + MH − M Z, N ) c 2 .
Given, ln = 118.9058 u, 120 Sn =199.902199 u,
119
121
Sb = 120.903824 u, 1 H = 1.0078252 u.
(ii) What does the existence of magic number indicate?
Ans. (i) The proton separation energy is given by
S pSn = (M119. 70 + M H − M120, 70 )c 2
= (118.9058 + 10078252
. − 119.902199)c 2
= 0.0114362 c 2
Similarly SpSp = (M120, 70 + M H − M121, 70 )c 2
= (119.902199 + 10078252
. − 120.903822 )c 2
= 0.0059912 c 2
Since, SpSn > SpSb , Sn nucleus is more stable than Sb nucleus.
(ii) The existence of magic numbers indicates that the shell structure of nucleus similar to
the shell structure of an atom. This also explains the peaks in binding energy/nucleon
curve.
@unacademyplusdiscounts_link
https://telegram.me/Unacademyplusdiscounts_link
Join Us Now For all study Materials for free

14
Semiconductor Electronics:
Material, Devices and
Simple Circuit
Q. 1 The conductivity of a semiconductor increases with increase in
temperature, because
(a) number density of free current carries increases
(b) relaxation time increases
(c) both number density of carries and relaxation time increase
(d) number density of carries increases, relaxation time decreases but effect of
decrease in relaxation time is much less than increase in number density
Ans. (d) The conductivity of a semiconductor increases with increase in temperature, because
the number density of current carries increases, relaxation time decreases but effect of
decrease in relaxation is much less than increase in number density.
Q. 2 In figure given below V0 is the potential barrier across a p-n junction,

when no battery is connected across the junction
1
2
3
V0
(a) 1 and 3 both correspond to forward bias of junction

(b) 3 corresponds to forward bias of junction and 1 corresponds to reverse bias of
junction
(c) 1 corresponds to forward bias and 3 corresponds to reverse bias of junction
(d) 3 and 1 both correspond to reverse bias of junction
K Thinking Process
Go through the working of p-n junction.
Semiconductor Electronics : Material, Devices and Simple Circuit 229
Ans. (b) When p-n junction is forward biased, it opposes the potential barrier junction, when
p -n junction is reverse biased, it supports the potential barrier junction, resulting
increase in potential barrier across the junction.
Q. 3 In figure given below, assuming the diodes to be ideal

(a) D1 is forward biased and D2 is reverse biased and hence current flows from A to B
(b) D2 is forward biased and D1 is reverse biased and hence no current flows from B
to A and vice-versa
(c) D1 and D2 are both forward biased and hence current flows from A to B
(d) D1 and D2 are both reverse biased and hence no current flows from A to B and
vice-versa
A R D1
– 10V
D2
K Thinking Process
Check the polarity of the diodes.
Ans. (b) In the given circuit p-side of p-n function D1 is connected to lower voltage and n-side of
D1 to higher voltage.
Thus D is reverse biased.
The p -side of p-n junction D2 is at higher potential and n-side of D2 is at lower potential.
Therefore D2 is forward biased.
Hence, current flows through the junction B to A.
Q. 4 A 220 V AC supply is connected between points A and B (figure). What will

be the potential difference V across the capacitor?
A
200 AC C V
B
(a)220V (b) 110 V (c)0 V (d) 220 2V
K Thinking Process
p-n junction conducts during positive half cycle only.
Ans. (d) As p-n junction conducts during positive half cycle only, the diode connected here will
work is positive half cycle. Potential difference across C = peak voltage of the given AC
voltage = V0 = Vrms 2 = 220 2 V.
Q. 5 Hole is
(a) an anti-particle of electron
(b) a vacancy created when an electron leaves a covalent bond
(c) absence of free electrons
(d) an artificially created particle
Ans. (b) The concept of hole describes the lack of an electron at a position where one could
exist in an atom or atomic lattice. If an electron is excited into a higher state, it leaves a
hole in its old state.
Thus, hole can be defined as a vacancy created when an electron leaves a covalent
bond.
Q. 6 The output of the given circuit in figure given below,
vm sin ωt
(a) would be zero at all times

(b) would be like a half wave rectifier with positive cycles in output
(c) would be like a half wave rectifier with negative cycles in output
(d) would be like that of a full wave rectifier
K Thinking Process
For positive half cycle of input AC voltage, the p-n junction is forward biased and for
negative half cycle of input AC voltage the p-n junction is reversed biased.
Ans. (c) Due to forward biased during positive half cycle of input AC voltage, the resistance of
p-n junction is low. The current in the circuit is maximum. In this situation, a maximum
potential difference will appear across resistance connected in series of circuit. This
result into zero output voltage across p-n junction.
Due to reverse biase during negative half cycle of AC voltage, the p-n junction is
reverse biased. The resistance of p-n junction becomes high which will be more than
resistance in series. That is why, there will be voltage across p-n junction with negative
cycle in output.
Q. 7 In the circuit shown in figure given below, if the diode forward voltage
drop is 0.3 V, the voltage difference between A and B is
A A
0.2 mA 0.2 mA
5K r1 5kΩ
0.3V
5K r2 5kΩ
B
(a) (b)
(a) 1.3 V (b) 2.3 V (c) 0 (d) 0.5 V
Ans. (b) Consider the fig. (b) given here, suppose the potential difference between A and B.
r1 = 5 k Ω and r2 = 5 k Ω are resistance in series connection.
Then, V − 0.3 = [(r1 + r2 ) 103 ] × (0.2 × 10−3 )] [Q V = ir ]
= [(5 + 5) 103 ] × (0.2 × 10−3 )
. × 10−3 = 2
= 10 × 103 × 02
⇒ V = 2 + 0.3 = 2.3 V
Q. 8 Truth table for the given circuit is

A C
B D
(a) A B E (b) A B E (c) A B E (d) A B E
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
Ans. (c) Here, C = A. B and D = A. B

E = C + D = ( A. B) + ( A . B)
Explanation The truth table of this arrangement of gates can be given by
A B A C = A. B d = A. B E = (C + D )
0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 1

Q. 9 When an electric field is applied across a semiconductor
(a) electrons move from lower energy level to higher energy level in the
conduction band
(b) electrons move from higher energy level to lower energy level in the
conduction band
(c) holes in the valence band move from higher energy level to lower energy level
(d) holes in the valence band move from lower energy level to higher energy level
K Thinking Process
Electrons are negatively charged and its energy increases when electric fields is applied.
Ans. (a, c)
When electric field is applied across a semiconductor, the electrons in the conduction band
get accelerated and acquire energy. They move from lower energy level to higher energy level.
While the holes in valence band move from higher energy level to lower energy level, where
they will be having more energy.
Q. 10 Consider an n-p-n transitor with its base-emitter junction forward biased

and collector base junction reverse biased. Which of the following
statements are true?
(a) Electrons crossover from emitter to collector
(b) Holes move from base to collector
(c) Electrons move from emitter to base
(d) Electrons from emitter move out of base without going to the collector.
K Thinking Process
Draw the figure as given in the question.
Emitter
junction Collector junction
n p n
E B C
Forward biased Reverse biased
Ans. (a, c)
Here emitter-base junction is forward biased i.e., the positive pole of emitter base battery is
connected to base and its negative pole to emitter. Also, the collector base junction is
reverse biased, i.e., the positive pole of the collector base battery is connected to collector
and negative pole to base.
Thus, electron move from emmiter to base and crossover from emitter to collector.
Q. 11 Figure given below shows that transfer

characteristics of a base biased CE transistor. V0
Which of the following statements are true?
(a) At Vi = 0.4 V, transistor is in active state
(b) At Vi = 1V, it can be used as an amplifier
(c) At Vi = 0.5 V, it can be used as a switch turned
off
(d) At Vi = 2.5 V, can be used as a switch turned on 0 0.6V 2V Vi
Ans. (b, c, d)
From the given transfer characteristics of a base biased common emitter transistor, we note
that
(i) when Vi = 0.4 V, there is no collection current. The transistor circuit is in active state and
is used as an amplifier.
(ii) when Vi = 1V (This is in between 0.6V to 2V), the transistor circuit is in active state and is
used as an amplifier.
(iii) when Vi = 0.5 V, there is no collector current. The transistor is in cut off state. The
transistor circuit can be used as a switch turned off.
(iv) when Vi = 2 . 5 V, the collector current becomes maximum and transistor is in saturation
state and can used as switch turned on state.
Q. 12 In a n-p-n transistor circuit, the collector current is 10 mA. If 95 per cent

of the electrons emitted reach the collector, which of the following
statements are true?
(a) The emitter current will be 8 mA
(b) The emitter current will be 10.53 mA
(c) The base current will be 0.53 mA
(d) The base current will be 2 mA
K Thinking Process
The collector current is the 95% of electrons reaching the collector after emission.
Ans. (b, c)
Here, Ic = 10 mA,
95
Also, Ic = Ie
100
10 × 100
⇒ Ie = = 10.53 mA
95
Also, I b = Ie − Ic = 10.53 − 10 = 0.53 mA
Q. 13 In the depletion region of a diode

(a) there are no mobile charges
(b) equal number of holes and elections exist, making the region neutral
(c) recombination of holes and electrons has taken place
(d) immobile charged ions exist
Ans. (a, b, d)
The space-charge regions on both the sides of p-n junction which has immobile ions and
entirely lacking of any charge carriers will form a region called depletion region of a diode.
The number of ionized acceptors on the p-side equals the number of ionized donors on the
n-side.
Q. 14 What happens during regulation action of a Zener diode?

(a) The current and voltage across the Zener remains fixed
(b) The current through the series Resistance (Rs ) changes
(c) The Zener resistance is constant
(d) The resistance offered by the Zener changes
Ans. (b, d)
During regulation action of a Zener diode, the current through the R s changes and
resistance offered by the Zener changes. The current through the Zener changes but the
voltage across the Zener remains constant.
Q. 15 To reduce the ripples in rectifier circuit with capacitor filter

(a) R L should be increased
(b) input frequency should be decreased
(c) input frequency should be increased
(d) capacitors with high capacitance should be used
K Thinking Process
Ripple factor (r) of a full wave rectifier using capacitor filter is given by
1
r=
4 3 RL CV
1 1 1
i.e., r∝ ⇒ r∝ ,r∝
RL C V
Ans. (a, c, d)
Ripple factor is inversely proportional to R L , C and ν.
Thus to reduce r, R L should be increased, input frequency ν should be increased and
capacitance C should be increased.
Q. 16 The breakdown in a reverse biased p-n junction is more likely to occur

due to
(a) large velocity of the minority charge carriers if the doping concentration is small
(b) large velocity of the minority charge carriers if the doping concentration is large
(c) strong electric field in a depletion region if the doping concentration is small
(d) strong electric field in the depletion region if the doping concentration is large
Ans. (a, d)
In reverse biasing, the minority charge carriers will be accelerated due to reverse biasing,
which on striking with atoms cause ionization resulting secondary electrons and thus more
number of charge carriers.
When doping concentration is large, there will be large number of ions in the depletion
region, which will give rise to a strong electric field.

Q. 17 Why are elemental dopants for Silicon or Germanium usually chosen from
group XIII or group XV?
Ans. The size of the dopant atom should be such that their presence in the pure semiconductor
does not distort the semiconductor but easily contribute the charge carriers on forming
covalent bonds with Si or Ge atoms, which are provided by group XIII or group XV
elements.
Q. 18 Sn, C and Si, Ge are all group XIV elements. Yet, Sn is a conductor, C is
an insulator while Si and Ge are semiconductors. Why?
K Thinking Process
The property of conduction level of any element depends on the energy gap between its
conduction band and valence band.
Ans. A material is a conductor if in its energy band diagram, there is no energy gap between
conduction band and valence band. For insulator, the energy gap is large and for
semiconductor the energy gap is moderate.
The energy gap for Sn is 0 eV, for C is 5.4 eV, for Si is 1.1 eV and for Ge is 0.7 eV, related to
their atomic size. Therefore Sn is a conductor, C is an insulator and Ge and Si are
semiconductors.
Q. 19 Can the potential barrier across a p-n junction be measured by simply

connecting a voltmeter across the junction?
Ans. We cannot measure the potential barrier across a p-n junction by a voltmeter because the
resistance of voltmeter is very high as compared to the junction resistance.
Q. 20 Draw the output waveform across the resistor in the given figure.
A V0
π
+1V
0
–1V
Input waveform at A
Ans. As we know that the diode only works in forward biased, so the output is obtained only
when positive input is given, so the output waveform is
+1V
Q. 21 The amplifiers X , Y and Z are connected in series. If the voltage gains of

X , Y and Z are 10, 20 and 30, respectively and the input signal is 1 mV
peak value, then what is the output signal voltage (peak value)
(i) if DC supply voltage is 10 V? (ii) if DC supply voltage is 5 V?
K Thinking Process
Output signal voltage
= Total voltage amplification
Input Signal voltage
Ans. Given, Av x = 10, Av y = 20, Av z = 30;
∆Vi = 1 mV = 10−3 V
Output Signal Voltage (∆V0 )
Now, = Total voltage amplification
Input Singal Voltage (∆Vi )
= Av x × Av y × Av z
⇒ ∆V0 = Av x × Av y × Av z × ∆Vi
= 10 × 20 × 30 × 10−3 = 6 V
(i) If DC supply voltage is 10 V, then output is 6 V, since theoretical gain is equal to practical
gain, i.e., output can never be greater than 6 V.
(ii) If DC supply voltage is 5 V, i.e., Vcc = 5 V. Then, output peak will not exceed 5 V.
Hence V0 = 5 V.
Q. 22 In a CE transistor amplifier, there is a current and voltage gain

associated with the circuit. In other words there is a power gain.
Considering power a measure of energy, does the circuit violate
conservation of energy?
Ans. In CE transistor amplifier, the power gain is very high.
In this circuit, the extra power required for amplified output is obtained from DC source.
Thus, the circuit used does not violet the law of conservation.

Q. 23 (i) Name the type of a diode whose characteristics are shown in figure.
(a) and (b).
(ii) What does the point P in fig. (a) represent?
(iii) What does the points P and Q in fig. (b) represent?
I
(µ A) I
P P
V V
(volt)
Q
(a) (b)
Ans. (i) The characteristic curve (a) is of Zener diode and curve (b) is of solar cell.
(ii) The point P in fig. (a) represents Zener break down voltage.
(iii) In fig. (b), the point Q represents zero voltage and negative current. It means light falling
on solar cell with atleast minimum threshold frequency gives the current in opposite
direction to that due to a battery connected to solar cell. But for the point Q, the battery
is short circuited. Hence represents the short circuit current.
In fig. (b), the point P represents some positive voltage on solar cell with zero current
through solar cell.
It means, there is a battery connected to a solar cell which gives rise to the equal and
opposite current to that in solar cell by virtue of light falling on it.
As current is zero for point P, hence we say P represents open circuit voltage.
Q. 24 Three photo diodes D 1 , D2 and D 3 are made of semiconductors having

band gaps of 2.5eV, 2eV and 3eV, respectively. Which ones will be able
to detect light of wavelength 6000 Å?
Ans. Given, wavelength of light λ = 6000 Å = 6000 × 10−10 m
Energy of the light photon
hc 6.6 × 10−34 × 3 × 108
E= = eV = 2.06 eV
λ 6000 × 10−10 × 1.6 × 10–19
The incident radiation which is detected by the photodiode having energy should be greater
than the band-gap. So, it is only valid for diode D2 . Then, diode D2 will detect this radiation.
Q. 25 If the resistance R 1 is increased (see figure), how will the readings of

the ammeter and voltmeter change?
A
R2 V
R1
Ans. Consider the circuit in fig. (b) to find the change in reading
V − VBE
As we know the formula for base current, I B = BB
Ri
A
Ic
R2
I1 V
B
R1 VBE E
Ie
VBB
As R i is increased, I B is decreased.
Now, the current in ammeter is collector current IC .
IC = βI B as I B decreased IC also decreased and the reading of voltmeter and ammeter also
decreased.
Q. 26Two car garages have a common gate which needs to open automatically
when a car enters either of the garages or cars enter both. Devise a
circuit that resembles this situation using diodes for this situation.
Ans. As car enters in the gate, any one or both are opened.
The device is shown.
A OR gate
C A
B C
B
So, OR gate gives the desired output.

A B C
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Q. 27 How would you set up a circuit to obtain NOT gate using a transistor?
Ans. The NOT gate is a device which has only one input and one output i.e., A = Y means Y
equals NOT A.
This gate cannot be realised by using diodes. However it can be realised by making use of a
transistor. This can be seen in the figure given below
A Y
0 1
RB C 1 0
A
1 n-p-n
5V E
Here, the base B of the transistor is connected to the input A through a resistance R b and
the emitter E is earthed. The collector is connected to 5 V battery. The output Y is the voltage
at C w.r.t. earth.
The resistor R b and Rc are so chosen that if emitter-base junction is unbiased, the transistor
is in cut off mode and if emitter-base junction is forward biased by 5V, the transistor is in
saturation state.
Q. 28 Explain why elemental semiconductor cannot be used to make visible

LEDs.
Ans. In elemental semiconductor, the band gap is such that the emission are in infrared region
and not in visible region.
Q. 29 Write the truth table for the circuit shown in figure given below. Name
the gate that the circuit resembles.
+5V
D1
V0
D2
Ans. The circuit resemble AND gate. The boolean expression of this circuit is, V0 = A. B i.e., V0
equals A AND B. The truth table of this gate is as given below
A B V0 = A ⋅B
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
Q. 30 A Zener of power rating 1 W is to be used as a voltage regulator. If Zener

has a breakdown of 5 V and it has to regulate voltage which fluctuated
between 3 V and 7 V, what should be the value of R s for safe operation
(see figure)?
Rs
Unregulated Regulated
voltage voltage
Ans. Given, power = 1W

Zener breakdown Vz = 5 V
Minimum voltage Vmin = 3 V
Maximum voltage Vmax = 7 V
P 1
Current I Zmax = = = 0.2 A
VZ 5
Vmax − VZ 7 − 5 2
The value of R s for safe operation R s = = = = 10 Ω
I Zmax 0.2 0.2

Q. 31 If each diode in figure has a forward bias resistance of 25 Ω and infinite
resistance in reverse bias, what will be the values of the currents
I 1 , I 2 , I 3 and I 4 ?
I4 125 Ω
A B
I3 125 Ω
C D
I2 125 Ω
E F
I1 25 Ω
G H
5V
Ans. Given, forward biased resistance = 25 Ω
Reverse biased resistance = ∞
As the diode in branch CD is in reverse biased which having resistance infinite,
so I3 = 0
Resistance in branch AB = 25 + 125 = 150 Ω say R1
Resistance in branch EF = 25 + 125 = 150 Ω say R 2
AB is parallel to EF.
1 1 1 1 1 2
So, resultant resistance = + = + =
R ′ R1 R 2 150 150 150
⇒ R′ = 75 Ω
Total resistance R = R ′ + 25 = 75 + 25 = 100 Ω
V 5
Current I1 = = = 0.05 A
R 100
I1 = I 4 + I 2 + I 3 (Here I 3 = 0)
So, I1 = I 4 + I 2
Here, the resistances R1 and R 2 is same.
i.e., I4 = I2
∴ I1 = 2 I 2
I 0.05
⇒ I2 = 1 = = 0.025 A
2 2
and I 4 = 0.025 A
Thus, I1 = 0.05 A, I 2 = 0.025 A, I 3 = 0 and I 4 = 0.025 A
Q. 32 In the circuit shown in figure, when the input voltage of the base
resistance is 10 V, VBE is zero and VCE is also zero. Find the values of
I B , I C and β.
10V
Rc 3kΩ
RB
Vi
400
kΩ
Ans. Given, voltage across R B = 10 V

Resistance R B = 400 kΩ
VBE = 0, VCE = 0 RC = 3 kΩ
Voltage across R B
IB =
RB
10
= = 25 × 10−6 A = 25 µA
400 × 103
Voltage across RC = 10 V
Voltage across RC 10
IC = =
RC 3 × 103
= 3.33 × 10−3 A =3.33 mA
IC 3.33 × 10−3
β= =
IB 25 × 10−6
= 1.33 × 102 = 133
Q. 33 Draw the output signals C 1 and C2 in the given combination of gates.

A
C1
B
C2
B
A
0 1 2 3 4 5 t (s)
B
0 1 2 3 4 5 t (s)
Ans. First draw the truth table of C1 and C 2 .
A E
C
G H I C1
B
D F
A B C D E F G H I C1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
A E
C
C2
G
B
D F
A B C D E F G C2
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
A
0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
B
0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
Q. 34 Consider the circuit arrangement shown in figure for studying input and
output characteristics of n-p-n transistor in CE configuration.
Select the values of RB and RC for a transistor whose VBE = 0.7 V, so that
the transistor is operating at point Q as shown in the characteristics (see
figure).
IC (mA)
IC
RC
B C VCE
Q IB = 30 µA
E 4 mA
RB
VCC
VBE
VBB
8V VCE (V)
Given that the input impedance of the transistor is very small and
VCC = VBB = 16 V, also find the voltage gain and power gain of circuit
making appropriate assumptions.
Ans. Given, VBE = 0.7 V, VCC = VBB = 16 V
VCE = 8 V (from graph)
IC = 4 mA = 4 × 10−3 A
I B = 30 µA = 30 × 10−6 A
For the output characteristic at θ,
VCC = IC RC + VCE
VCC − VCE 16 − 8 8 × 1000
RC = = = = 2 kΩ
IC 4 × 10−3 4
Using the relation, VBB = I B R B + VBE
V − VBE 16 − 0.7
R B = BB =
IB 30 × 10−6
= 510 × 103 Ω = 510 k Ω
IC 4 × 10−3
β= = = 133
I B 30 × 10−6
RC 133 × 2 × 103
Voltage gain = β = = 0.52
RB 510 × 103
Power gain = β × Voltage gain = 133 × 0.52 = 69
Q. 35 Assuming the ideal diode, draw the output waveform for the circuit
given in fig. (a), explain the waveform.
R
20 sin ωt
5V
K Thinking Process
An ideal diode is a diode that acts like a perfect conductor when voltage is applied
forward biased and like a perfect insulator when voltage is applied reverse biased.
Ans. When the input voltage is equal to or less than 5 V, diode will be revers biased. It will offer
high resistance in comparison to resistance (R ) in series. Now, diode appears in open
circuit. The input waveform is then passed to the output terminals. The result with sin wave
input is to dip off all positive going portion above 5 V.
If input voltage is more than + 5 V, diode will be conducting as if forward biased offering low
resistance in comparison to R. But there will be no voltage in output beyond 5 V as the
voltage beyond + 5 V will appear across R.
When input voltage is negative, there will be opposition to 5 V battery in p- n junction input
voltage becomes more than − 5 V, the diode will be reverse biased. It will offer high
resistance in comparison to resistance R in series. Now junction diode appears in open
circuit. The input wave form is then passed on to the output terminals.
The output waveform is shown here in the fig. (b)
Voltage
+5V
O
T 2T 3 T 4T Time
4 4 4 4
–5V
Q. 36 Suppose a n-type wafer is created by doping Si crystal having

5 × 10 28 atoms/m 3 with 1 ppm concentration of As. On the surface
200 ppm boron is added to create ‘p’ region in this wafer. Considering
ni = 1.5 × 10 16 m −3 , (i) Calculate the densities of the charge carriers in
the n and p regions. (ii) Comment which charge carriers would contribute
largely for the reverse saturation current when diode is reverse biased.
Ans. When As is implanted in Si crystal, n - type wafer is created. The number of majority carriers
electrons due to doping of As is
1
ne = ND = 6 × 5 × 1028
10
= 5 × 1022 / m3
Number of minority carriers (holes) in n -type wafer is

n 2 (15 . × 1016 )2
nh = i =
ne 5 × 1022
= 0.45 × 1010 / m3
When B is implanted in Si crystal, p-type wafer is created with number of holes,
200
nh = NA = 6 × (5 × 1028 ) = 1 × 1025 / m3
10
Minority carriers (electrons) created in p - type wafer is
. × 1016 )2
ni2 (15
ne = =
nh 1 × 1025
= 2.25 × 1027 / m3
When p-n junction is reverse biased, the minority carrier holes of n-region wafer
(nh = 0.45 × 1010 / m3 ) would contribute more to the reverse saturation current than minority
carrier electrons (ne = 2.25 × 107 / m3 ) of p region wafer.
Q. 37An X-OR gate has following truth table.

A B Y
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
It is represented by following logic relation Y = A . B + A. B
Build this gate using AND, OR and NOT gates.
Ans. Given, the logic relation for the given truth table is
Y = A. B + A. B = Y1 + Y2
when Y1 = A. B and Y2 = A. B
Y1 can be obtained as output of AND gate I for which one Input is of A through NOT gate and
another input is of B. Y2 can be obtained as output of AND gate II for which one input is of A
and other input is of B through NOT gate.
Now Y2 can be obtained as output from OR gate, where, Y1 and Y2 are input of OR gate.
Thus, the given table can be obtained from the logic circuit given below
A A. B y1
I
B
y = A . B + A .B
III
II
B. A y2
Q. 38Consider a box with three terminals on top of it as shown in figure.

A mA +
V Box
– terminals
B C
(a) (b)
Three components namely, two germanium diodes and one resistor are
connected across these three terminals in some arrangement.
A student performs an experiment in which any two of these three
terminals are connected in the circuit shown in figure.
The student obtains graphs of current-voltage characteristics for
unknown combination of components between the two terminals
connected in the circuit. The graphs are
(i) when A is positive and B is negative
I
(c)
(ii) when A is negative and B is positive
I
1
= 1000 W
Slope
V
0.7V
(d)
(iii) when B is negative and C is positive
I
V
0.7V
(e)
(iv) when B is positive and C is negative

I
V
0.7V
(f)
(v) when A is positive and C is negative
I
(g)
(vi) when A is negative and C is positive
I
V
1.4V
(h)
From these graphs of current - voltage characteristic shown in fig. (c) to
(h) determine the arrangement of components between A, B, and C.
Ans. (a) In V-I graph of condition (i), a reverse characteristics is shown in fig. (c). Here A is
connected to n - side of p-n junction I and B is connected to p-side of p-n junction I with
a resistance in series.
(b) In V-I graph of condition (ii), a forward characteristics is shown in fig. (d), where 0.7 V is
the knee voltage of p-n junction I 1/slope = (1/1000) Ω.
A
It means A is connected to n -side of p- n junction I and
B is connected to p -side of p- n junction I and resistance R
R is in series of p- n junction I between A and B.
(c) In V-I graph of condition (iii), a forward characteristics is
p-nI
shown in figure (e), where 0.7 V is the knee voltage. In
this case p-side of p-n junction II is connected to C and
C
n -side of p-n junction II to B. B
p-n II
(d) In V-I graphs of conditions (iv), (v), (vi) also concludes
the above connection of p-n junctions I and II along with
a resistance R.
Thus, the arrangement of p-n I, p-n II and resistance R between A, B and C will be as shown
in the figure
Q. 39For the transistor circuit shown in figure, evaluate VE , RB , R E , given

I C = 1 mA, VCE = 3 V, VBE = 0.5 V and VCC = 12 V, β = 100.
VCC = 12 V
A
RB RC = 7.8 kΩ
VC
20 kΩ
RE
Ans. Consider the fig. (b) given here to solve this problem
IC ≈ I E [As base current is very small.]
RC = 7.8 kΩ
From the figure, IC (RC + R E ) + VCE = 12
(R E + RC ) × 1 × 10−3 + 3 = 12
R E + RC = 9 × 103 = 9 kΩ
R E = 9 − 7.8 = 1.2 kΩ
VE = I E × R E
= 1 × 10−3 × 1.2 × 103 = 1.2 V
Voltage VB = VE + VBE = 1.2 + 0.5 = 1.7 V
VB 1.7
Current I = = = 0.085 mA
20 × 10 3
20 × 103
12 − 17
. 10.3
Resistance R B = = [Given, β = 100]
IC
+ 0.085 0.01 + 0.085
β
= 108 kΩ
G VCC=12V
IC+I IC A
RB RC=7.8kΩ
C
IB
H VCE=3V
I
VBE=0.5V E
IE
R=200 kW
RE
J D
(b)
Q. 40In the circuit shown in fig. (a), find the value of RC .

12 V
A
100 kΩ RC
C
β = 100
VBE = 0.5 V
E VCE = 3 V
20 kΩ
RE = 1 kΩ
(a)
Ans. Consider the fig. (b) to solve this question,

I E = IC + I B and IC = βI B …(i)
IC RC + VCE + I E R E = VCC …(ii)
RI B + VBE + I E R E = VCC …(iii)
Q I E ≈ IC = βI B
VCC=12V
G
IB+I IC A
RC=100kΩ RC
C
IB
H VCE=3V
I
VBE=0.5V E
IE
R=20kΩ
RE=1kΩ
J D
(b)
From Eq. (iii),

(R + βR E ) I B = VCC − VBE
VCC − VBE
⇒ IB =
R + β ⋅ RE
12 − 0.5 11.5
= = mA
80 + 1.2 × 100 200
From Eq. (ii),
VCE − VBE VCC − VCE
(RC + R E ) = = (Q IC = βI B )
IC β IB
2
(RC + R E ) = (12 − 3) kΩ = 1.56 kΩ
11.5
RC + R E = 1. 56
RC = 1. 56 − 1 = 0.56 kΩ
15
Communication System
Q. 1 Three waves A, B and C of frequencies 1600 kHz, 5 MHz and 60 MHz,
respectively are to be transmitted from one place to another. Which of the
following is the most appropriate mode of communication?
(a) A is transmitted via space wave while B and C are transmitted via sky wave
(b) A is transmitted via ground wave, B via sky wave and C via space wave
(c) B and C are transmitted via ground wave while A is transmitted via sky wave
(d) B is transmitted via ground wave while A and C are transmitted via space wave
K Thinking Process
Mode of communication depend on the frequencies of a wave.
Ans. (b) Mode of communication frequency range
Ground wave propagation − 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
Sky wave propagation −1710 kHz to 40MHz
Space wave propagation − 54MHz to 42. GHz
Q. 2 A 100m long antenna is mounted on a 500m tall building. The complex

can become a transmission tower for waves with λ
(a) ~ 400 m (b) ~ 25 m (c) ~ 150 m (d) ~ 2400 m
Ans. (a) Given, length of the building (l) is given by
l = 500 m
we know that, wavelength of the wave which can be transmitted by
λ ~ 4l = 4 × 100 = 400 m
Q. 3 A 1 kW signal is transmitted using a communication channel which

provides attenuation at the rate of – 2dB per km. If the communication
channel has a total length of 5 km, the power of the signal received is
P 
[gain in dB = 10 log 0  ]
 Pi 
(a) 900 W (b) 100 W (c) 990 W (d) 1010 W
Ans. (b) Given, power of signal transmitted is given Pi = 1kW = 1000 W

Rate of attenuation of signal = − 2dB /km
Length of total path = 5 km
Thus, gain in dB = 5 × (−2 ) = − 10 dB
P 
Also, gain in dB = 10 log 0  …(i)
 Pi 
Here P0 is the power of the received signal.
Putting the given values in Eq. (i),
P  P
− 10 = 10 log 0  = − 10 log i 
 Pi   P0 
Pi P
⇒ log = 1 ⇒ log i = log 10
P0 P0
Pi
⇒ = 10 ⇒ 1000W = 10 P0
P0
⇒ Po = 100 W
Q. 4 A speech signal of 3 kHz is used to modulate a carrier signal of frequency

1 MHz, using amplitude modulation. The frequencies of the side bands will
be
(a) 1.003 MHz and 0.997 MHz (b) 3001 kHz and 2997 kHz
(c) 1003 kHz and 1000 kHz (d) 1 MHz and 0.997 MHz
K Thinking Process
The amplitude modulated signal consists of the carrier wave of frequency ω c with two
additional sinusoidal waves, one of frequency (ω c − ω m ) and other of frequency
(ω c + ω m ) . These two waves are called side bands and their frequencies are called side
band frequency.
Ans. (a) Given, frequency of carrier signal is ωc = 1MHz
and frequency of speech signal = 3 kHz
= 3 × 10−3 MHz
= 0.003 MHz
Now, we know that,
Frequencies of side bands = (ωc ± ωm )
= (1 ± 0.003)
= 1003
. MHz and 0.997 MHz
Q. 5 A message signal of frequency ω m is superposed on a carrier wave of

frequency ω c to get an Amplitude Modulated Wave (AM). The frequency of
the AM wave will be
ωc + ωm ωc − ωm
(a) ω m (b) ω c (c) (d)
2 2
K Thinking Process
In amplitude modulation, the frequency of modulated wave is equal to the frequency of
carrier wave.
Ans. (b) Here, according to the question, frequency of carrier wave is ωc .
Thus the amplitude modulated wave also has frequency ωc .
Communication System 251
Q. 6 I -V characteristics of four devices are shown in figure.
I I I I
V V V V
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
Identify devices that can be used for modulation
(a) (i) and (iii) (b) only (iii)
(c) (ii) and some regions of (iv) (d) All the devices can be used
K Thinking Process
A square law device is something where either current or voltage depends on the square
of the other.
Ans. (c) The device which follows square law is used for modulation purpose. Characteristics
shown by (i) and (iii) corresponds to linear devices.
Characteristics shown by (ii) corresponds to square law device. Some part of (i) also
follow square law.
Hence, (ii) and (iv) can be used for modulation.
Q. 7 A male voice after modulation-transmission sounds like that of a female

to the receiver. The problem is due to
(a) poor selection of modulation index (selected 0 < m < 1)
(b) poor bandwidth selection of amplifiers
(c) poor selection of carrier frequency
(d) loss of energy in transmission.
K Thinking Process
The frequency of male voice less than that of a female voice.
Ans. (b) Here, in this question, the frequency of modulated signal received becomes more,
which is possible with the poor bandwidth selection of amplifiers.
This happens because bandwidth in amplitude modulation is equal to twice the
frequency of modulating signal.
But, the frequency of male voice is less than that of a female.
Q. 8 A basic communication system consists of

A. transmitter. B. information source.
C. user of information. D. channel.
E. receiver.
Choose the correct sequence in which these are arranged in a basic
communication system.
(a) ABCDE (b) BADEC (c) BDACE (d) BEADC
Ans. (b) A communication system is the set-up used in the transmission and reception of
information from one place to another.
The whole system consist of several elements in a sequence. It can be represented as

the diagram given below
Information User of
Source
(B) (C) Information
Message Transmitted Communication Received Message

Transmitter Receiver
Signal Signal Channel Signal Signal
(A) (D) (E)
Noise
Q. 9 Identify the mathematical expression for amplitude modulated wave

(a) Ac sin[{ω c + k1Vm(t )}t + φ ] (b) Ac sin{ω ct + φ + k2 Vm(t )}
(c) {Ac + k2 Vm(t )} sin(ω ct + φ) (d) Ac Vm(t ) sin(ω ct + φ)
K Thinking Process
An arbitrary change in phase angle of the modulating signal is given by φ.
Ans. (c) Consider a sinusoidal modulating signal represented by
m(t ) = Am sinωm t …(i)
where, Am = Amplitude of modulating signal ωm = Angular frequency = 2 π Vm = φVm
Also consider a sinusoidal carrier wave represented by C (t ) = A c sinω c t …(ii)
Thus, modulated wave is given by
C m (t ) = ( Ac + Am sinωm t ) sinωc t
A
= Ac [1 + m sinωm t ) sinωc t
Ac
Am
Here, =M
Ac
⇒ C m (t ) = ( Ac + Ac × µ sinωm t ) sinωc t …(iii)
Now, we know that Ac × µ = K [wave constant]
and sin ωm t = Vm [wave velocity]
Thus, Eq. (iii) becomes
C m(t ) = ( Ac + K × Vm ) sin ωc t
Now, consider a change in phase angle by φ then sin ωc t → sin(ωc t + φ)
Thus, C m (t ) = ( Ac + KVm ) (sin ωc + φ)

Q. 10 An audio signal of 15 kHz frequency cannot be transmitted over long
distances without modulation, because
(a) the size of the required antenna would be at least 5 km which is not convenient
(b) the audio signal can not be transmitted through sky waves
(c) the size of the required antenna would be at least 20 km, which is not
convenient
(d) effective power transmitted would be very low, if the size of the antenna is less
than 5 km
K Thinking Process
Transmission of a signal depends on three factors. These are size of antenna, medium of
transmission and power of transmitted wave.
Ans. (a, b, d)
Given, frequency of the wave to be transmitted is
νm = 15 kHz = 15 × 103 Hz
c 3 × 108 1
Wavelength λ m = = = × 105 m
νm 15 × 103 5
λ 1
l = = ×  × 105 
1
Size of the antenna required,
4 4 5 
= 5 × 103 m = 5km
The audio signals are of low frequency waves. Thus, they cannot be transmitted through sky
waves as they are absorbed by atmosphere.
If the size of the antenna is less than 5 km, the effective power transmission would be very
low because of deviation from resonance wavelength of wave and antenna length.
Q. 11Audio sine waves of 3 kHz frequency are used to amplitude modulate a

carrier signal of 1.5 MHz. Which of the following statements are true?
(a) The side band frequencies are 1506 kHz and 1494 kHz
(b) The bandwidth required for amplitude modulation is 6kHz
(c) The bandwidth required for amplitude modulation is 3 MHz
(d) The side band frequencies are 1503 kHz and 1497 kHz
K Thinking Process
Here, in this question, options are giving the value of side band frequencies and band
width of amplitude modulation. So, first of all find this quantities.
Ans. (b, d)
Given, ωm = 3 kHz
ωc = 15
. MHz = 1500 kHz
Now, side band frequencies
ωc ± ωm = (1500 ± 3)
= 1503 kHz and 1497 kHz
Also, bandwidth = 2ωm = 2 × 3 = 6 kHz
Q. 12 A TV transmission tower has a height of 240 m. Signals broadcast from

this tower will be received by LOS communication at a distance of
(assume the radius of earth to be (6.4 × 10 6 m)
(a) 100 km (b) 24 km (c) 55 km (d) 50 km
K Thinking Process
Range dT = 2RhT
Ans. (b,c,d)
Given, height of tower h = 240 m
For LOS (line of sight) communication.
The maximum distance on earth from the transmitter upto which a signal can be received is
given by
d = 2 Rh ...(i)
Here R is the radius of the earth i.e., R = 6. 4 × 106 m
Putting all these values in Eq. (i),
we get d = 2 Rh = 2 × 6.4 × 106 × 240
= 55.4 × 103 m = 55.4 km
Thus, the range of 55.4 km covers the distance 24 km, 55 km and 50 km.
Q. 13 The frequency response curve (figure) for the filter circuit used for
production of AM wave should be
Gain Gain Gain Gain
ω ω
ωc+ ωm ωc– ωm ωc– ωm ωc+ ωm ωc– ωm ωc+ ωm
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(a) (i) followed by (ii) (b) (ii) followed by (i)
(c) (iii) (d) (iv)
Ans. (a, b, c)
Here, for the production of amplitude modulated wave, bandwidth is given by = frequency of
upper side band − frequency of lower side band
= ωUSB − ωLSB = (ωc + ωm ) − (ωc − ωm )
Q. 14 In amplitude modulation, the modulation index m, is kept less than or

equal to 1 because
(a) m > 1, will result in interference between carrier frequency and message
frequency, resulting into distortion
(b) m > 1, will result in overlapping of both side bands resulting into loss of
information
(c) m > 1, will result in change in phase between carrier signal and message signal
(d) m > 1, indicates amplitude of message signal greater than amplitude of carrier
signal resulting into distortion
Ans. (b, d)
The modulation index (m) of amplitude modulated wave is
amplitude of message signal ( Am )
m=
amplitude of carrier signal ( Ac )
If m > 1, then Am > Ac .
In this situation, there will be distortion of the resulting signal of amplitude modulated wave.
Maximum modulation frequency (mf ) of Am wave is
∆νmax
mf =
νm (max)
frequency deviation
=
maximum frequency value of modulating wave
If mf > 1, then ∆νmax > νm . It means, there will be overlapping of both side bands of
modulated wave resulting into loss of information.

Q. 15 Which of the following would produce analog signals and which would
produce digital signals?
(a) A vibrating tuning fork
(b) Musical sound due to a vibrating sitar string
(c) Light pulse
(d) Output of NAND gate
Ans. Analog and digital signals are used to transmit information, usually through electric
signals. In both these technologies, the information such as any audio or video is
transformed into electric signals.
The difference between analog and digital technologies is that in analog technology,
information is translated into electric pulses of varying amplitude. In digital technology,
translation of information is into binary formal (zero or one) where each bit is representative
of two distinct amplitudes.
Thus, (a) and (b) would produce analog signal and (c) and (d) would produce digital
signals.
Q. 16 Would sky waves be suitable for transmission of TV signals of 60 MHz

frequency?
Ans. A signal to be transmitted through sky waves must have a frequency range of 1710 kHz to
40 MHz.
But, here the frequency of TV signals are 60 MHz which is beyond the required range.
So, sky waves will not be suitable for transmission of TV signals of 60 MHz frequency.
Q. 17 Two waves A and B of frequencies 2MHz and 3MHz, respectively are

beamed in the same direction for communication via sky wave. Which
one of these is likely to travel longer distance in the ionosphere before
suffering total internal reflection?
Ans. As the frequency of wave B is more than wave A, it means the refractive index of wave B is
more than refractive index of wave A (as refractive index increases with frequency
increases).
For higher frequency wave (i.e., higher refractive index) the angle of refraction is less i.e.,
bending is less. So, wave B travel longer distance in the ionosphere before suffering total
internal reflection.
Q. 18 The maximum amplitude of an AM wave is found to be 15 V while its

minimum amplitude is found to be 3 V. What is the modulation index?
Ans. Let A c and A m be the amplitudes of carrier wave and modulating wave respectively. So,
Maximum amplitude → A max = A c + A m = 15 V ...(i)
Minimum amplitude → A min = A c − A m = 3 V ...(ii)
Adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
2 A c = 18
or Ac = 9 V
and A m = 15 − 9 = 6 V
A 6 2
Modulating index of wave µ = m = =
Ac 9 3
Q. 19 Compute the LC product of a tuned amplifier circuit required to generate

a carrier wave of 1 MHz for amplitude modulation.
K Thinking Process
1
For tuned amplifier f =
2π LC
Ans. Given, the frequency of carrier wave is 1 MHz.
Formula for the frequency of tuned amplifier,
1
= 1MHz
2 π LC
1
LC =
2 π × 106
1
LC = = 2.54 × 10−14 s
(2 π × 106 )2
Thus, the product of LC is 2.54 × 10−14 s.
Q. 20 Why is a AM signal likely to be more noisy than a FM signal upon

transmission through a channel?
Ans. In case of AM, the instantaneous voltage of carrier waves is varied by the modulating wave
voltage. So, during the transmission, nosie signals can also be added and receiver
assumes noise a part of the modulating signal.
In case of FM, the frequency of carrier waves is changed as the change in the instantaneous
voltage of modulating waves. This can be done by mixing and not while the signal is
transmitting in channel. So, noise does not affect FM signal.

Q. 21 Figure shows a communication system. What is the output power when
input signal is of 1.01 mW? [gain in dB = 10 log 10 (P0 / Pi )]
10dB 20dB
Loss 2dB km –1
Input Output
5.0 km
Amplifier Amplifier
Ans. The distance travelled by the signal is 5 km

Loss suffered in path of transmission = 2 dB/km
So, total loss suffered in 5 km = − 2 × 5 = − 10 dB
Total amplifier gain = 10 dB + 20 dB = 30 dB
Overall gain in signal = 30 − 10 = 20 dB
P
According to the question, gain in dB = 10 log10 0
Pi
P0
∴ 20 = 10 log10
Pi
P0
or log10 =2
Pi
Here, Pi = 101
. mW and P0 is the output power.
P0
∴ = 102 = 100
Pi
⇒ P0 = Pi × 100 = 101
. × 100
or P0 = 101mW
Thus, the output power is 101 mW.
Q. 22 A TV transmission tower antenna is at a height of 20 m. How much

service area can it cover if the receiving antenna is (i) at ground level,
(ii) at a height of 25 m? Calculate the percentage increase in area
covered in case (ii) relative to case (i).
Ans. Given, height of antenna h = 20 m
Radius of earth = 6.4 × 106 m
At the ground level,
(i) Range = 2 hR = 2 × 20 × 6.4 × 106
= 16000 m = 16 km
Area covered A = π (range )2
= 314
. × 16 × 16 = 803.84 km2
(ii) At a height of H = 25 m from ground level
Range = 2 hR + 2 HR
= 2 × 20 × 6.4 × 106 + 2 × 25 × 6.4 × 106
= 16 × 103 + 17.9 × 103
= 33.9 × 103 m
= 33.9 km
Area covered = π (Range) 2

= 314
. × 33.9 × 33.9
= 3608.52 km 2
Difference in area
Percentage increase in area = × 100
Initial area
(3608.52 − 803.84)
= × 100
803.84
= 348.9%
Thus, the percentage increase in area covered is 348.9%
Q. 23 If the whole earth is to be connected by LOS communication using space

waves (no restriction of antenna size or tower height), what is the
minimum number of antennas required? Calculate the tower height of
these antennas in terms of earth's radius.
K Thinking Process
Range dT = 2Rht
Ans. Consider the figure given below to solve this question

A
ht ht
dm
B
ht O R
Suppose the height of transmitting antenna or receiving antenna in order to cover the entire
surface of earth through communication is h t and radius of earth is R
Then, maximum distance
2
dm = (R + h t )2 + (R + h t )2
= 2 (R + h t )2
d m = 2 ht R + 2 ht R = 2 2 ht R
∴ 8h t R = 2(R + h t )2
⇒ 4h t R = R 2 + 2 Rh t + h t2
⇒ R 2 − 2 h t R + h2t = 0
⇒ (R − h t )2 = 0
⇒ R = ht
Since, space wave frequency is used so λ < < h t ,hence only tower height is to be taken into
consideration. In three dimensions of earth, 6 antenna towers of each of height ht = R would
be used to cover the entire surface of earth with communication programme.
Q. 24 The maximum frequency for reflection of sky waves from a certain layer
of the ionosphere is found to be f max = 9 (Nmax ) 1/ 2 , where Nmax is the
maximum electron density at that layer of the ionosphere.
On a certain day it is observed that signals of frequencies higher than
5 MHz are not received by reflection from the F 1 layer of the ionosphere
while signals of frequencies higher than 8 MHz are not received by
reflection from the F2 layer of the ionosphere. Estimate the maximum
electron densities of the F 1 and F2 layers on that day.
Ans. The maximum frequency for reflection of sky waves
fmax = 9 (Nmax )1/ 2
where, Nmax is a maximum electron density.
For F1 layer, fmax = 5 MHz
So, 5 × 106 = 9 (Nmax )1/ 2
Maximum electron density
2
Nmax =  × 106  = 3.086 × 1011 /m3
5
9 
For F2 layer, fmax = 8 MHz
So, 8 × 106 = 9 (Nmax )1/ 2
Maximum electron density
2
 8 × 106 
Nmax =   = 7.9 × 1011 / m3
 9 
Q. 25 On radiating (sending out) and AM modulated signal, the total radiated

power is due to energy carried by ω c , ω c − ω m and ω c + ω m . Suggest
ways to minimise cost of radiation without compromising on
information.
Ans. In amplitude modulated signal, only side band frequencies contain information. Thus only
(ωc + ωm ) and (ωc − ωm ) contain information.
Now, according to question, the total radiated power is due to energy carried by
ωc , (ωc − ωm )and (ωc + ωm ).
Thus to minimise the cost of radiation without compromising on information ωc can be left
and transmitting. (ωc + ωm ), (ωc − ωm ) or both (ωc + ωm ) and (ωc − ωm ).

Q. 26 The intensity of a light pulse travelling along a communication channel
decreases exponentially with distance x according to the relation
I = I 0 e − αx , where I 0 is the intensity at x = 0 and α is the attenuation
constant.
 ln 4 
(a) Show that the intensity reduces by 75 % after a distance of  .
 α 
(b) Attenuation of a signal can be expressed in decibel (dB) according to
 I 
the relation dB = 10 log 10   . What is the attenuation in dB/km for
 I0 
an optical fibre in which the intensity falls by 50 % over a distance of
50 km?
Ans. (a) Given, the intensity of a light pulse I = I 0e − αx
where, I 0 is the intensity at x = 0 and α is constant.
25 I
According to the question, I = 25% of I 0 = ⋅ I0 = 0
100 4
Using the formula mentioned in the question,
I = I 0e − αx
= I 0e − αx
I0
4
1
or = e − αx
4
Taking log on both sides, we get
ln1 − ln 4 = − αx ln e (Qln e = 1)
− ln4 = − αx
ln 4
x=
α
ln 4
Therefore, at distance x = , the intensity is reduced to 75% of initial intensity.
α
(b) Let α be the attenuation in dB/km. If x is the distance travelled by signal, then
 I 
10 log10   = − αx …(i)
 I0 
where, I 0 is the intensity initially.
I0
According to the question, I = 50% of I 0 = and x = 50 km
2
Putting the value of x in Eq. (i), we get
I0
10log10 = − α × 50
2 I0
10 [log 1 − log 2 ] = − 50 α
10 × 0.3010
=α
50
∴ The attenuation for an optical fibre
α = 0.0602 dB/km
Q. 27 A 50 MHz sky wave takes 4.04 ms to reach a receiver via re-transmission

from a satellite 600 km above Earth’s surface. Assuming re-transmission
time by satellite negligible, find the distance between source and
receiver. If communication between the two was to be done by Line of
Sight (LOS) method, what should size and placement of receiving and
transmitting antenna be?
Ans. Let the receiver is at point A and source is at B.
x x
hs
A B
d d
Velocity of waves = 3 × 108 m/s
Time to reach a receiver = 4.04 ms = 4.04 × 10−3 s
Let the height of satellite is h s = 600 km
Radius of earth = 6400km
Size of transmitting antenna = h T
Distance travelled by wave
We know that = Velocity of waves
Time
2x
= 3 × 108
4.04 × 10−3
3 × 108 × 4.04 × 10−3
or x=
2
= 6.06 × 105 = 606 km
Using Phythagoras theorem,
d 2 = x 2 − h2s = (606)2 − (600)2 = 7236
or d = 85.06 km
So, the distance between source and receiver = 2d
= 2 × 85.06 = 170 km
The maximum distance covered on ground from the transmitter by emitted EM waves
d = 2 RhT
d2
or = hT
2R
7236
or size of antenna hT =
2 × 6400
= 0.565 km = 565 m
Q. 28 An amplitude modulated wave is as shown in figure. Calculate

(i) the percentage modulation,
(ii) peak carrier voltage and
(iii) peak value of information voltage
V
100V
200V
t
Ans. From the diagram,

100
Maximum voltage Vmax = = 50 V
2
20
Minimum voltage Vmin = = 10 V
2
V − Vmin 50 − 10
(i) Percentage modulation, µ = max × 100 = × 100
Vmax + Vmin 50 + 10
40
= × 100 = 66.67%
60
V + Vmin 50 + 10
(ii) Peak carrier voltage, Vc = max = = 30 V
2 2
(iii) Peak value of information voltage,
66.67
Vm = µVc = × 30 = 20V
100
Q. 29 (i) Draw the plot of amplitude versus ω for an amplitude modulated were
whose carrier wave (ω c ) is carrying two modulating signals, ω 1 and ω2
(ω2 > ω 1 ).
(ii) Is the plot symmetrical about ω c ? Comment especially about plot in
region ω < ω c .
(iii) Extrapolate and predict the problems one can expect if more waves are
to be modulated.
(iv) Suggest solutions to the above problem. In the process can one
understand another advantage of modulation in terms of bandwidth?
Ans. (i) The plot of amplitude versus ω can be shown in the figure below
ωm1 + ωm2
(ωm1–ωm2) ωc–ωm1 ωc+ωm1
ωm1 ωm2 (ωc–ωm1) ωc ωc–ωm2

(ii) From figure, we note that frequency spectrum is not symmetrical about ωc . Crowding of
spectrum is present for ω < ωc .
(iii) If more waves are to be modulated then there will be more crowding in the modulating
signal in the region ω < ωc . That will result more chances of mixing of signals.
(iv) To accommodate more signals, we should increase bandwidth and frequency carrier
waves ωc . This shows that large carrier frequency enables to carry more information
(i.e., more ωm ) and the same will in turn increase bandwidth.
Q. 30 An audio signal is modulated by a carrier wave of 20 MHz such that the

bandwidth required for modulation is 3kHz. Could this wave be
demodulated by a diode detector which has the values of R and C as
(i) R = 1 kΩ, C = 0.01µF.
(ii) R = 10 kΩ, C = 0.01µF.
(iii) R = 10 kΩ, C = 0.1µF.
Ans. Given, carrier wave frequency fc = 20 MHz
= 20 × 106 Hz
Bandwidth required for modulation is
2 fm = 3kHz = 3 × 103 Hz
3 × 103
⇒ fm = = 1.5 × 103 Hz
2
1 1
Demodulation by a diode is possible if the condition << RC < is satisfied
fc fm
1 1
Thus, = = 0.5 × 10−7 ..(i)
fc 20 × 106
1 1
and = Hz = 07 . × 10−3 s ....(ii)
fm 15 . × 103
Now, gain through all the options of R and C one by one, we get
(i) RC = 1 k Ω × 0.01 µF = 103 Ω × (0.01 × 10−6 F ) = 10−5 s
1 1
Here, condition << RC < is satisfied.
fc fm
Hence it can be demodulated.
(ii) RC = 10 k Ω × 0.01 µF = 104 Ω × 10−8 F = 10−4 s
1 1
Here condition << RC < is satisfied.
fc fm
Hence, it can be demodulated.
(iii) RC = 10 k Ω × 1µµF = 104 Ω × 10−12 F = 10−8 s
1
Here, condition > RC, so this cannot be demodulated.
fc

Arihant, Ncert Exemplar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Arihant, Ncert Exemplar

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Arihant, Ncert Exemplar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sanjeev Kumar

ADMINISTRATIVE & PRODUCTION OFFICES

SALES & SUPPORT OFFICES

Published by Arihant Publications (India) Ltd.

/arihantpub /@arihantpub Arihant Publications /arihantpub

Q. 2 A point positive charge is brought near an isolated conducting sphere

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Q. 3 The electric flux through the surface

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

(a) in Fig. (iv) is the largest

Q. 4 Five charges q 1 , q2 , q 3 , q 4 , and q 5 are fixed at their positions as shown in

Q. 5 Figure shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole P is placed as

(a) The dipole will not experience any force

Q. 6 A point charge + q is placed at a distance d from an isolated conducting

Q. 7 A hemisphere is uniformely charged positively. The electric field at a point

Multiple Choice Questions (More Than One Options)

Q. 9 The electric field at a point is

Q. 10 If there were only one type of charge in the universe, then

(b) ∫ E. dS = 0 if the charge is outside the surface

(c) ∫ E. dS could not be defined

Q. 12 Refer to the arrangement of charges in figure and a Gaussian surface of

Q. 13 A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed along a circular ring of radius

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Q. 15 A metallic spherical shell has an inner radius R 1 and outer radius R2 . A

Q. 16 The dimensions of an atom are of the order of an Angstrom. Thus, there

Side view Top view

(d) D mid-point of B and C D

Short Answer Type Questions

Q. 21 Consider a coin of Question 20. It is electrically neutral and contains

Q. 22 Figure represents a crystal unit of cesium chloride, CsCl. The cesium

Q. 23 Two charges q and − 3q are placed fixed on x-axis separated by distance

(i) Which charges are positive?

(iii) If charge q at A is replaced by − q, then two negative charges − 2q will develop

Long Answer Type Questions

Thus, 10− 18 is the required critical value of Y corresponding to which expansion of

(b) Net force experience by the hydrogen atom is given by

Q. 27 Consider a sphere of radius R with charge density distributed as p(r ) = kr

For points r > R, electric field intensity will be given by

Thus, net force on proton 1 will be zero, when

On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

Q. 29 There is another useful system of units, besides the SI/MKS. A system,

If ∠APO = O, the net force on q along PO is F ′ = 2 F cos Q

Q. 31 Total charge − Q is uniformly spread along length of a ring of radius R.A

Q. 2 A positively charged particle is released from rest in an uniform electric

Q. 3 Figure shows some equipotential lines distributed in space. A charged

Q. 4 The electrostatic potential on the surface of a charged conducting sphere

Q. 5 Equipotentials at a great distance from a collection of charges whose total

Q. 6 A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks in series. One of

Multiple Choice Questions (More Than One Options)

Q. 9 The work done to move a charge along an equipotential from A to B

Q. 10 In a region of constant potential

Q. 11 In the circuit shown in figure initially key K 1 is closed and key K 2 is

Q. 12 If a conductor has a potential V ≠ 0 and there are no charges anywhere

Q. 13 A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery as shown in figure.

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Q. 15 Do free electrons travel to region of higher potential or lower potential?

Q. 16 Can there be a potential difference between two adjacent conductors

Q. 18 A test charge q is made to move in the electric field of a point charge Q

Short Answer Type Questions

Q. 21 Prove that, if an insulated, uncharged conductor is placed near a